1626LM 5.0B User Provisioning Guide Ed02

Title page

Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM1626 Light Manager | Release 5.0BUser Provisioning Guide

3AL-75164-AAAA

ISSUE 2

OCTOBER 2009

Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction

Solely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction

Legal notice

Legal notice

Alcatel, Lucent, Alcatel-Lucent and the Alcatel-Lucent logo are trademarks of Alcatel-Lucent. All other trademarks are the property of their respective

owners.

The information presented is subject to change without notice. Alcatel-Lucent assumes no responsibility for inaccuracies contained herein.

Copyright © 2009 Alcatel-Lucent. All rights reserved.

Contains proprietary/trade secret information which is the property of Alcatel-Lucent and must not be made available to, or copied or used by anyone outside

Alcatel-Lucent without its written authorization.

�ot to be used or disclosed except in accordance with applicable agreements.

Alcatel, Lucent, Alcatel-Lucent and the Alcatel-Lucent logo are trademarks of Alcatel-Lucent. All other trademarks are the property of their respective

owners.

The information presented is subject to change without notice. Alcatel-Lucent assumes no responsibility for inaccuracies contained herein.

Copyright © 2007 Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved.

Solely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction


Contents

About this document

Purpose ......................................................................................................................................................................................... xxvxxv

Intended audience ..................................................................................................................................................................... xxvxxv

Supported systems .................................................................................................................................................................... xxvxxv

How to use this document .................................................................................................................................................... xxvixxvi

Related documentation ........................................................................................................................................................ xxviiixxviii

Related training ...................................................................................................................................................................... xxviiixxviii

Technical support .................................................................................................................................................................. xxviiixxviii

How to order ........................................................................................................................................................................... xxviiixxviii

Quality policy ............................................................................................................................................................................ xxixxxix

Safety messages ....................................................................................................................................................................... xxixxxix

How to comment ...................................................................................................................................................................... xxixxxix

1 Discovering Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM

Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 1-11-1

Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM Quick Presentation

Introducing Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM ................................................................................................................................. 1-21-2

Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LMManagement

Introducing Alcatel-Lucent LM Management ................................................................................................................. 1-31-3

About the Online Help

Online Help Scope ..................................................................................................................................................................... 1-41-4

2 Before You Start With 1626 LM Management

Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-12-1

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

3AL-75164-AAAAIssue 2 October 2009


iii

Understanding the 1626 LMManagement

Quick Overview of 1626 LM Management ..................................................................................................................... 2-22-2

Craft Terminal Hardware Requirements ............................................................................................................................ 2-32-3

Software Requirements ............................................................................................................................................................ 2-32-3

Management Start Up Procedures

Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 2-42-4

Installing the Craft Terminal Application .......................................................................................................................... 2-52-5

Uninstalling the Craft Terminal Application .................................................................................................................... 2-62-6

3 Operation Graphical User Interface

Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-13-1

Introducing the Operating and Maintenance GUI

Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-23-2

The Equipment ViewWindow .............................................................................................................................................. 3-33-3

The Subrack ViewWindow ................................................................................................................................................... 3-53-5

The Board ViewWindow ........................................................................................................................................................ 3-73-7

The Transmission ViewWindow ....................................................................................................................................... 3-153-15

The Equipment OverviewWindow .................................................................................................................................. 3-183-18

Describing the Permanent Displayed Areas

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-203-20

The Title Bar ............................................................................................................................................................................. 3-203-20

The Menu Bar ........................................................................................................................................................................... 3-203-20

Alarm Severity Indicators .................................................................................................................................................... 3-263-26

Operation Domain Alarm Indicators ................................................................................................................................ 3-283-28

Management Status Indicators ............................................................................................................................................ 3-293-29

Describing and Using the Search for Termination Point Input Windows

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-313-31

Search for Termination Point Input Window ................................................................................................................. 3-323-32

Using the Search for Termination Point Input Window ............................................................................................ 3-323-32

Contents

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

iv Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction


4 1626 LM Management Start Up

Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-14-1

Starting Up with 1626 LMManagement

Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-24-2

Starting the Craft Terminal Application ............................................................................................................................. 4-34-3

Starting the 1626 LM Supervision ....................................................................................................................................... 4-44-4

Starting the 1626 LM GUI ..................................................................................................................................................... 4-54-5

Managing the Access State

Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 4-64-6

Access State Icon Status .......................................................................................................................................................... 4-74-7

Setting the Access State to the Craft Terminal Application ........................................................................................ 4-84-8

Setting the Access State to the 1353 �M .......................................................................................................................... 4-94-9

5 Software Download Management

Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 5-15-1

Downloading a Software Package ....................................................................................................................................... 5-25-2

Activating a Software Package ............................................................................................................................................. 5-45-4

Displaying Software Package Information ....................................................................................................................... 5-55-5

6 Communication Configuration

Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-16-1

Communication and Routing Management Parameters

Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-26-2

Common �etwork Concepts .................................................................................................................................................. 6-36-3

Local Area Addressing Parameters ...................................................................................................................................... 6-46-4

Time Synchronization Parameters ....................................................................................................................................... 6-66-6

Ethernet Interface Parameters ............................................................................................................................................... 6-76-7

IP Static Routes Parameters ................................................................................................................................................... 6-96-9

LAPD Parameters .................................................................................................................................................................... 6-106-10

IP Tunnel Parameter ............................................................................................................................................................... 6-116-11

Contents

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



v

Managing Communication and Routing

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 6-126-12

Setting Up 1626 LM Local Area Addressing Parameters ......................................................................................... 6-136-13

Setting Up the �etwork Manager Address Associated to the 1626 LM .............................................................. 6-146-14

Identifying a �etwork Element as a �TP Server ......................................................................................................... 6-156-15

Disabling A�TP from the 1626 LM ................................................................................................................................. 6-166-16

Forcing the 1626 LM Date and Time with 1353 �M values .................................................................................. 6-176-17

Configuring the Ethernet Interface ................................................................................................................................... 6-186-18

Configuring IP Static Routes ............................................................................................................................................... 6-196-19

Configuring LAPD ................................................................................................................................................................. 6-216-21

Managing OSI over IP ........................................................................................................................................................... 6-236-23

7 Database Backup and Restore

Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-17-1

When to Backup and Restore ?

When to Backup? ....................................................................................................................................................................... 7-27-2

When to Restore? ....................................................................................................................................................................... 7-27-2

Managing the MIB

Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 7-37-3

Backing Up the MIB ................................................................................................................................................................. 7-47-4

Restoring the MIB ..................................................................................................................................................................... 7-57-5

Deleting the MIB ....................................................................................................................................................................... 7-77-7

8 Racks and Subracks Management

Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-18-1

Displaying Hardware Views

Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-28-2

Displaying the General Overview of the 1626 LM Hardware .................................................................................. 8-38-3

Displaying the Rack View ...................................................................................................................................................... 8-48-4

Displaying the Subrack View ................................................................................................................................................ 8-58-5

Contents

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

vi Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction


Displaying the Board View .................................................................................................................................................... 8-68-6

Managing Racks

Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-78-7

Declaring a Rack ........................................................................................................................................................................ 8-88-8

Setting a Rack In Service ..................................................................................................................................................... 8-108-10

Setting a Rack Out Of Service ............................................................................................................................................ 8-118-11

Undeclaring/Removing a Rack .......................................................................................................................................... 8-128-12

Managing Subracks

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 8-138-13

Declaring a Subrack ............................................................................................................................................................... 8-148-14

Setting a Subrack In Service ............................................................................................................................................... 8-158-15

Setting a Subrack Out Of Service ...................................................................................................................................... 8-168-16

Undeclaring/Removing a Subrack .................................................................................................................................... 8-178-17

9 Board and SFP/XFP Module Management

Overview ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-19-1

About Board Provisioning and Configuration

About the Provisioning Process ............................................................................................................................................ 9-49-4

About ETHC Configurations ................................................................................................................................................. 9-59-5

About TRBD1191 Board ...................................................................................................................................................... 9-119-11

Declaring/Undeclaring Boards

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-129-12

TRBx and Mux/Demux Models and Features .............................................................................................................. 9-139-13

Declaring OCPU Protection Boards ................................................................................................................................. 9-199-19

Declaring Control and Service Boards ............................................................................................................................ 9-209-20

Declaring TRBD Boards ....................................................................................................................................................... 9-229-22

Declaring TRBC boards ........................................................................................................................................................ 9-269-26

Declaring OSCU Supervision Boards .............................................................................................................................. 9-299-29

Declaring BMDX Boards ..................................................................................................................................................... 9-319-31

Contents

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



vii

Declaring OMDX Boards ..................................................................................................................................................... 9-339-33

Declaring CMDX Boards ..................................................................................................................................................... 9-359-35

Declaring the ALCT (Automatic Level Control) Board ........................................................................................... 9-369-36

Declaring LOFA11xx Amplifier Boards ......................................................................................................................... 9-389-38

Declaring BOFAAmplifier Boards ................................................................................................................................... 9-409-40

Declaring Ethernet Boards ................................................................................................................................................... 9-429-42

Declaring TDMX 1180 boards ........................................................................................................................................... 9-449-44

Declaring OADC boards ....................................................................................................................................................... 9-469-46

Declaring WMA�1100 Boards .......................................................................................................................................... 9-479-47

Declaring WMA� 3x74 Boards ........................................................................................................................................ 9-499-49

Undeclaring/Removing Boards .......................................................................................................................................... 9-519-51

Board Configuration Parameters

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-539-53

Board Generic Configuration Parameters ...................................................................................................................... 9-539-53

Board Specific Configuration Parameters ...................................................................................................................... 9-559-55

Laser Power Configuration Parameters ........................................................................................................................... 9-629-62

TRBx Shutdown Criteria ...................................................................................................................................................... 9-649-64

LOFA11xx Power Tuning Parameters ............................................................................................................................. 9-659-65

LOFA11xxAPSD Parameters ............................................................................................................................................. 9-689-68

TDMX and WMA� Configuration Parameters ........................................................................................................... 9-699-69

Configuring Boards

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-739-73

Configuring ETHCWorking Mode .................................................................................................................................. 9-749-74

Managing ETHC Cross Connections ............................................................................................................................... 9-759-75

Configuring 2xGBE_FC Board Signal Type Transportation .................................................................................. 9-779-77

Configuring TRBx or ALCT Laser Output Power ...................................................................................................... 9-789-78

Configuring LOFA11xx Laser Output Power ............................................................................................................... 9-799-79

Configuring WMA� Laser Power .................................................................................................................................... 9-809-80

Configuring TRBx Frequency ............................................................................................................................................ 9-819-81

Contents

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

viii Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction


Configuring TRBx Transmission Parameters ............................................................................................................... 9-829-82

Configuring TRBx Shutdown Criteria ............................................................................................................................. 9-839-83

Configuring 40 Gbps TRBC Ethernet Mapping .......................................................................................................... 9-849-84

Configuring LOFA11xxAPSD .......................................................................................................................................... 9-859-85

Configuring Contradirectionality ...................................................................................................................................... 9-869-86

Configuring the BMDX Band associated to a CMDX Board ................................................................................. 9-879-87

Configuring ALCTWorking Mode ................................................................................................................................... 9-889-88

Configuring ALCT Stimulated Brillouin Scattering Mechanism .......................................................................... 9-909-90

Configuring TDMX 1180 Port Profile ............................................................................................................................. 9-919-91

Configuring TDMX 1180 Output Power ........................................................................................................................ 9-929-92

Configuring WMA� Provisioning Parameters ............................................................................................................ 9-939-93

Configuring WMA� 1100 Equalization Parameter .................................................................................................... 9-949-94

Configuring Channels on WMA� 3x74 boards ........................................................................................................... 9-959-95

Setting Boards In/Out of Service

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-969-96

Setting a Board In Service .................................................................................................................................................... 9-979-97

Setting a Board Out of Service ........................................................................................................................................... 9-989-98

Managing SFP/XFPModules

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 9-999-99

About SFP/XFPModules and Board Compatibility ................................................................................................ 9-1009-100

Declaring a SFP/XFPModule .......................................................................................................................................... 9-1019-101

Setting a SFP/XFPModule In Service .......................................................................................................................... 9-1029-102

Setting a SFP/XFPModule Out of Service ................................................................................................................. 9-1039-103

Undeclaring/Removing SFP/XFPModules ................................................................................................................ 9-1049-104

Displaying SFP/XFPModule Payload .......................................................................................................................... 9-1059-105

Changing an SFP or an XFP ............................................................................................................................................. 9-1069-106

Activating Firmware

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................. 9-1079-107

Firmware Activation Displayed Information .............................................................................................................. 9-1079-107

Contents

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



ix

Activating Firmware ............................................................................................................................................................ 9-1089-108

Controlling TRBx, ETHC and 2*GE_FC Board Laser

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................. 9-1099-109

Laser Control Parameters ................................................................................................................................................... 9-1099-109

Controlling TRBx, ETHC and 2*GE_FC Boards Laser ......................................................................................... 9-1119-111

Managing External Points

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................. 9-1139-113

About External Points ......................................................................................................................................................... 9-1139-113

External Points Parameters ................................................................................................................................................ 9-1159-115

Displaying all External Points .......................................................................................................................................... 9-1169-116

Managing External Input Points ...................................................................................................................................... 9-1179-117

Managing External Output Points ................................................................................................................................... 9-1189-118

Filtering External Input Points ......................................................................................................................................... 9-1199-119

Filtering External Output Points ...................................................................................................................................... 9-1209-120

Managing LOFAUpgrade with EMPM1000

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................. 9-1219-121

Upgrading LOFAwith EMPM1000 in a Line Terminal or a B-OADM without OMSP ............................ 9-1229-122

Upgrading LOFAwith EMPM1000 in a Line Terminal or a B-OADM with OMSP .................................. 9-1249-124

Upgrading LOFAwith EMPM1000 in a T/R-OADM ............................................................................................. 9-1269-126

10 R-OADM and TR-OADM Configuration Management

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-110-1

About R-OADM and TR-OADM

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-210-2

R-OADM and TR-OADMMain characteristics .......................................................................................................... 10-310-3

Boards Involved in R-OADM and TR-OADM �odes .............................................................................................. 10-510-5

R-OADM and TR-OADM Configuration Tasks .......................................................................................................... 10-710-7

R/TR-OADM �etwork Procedures/WMA�3x74 Based

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 10-910-9

Contents

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

x Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction


Creating a Transmission Path ........................................................................................................................................... 10-1010-10

Deleting a Transmission Path ........................................................................................................................................... 10-1310-13

R/TR-OADM Unitary Procedures/WMA�3x74 Based

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................. 10-1610-16

Performing R-OADM and TR-OADM Cross Connections .................................................................................. 10-1710-17

Blocking a Channel Connection ...................................................................................................................................... 10-1910-19

Setting an Add & Drop Connection ............................................................................................................................... 10-2010-20

Setting an Express Connection ........................................................................................................................................ 10-2310-23

R-OADM Unitary Procedures / WMA�1100 Based

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................. 10-2610-26

R-OADM/WMA�1100 Based Configuration Parameters .................................................................................... 10-2710-27

Configuring R-OADM with WMA�1100 Boards ................................................................................................... 10-2810-28

11 Transmission Management

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 11-111-1

About Transmission Management Entities

The Main Transmission Management Entities ............................................................................................................. 11-211-2

About RS-TTI and J0 Configuration

Introducing RS-TTI and J0 .................................................................................................................................................. 11-711-7

Configuring the RS-TTI/J0 .................................................................................................................................................. 11-911-9

About TTI (Trail Trace Identifiers) Configuration

Introducing Optical TTIs (Trail Trace Identifiers) .................................................................................................... 11-1011-10

Configuring TTIs .................................................................................................................................................................. 11-1211-12

Managing Error Correction

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................. 11-1411-14

Enabling the FEC (Forward Error Correction) .......................................................................................................... 11-1511-15

Disabling the FEC (Forward Error Correction) ......................................................................................................... 11-1611-16

Modifying the BER (Bit Error Rate) Threshold ........................................................................................................ 11-1711-17

Contents

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



xi

12 Cross Connection Management

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 12-112-1

About Cross Connections

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 12-212-2

Cross Connection Types ....................................................................................................................................................... 12-312-3

Cross Connections Parameters ........................................................................................................................................... 12-412-4

Managing Cross Connections

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 12-712-7

Displaying Cross Connections for a Subrack ................................................................................................................ 12-812-8

Displaying Cross Connections for a Board .................................................................................................................... 12-912-9

Creating Cross Connections .............................................................................................................................................. 12-1012-10

Modifying Cross Connections .......................................................................................................................................... 12-1112-11

Deleting Cross Connections .............................................................................................................................................. 12-1212-12

13 Connector and Cabling Management

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 13-113-1

Setting Connectors In Service ............................................................................................................................................ 13-213-2

Setting Connectors Out Of Service ................................................................................................................................... 13-313-3

Configuring the Cabling between 2 Connectors .......................................................................................................... 13-413-4

Deleting the Cabling between 2 Connectors ................................................................................................................. 13-513-5

Exporting the Cabling Configuration to an XML File ............................................................................................... 13-613-6

14 Loopback Tests

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 14-114-1

About Loopbacks

Introducing Loopbacks .......................................................................................................................................................... 14-214-2

Loopback Parameters in Display Mode .......................................................................................................................... 14-314-3

Loopback Parameters in Creation Mode ......................................................................................................................... 14-514-5

Managing loopbacks

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 14-614-6

Contents

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

xii Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction


Displaying Existing Loopbacks ......................................................................................................................................... 14-714-7

Creating Loopbacks ................................................................................................................................................................ 14-814-8

Deleting Loopbacks ................................................................................................................................................................ 14-914-9

15 Protection Management

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-115-1

About 1626 LM Protection

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 15-215-2

Protection Principles .............................................................................................................................................................. 15-315-3

Recommended Board Location ....................................................................................................................................... 15-1015-10

The Protection Activation Process .................................................................................................................................. 15-1115-11

Managing Protection

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................. 15-1315-13

Protection Displayed Information ................................................................................................................................... 15-1415-14

Recognizing Cross Connections Dedicated to Protection ...................................................................................... 15-1715-17

Controlling Protection ......................................................................................................................................................... 15-1815-18

16 Monitoring Procedures

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 16-116-1

Displaying Instantaneous Measurements ....................................................................................................................... 16-216-2

Displaying the Abnormal Condition List ........................................................................................................................ 16-616-6

Displaying Event Logs .......................................................................................................................................................... 16-716-7

Displaying the Channel margin .......................................................................................................................................... 16-816-8

Displaying Power Level per Channel Frequency ...................................................................................................... 16-1016-10

17 Performance Monitoring

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 17-117-1

About Performance Management

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 17-317-3

Performance Counters ........................................................................................................................................................... 17-417-4

Performance Monitoring Mechanism .............................................................................................................................. 17-717-7

Contents

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



xiii

Counter Thresholds ................................................................................................................................................................. 17-817-8

Possible Counter Threshold Values .................................................................................................................................. 17-917-9

Managing Counter Threshold Tables

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................. 17-1117-11

Displaying Counter Threshold Tables ........................................................................................................................... 17-1217-12

Modifying Counter Threshold Tables ............................................................................................................................ 17-1317-13

Managing Performance Monitoring

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................. 17-1417-14

Starting Performance Monitoring (PM) ........................................................................................................................ 17-1517-15

Resetting Counter Values ................................................................................................................................................... 17-1717-17

Refreshing Counter Values ................................................................................................................................................ 17-1817-18

Stopping Performance Monitoring ................................................................................................................................. 17-1917-19

Creating a Trail Monitor (TM) ......................................................................................................................................... 17-2017-20

Deleting a Trail Monitor (TM) ......................................................................................................................................... 17-2117-21

Consulting Performance Data

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................. 17-2217-22

Performance Current Data Displayed Information ................................................................................................... 17-2317-23

Performance History Data Displayed Information ................................................................................................... 17-2417-24

Consulting Performance Current Data .......................................................................................................................... 17-2517-25

Consulting Performance History Data .......................................................................................................................... 17-2617-26

Refreshing Current Counter Values ................................................................................................................................ 17-2717-27

Refreshing History Counter Values ................................................................................................................................ 17-2817-28

Managing Performance Monitoring From a Unique Entry Point

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................. 17-2917-29

Understanding the PM OverviewWindow .................................................................................................................. 17-3017-30

Managing Performance Monitoring from the PM Overview Window ............................................................. 17-3117-31

18 System Information Collection and Exportation

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 18-118-1

Contents

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

xiv Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction


Remote Inventory Displayed Information ...................................................................................................................... 18-218-2

Uploading the System Remote Inventory ....................................................................................................................... 18-318-3

Capturing the System Components Remote Inventory Information .................................................................... 18-418-4

Exporting System Configuration to an XML File ....................................................................................................... 18-618-6

19 Alarm Management

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 19-119-1

About Alarms

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 19-319-3

Alarm Types .............................................................................................................................................................................. 19-419-4

Alarm Severity Indicators .................................................................................................................................................... 19-519-5

Operation Domain Alarm Indicators ................................................................................................................................ 19-719-7

Configuring Alarm Severity Assignment Profiles ....................................................................................................... 19-819-8

Managing ASAP (Alarm Severity Assignment Profiles)

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................. 19-1019-10

Displaying ASAP Detailed Information ....................................................................................................................... 19-1119-11

Creating an ASAP ................................................................................................................................................................. 19-1219-12

Modifying an ASAP ............................................................................................................................................................. 19-1419-14

Assigning an ASAP to a Managed Entity .................................................................................................................... 19-1619-16

Assigning ASAP to Multiple Managed Entities ........................................................................................................ 19-1819-18

De-assigning an ASAP from Managed Entities ......................................................................................................... 19-2019-20

Deleting ASAPs ..................................................................................................................................................................... 19-2219-22

Managing Alarm Threshold Tables

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................. 19-2319-23

Alarm Threshold Parameters ............................................................................................................................................ 19-2419-24

Displaying Board Alarm Threshold ............................................................................................................................... 19-2719-27

Creating Alarm Threshold Tables ................................................................................................................................... 19-2819-28

Assigning an Alarm Threshold to a Board ................................................................................................................... 19-3019-30

Modifying Alarm Threshold Tables ............................................................................................................................... 19-3119-31

Contents

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



xv

Deleting Alarm Threshold Tables ................................................................................................................................... 19-3319-33

Managing Auto Discovery Alarm

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................. 19-3419-34

Enabling/Disabling Auto Discovery Alarm ................................................................................................................. 19-3519-35

20 Equipment Alarms

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 20-120-1

AUP (Auxiliary Unit Problem) .......................................................................................................................................... 20-320-3

COCE (Configuration Or Customization Error) .......................................................................................................... 20-420-4

EQPT (Equipment Malfunction) ....................................................................................................................................... 20-520-5

HT (High Temperature) ......................................................................................................................................................... 20-620-6

HVCSP (Heating or ventilation or Cooling System Problem) ............................................................................... 20-720-7

IPD (Input Power Degraded) .............................................................................................................................................. 20-820-8

IPL (Input Power Loss) ......................................................................................................................................................... 20-920-9

LA� (LA�Alarm) ............................................................................................................................................................... 20-1020-10

OCCO (Optical Connector Cover Open) ..................................................................................................................... 20-1120-11

OPD (Output Power Degraded) ....................................................................................................................................... 20-1220-12

OPL (Output Power Loss) ................................................................................................................................................. 20-1320-13

PD (Performance Degraded) ............................................................................................................................................. 20-1420-14

PP (Power Problem) ............................................................................................................................................................. 20-1520-15

RUM (Replaceable Unit Missing) .................................................................................................................................. 20-1620-16

RUP (Replaceable Unit Problem) ................................................................................................................................... 20-1720-17

RUTM (Replaceable Unit Type Mismatch) ................................................................................................................ 20-1820-18

RUU (Replaceable Unit Unknown) ............................................................................................................................... 20-1920-19

SCP (Serial Communication Problem) ......................................................................................................................... 20-2020-20

TD (Transmitter Degraded) ............................................................................................................................................... 20-2120-21

TF (Transmitter Failure) ..................................................................................................................................................... 20-2220-22

TOOR (Temperature Out Of Range) ............................................................................................................................. 20-2320-23

UEP (Unconfigured Equipment Present) ..................................................................................................................... 20-2420-24

UDCL (User Data Channel Loss) ................................................................................................................................... 20-2520-25

Contents

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

xvi Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction


VM (Version Mismatch) ..................................................................................................................................................... 20-2620-26

WD (Wavelength Deviation) ............................................................................................................................................ 20-2720-27

21 Transmission Alarms

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 21-121-1

AIS (Alarm Indication Signal) ........................................................................................................................................... 21-221-2

CSF (Communication Subsystem Failure) .................................................................................................................... 21-321-3

LBER (Low Bit Error Rate) ................................................................................................................................................ 21-421-4

LOF (Loss Of Frame) ............................................................................................................................................................ 21-521-5

LOMF (Loss Of Multi-Frame) ........................................................................................................................................... 21-621-6

LOMS (Loss Of Multiplex Section) ................................................................................................................................. 21-721-7

LOS (Loss Of Signal) ............................................................................................................................................................ 21-821-8

LOSC (Loss Of Supervisory Channel) ............................................................................................................................ 21-921-9

LOSCF (Loss Of Supervisory Channel Frame) ......................................................................................................... 21-1021-10

LOW (Loss Of Wavelength) ............................................................................................................................................. 21-1121-11

LTCER (Low Threshold Corrected Error) ................................................................................................................... 21-1221-12

otnTIM (Optical Transport �etwork Trace Identifier Mismatch) ....................................................................... 21-1321-13

SSF (Server Signal Failure) .............................................................................................................................................. 21-1421-14

SSF- i (Server Signal Failure - ingress) ........................................................................................................................ 21-1621-16

SSF- e (Server Signal Failure - egress) ......................................................................................................................... 21-1721-17

TCA (Threshold Crossing Alarm) ................................................................................................................................... 21-1821-18

TIM (Trace Identifier Mismatch) .................................................................................................................................... 21-1921-19

UAT (UnAvailable Time) ................................................................................................................................................... 21-2021-20

UE (Uncorrected Error) ...................................................................................................................................................... 21-2121-21

URU (Underlying Resource Unavailable) ................................................................................................................... 21-2221-22

22 Processing Alarms

Overview .................................................................................................................................................................................... 22-122-1

DB (Database Corrupted) ..................................................................................................................................................... 22-222-2

Glossary

Contents

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



xvii

Index

Contents

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

xviii Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction


List of tables

3-1 Transmission Specific Graphical Conventions ............................................................................................ 3-16

3-2 Views Menu .............................................................................................................................................................. 3-20

3-3 Configuration Menu ............................................................................................................................................... 3-21

3-4 Configuration Menu ............................................................................................................................................... 3-23

3-5 Supervision Menu ................................................................................................................................................... 3-23

3-6 Download Menu ...................................................................................................................................................... 3-24

3-7 Equipment Menu ..................................................................................................................................................... 3-24

3-8 Board menu ............................................................................................................................................................... 3-24

3-9 Alarm Severity Levels ........................................................................................................................................... 3-26

3-10 Management Status Indicators ........................................................................................................................... 3-29

3-11 Search Criteria Parameters .................................................................................................................................. 3-33

4-1 Access State Icon Status ......................................................................................................................................... 4-7

6-1 1626 LM Local Area Addressing Parameters ................................................................................................. 6-4

6-2 �TP Server �etwork Address Parameters ........................................................................................................ 6-6

6-3 Ethernet Interface Parameters ............................................................................................................................... 6-7

6-4 IP Routing Parameters ............................................................................................................................................. 6-9

6-5 LAPD Parameters ................................................................................................................................................... 6-10

9-1 Transponder Models and Features .................................................................................................................... 9-13

9-2 Concentrator Models and Features ................................................................................................................... 9-16

9-3 Mux/Demux Models and Features .................................................................................................................... 9-17

9-4 OMDX Specificities ............................................................................................................................................... 9-17

9-5 TRBD4xxx MaximumAcceptable Input Power .......................................................................................... 9-22

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



xix

9-6 TRBD4312 MaximumAcceptable Input Power .......................................................................................... 9-22

9-7 TRBD1x9z MaximumAcceptable Input Power .......................................................................................... 9-22

9-8 TRBD1xyz MaximumAcceptable Input Power .......................................................................................... 9-23

9-9 TRBC4xxx MaximumAcceptable Input Power .......................................................................................... 9-26

9-10 CMDX Band Parameter Table ............................................................................................................................ 9-54

9-11 Contradirectionality Parameters table ............................................................................................................. 9-54

9-12 TRBx Transmission Parameters Table ............................................................................................................ 9-55

9-13 LOFA Safety Cover Parameter Table ............................................................................................................... 9-57

9-14 ALCT Stimulated Brillouin Scattering Parameter Table .......................................................................... 9-58

9-15 ETHC Configuration Mode Parameters Table ............................................................................................. 9-58

9-16 2*GE_FC Signal Type Transportation Parameters Table ......................................................................... 9-59

9-17 TDMX 1180 Port Profile Parameters Table .................................................................................................. 9-59

9-18 WMA� 1100 Provisioning Parameters Table .............................................................................................. 9-59

9-19 WMA� 3x74 Provisioning Parameters Table .............................................................................................. 9-60

9-20 OSCU Channel Supervision Synchronization Parameter Table ............................................................ 9-62

9-21 TRBx/ALCT Laser Output Power Configuration Parameter Table ...................................................... 9-62

9-22 WMA� 1100 Laser Output Power Configuration Parameters Table ................................................... 9-63

9-23 WMA� 3174 Laser Power Configuration Parameters Table .................................................................. 9-63

9-24 TRBx Shutdown Criteria Table .......................................................................................................................... 9-64

9-25 APTModes Table ................................................................................................................................................... 9-65

9-26 VOAModes Table .................................................................................................................................................. 9-66

9-27 APT/VOAParameters Table ............................................................................................................................... 9-67

9-28 APSD Parameters Table ........................................................................................................................................ 9-68

9-29 TDMX Port Configuration Parameters Table ............................................................................................... 9-70

9-30 WMA� 3x74 Channel Configuration Parameters Table .......................................................................... 9-71

9-31 Firmware Activation Displayed Information .............................................................................................. 9-107

9-32 Laser Control Parameters Table ...................................................................................................................... 9-109

9-33 External Input Point Parameters Table .......................................................................................................... 9-115

9-34 External Output Point Parameters .................................................................................................................. 9-115

List of tables

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

xx Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction


10-1 R-OADM and TR-OADMMain Characteristics ........................................................................................ 10-3

10-2 R-OADM and TR-OADM Significant Boards ............................................................................................ 10-5

11-1 TP (Termination Points) ........................................................................................................................................ 11-5

11-2 RS-TTI/J0 Parameters ........................................................................................................................................... 11-8

11-3 TTI Parameters ...................................................................................................................................................... 11-11

12-1 Cross Connection Parameters ............................................................................................................................. 12-4

14-1 Loopback Parameters in Display Mode .......................................................................................................... 14-4

14-2 Loopback Parameters in Creation Mode ........................................................................................................ 14-5

15-1 Protection Parameters ......................................................................................................................................... 15-14

16-1 Channel Margin States .......................................................................................................................................... 16-8

17-1 Performance Counters ........................................................................................................................................... 17-4

17-2 15 minutes Counter Thresholds ......................................................................................................................... 17-9

17-3 24 hours Counter Thresholds ........................................................................................................................... 17-10

17-4 Current Data Parameters .................................................................................................................................... 17-23

17-5 History Data Parameters .................................................................................................................................... 17-24

18-1 Remote Inventory Displayed Information ..................................................................................................... 18-2

19-1 Alarm Severity Levels ........................................................................................................................................... 19-5

19-2 SystemASAP ........................................................................................................................................................... 19-8

19-3 BMDXAlarm Thresholds ................................................................................................................................. 19-24

19-4 CMDXAlarm Thresholds ................................................................................................................................. 19-24

19-5 OMDXAlarm Thresholds ................................................................................................................................. 19-24

19-6 LOFAAlarm Thresholds .................................................................................................................................... 19-25

19-7 WMA�3174Alarm Thresholds ...................................................................................................................... 19-25

19-8 WMA�1100Alarm Thresholds ...................................................................................................................... 19-25

19-9 TDMXAlarm Thresholds .................................................................................................................................. 19-25

19-10 TRBD and TRBCAlarm Threshold .............................................................................................................. 19-26

List of tables

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



xxi

List of figures

2-1 1626 LMManagement Context ........................................................................................................................... 2-22-2

3-1 Example of an Equipment ViewWindow ........................................................................................................ 3-33-3

3-2 Example of a Subrack ViewWindow ................................................................................................................ 3-53-5

3-3 Example of an ESCT Board View ....................................................................................................................... 3-73-7

3-4 Example of a 2*GBE_FC Board View .............................................................................................................. 3-83-8

3-5 Example of a TRBD Board View ...................................................................................................................... 3-103-10

3-6 Example of an ETHC Board ViewWith SFP/XFPModules .................................................................. 3-113-11

3-7 Example of an OMDX Board View ................................................................................................................. 3-133-13

3-8 Example of a Transmission ViewWindow .................................................................................................... 3-153-15

3-9 Example of an Equipment OverviewWindow ............................................................................................. 3-183-18

3-10 Alarm Severity Indicators / �o Raised Alarms ............................................................................................ 3-263-26

3-11 Alarm Severity Indicators / Raised Alarms ................................................................................................... 3-263-26

3-12 Operation Domain Alarm Indicators ................................................................................................................ 3-283-28

9-1 ETHC Basic Concept ............................................................................................................................................... 9-59-5

9-2 Example of ETHC-TRBD1191 connection ..................................................................................................... 9-69-6

9-3 Illustration of an ETHC in Concentration Mode ............................................................................................ 9-89-8

9-4 Illustration of an ETHC in Add & Drop Mode ............................................................................................... 9-89-8

9-5 TRBD1191 Basic Concept ................................................................................................................................... 9-119-11

9-6 4 LOFA11xx Repeater Configuration .............................................................................................................. 9-389-38

11-1 OGPI Ports and Associated Boards .................................................................................................................. 11-311-3

11-2 OTS Ports and Associated Boards ..................................................................................................................... 11-411-4

14-1 Loopback and Continue User/Client Side ...................................................................................................... 14-214-2

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



xxiii

14-2 Loopback and Continue Line Side .................................................................................................................... 14-314-3

14-3 Loopback and Cut Line Side ............................................................................................................................... 14-314-3

15-1 OSC�P Principles ................................................................................................................................................... 15-315-3

15-2 OS�CPActivation .................................................................................................................................................. 15-415-4

15-3 Example of OMSP Implementation ................................................................................................................. 15-615-6

15-4 OMSP Switching cases ......................................................................................................................................... 15-715-7

17-1 CA/PM-AS Raise and Clear Logic ................................................................................................................... 17-817-8

19-1 Alarm Severity Indicators / �o Raised Alarms ............................................................................................ 19-519-5

19-2 Alarm Severity Indicators / Raised Alarms ................................................................................................... 19-519-5

19-3 Operation Domain Alarm Indicators ................................................................................................................ 19-719-7

List of figures

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

xxiv Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction


About this documentAbout this document

Purpose

This document:

• describes all the required information to enable the 1626 LM operator to manage the

day-to-day operations.

• reflects the contents of the 1626 LM online help.

This document specifically describes:

• the operation general context,

• the operation and maintenance GUI (Graphical User Interface),

• the operation parameters to be managed,

• the operation procedures to be performed,

• the equipment alarms and related corrective actions,

• the transmission alarms and related corrective actions.

Intended audience

This document is designed for 1626 LM operators who need to be assisted in

understanding or performing the 1626 LM management tasks.

Supported systems

This document covers the features of 1626 LM Release 5.0B.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



xxv

How to use this document

The User Provisioning Guide is divided into the following topics as described in the table

of contents:

Discovering Alcatel Lucent 1626 LM Contains a general description of the product

features and refers to all covered topics.

Before You Start with 1626 LM Management Describes the required hardware and

installation tasks to perform before to start the

1626 LM management.

Operation Graphical User Interface Introduces and describes the main features of

the operation and maintenance user interface.

1626 LM Management Startup Describes the operation starting procedures.

Software Download Management Describes software packages management

procedures.

Communication Configuration Describes parameters and procedures to set up

all the required addresses and network

identifiers.

Database Backup and Restore Describes MIB backup and restore

management procedures.

Rack and Subrack Management Describes the procedures to declare and

undeclare racks and subracks.

Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Describes required parameters and procedures

to declare and configure 1626 LM boards and

transceiver modules.

R-OADM and TR-OADM Configuration

Management

Describes configuration parameters and

procedures to set Tunable and/or

Reconfigurable OADM configuration.

Transmission Management Describes entities involved in transmission

management and specific transmission

parameters.

Cross Connection Management Describes:

• the boards involved in cross connections

and the main cross connection principles,

• the cross connection parameters and

procedures.

Connector and Cabling Management Describes connector and cabling declaration

and activation procedures.

Loopback Tests Explains the loopback principle and describes

the loopback parameters and procedures.

Protection Management Explains the protection principles and

describes protection parameters and

procedures.

About this document

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

xxvi Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction


Monitoring Procedures Describes the monitoring procedures to

display instantaneous measurements, abnormal

condition list and event logs.

Performance Monitoring Describes:

• the performance counters and performance

monitoring mechanisms,

• the performance threshold management,

• the performance monitoring procedures.

System Information Collection and

Exportation

Describes:

• the procedures to display and to load

system inventory and firmware

• how to export system configuration

information to an xml file.

Alarm Management Explains:

• the various alarm indicators and severity

levels,

• the alarm severity profiles management

principles.

Describes alarm threshold table parameters

and operation procedures.

Equipment Alarms Describes equipment alarms and related

corrective actions.

Transmission Alarms Describes transmission alarms and related

corrective actions.

Processing Alarms Describes the alarm raised when data are

corrupted and the required actions to perform

for clearing this alarm.

About this document

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



xxvii

Related documentation

Alcatel-Lucent also provides the following documents to help you plan, install, and

operate your 1626 LM equipment and associated operating tools:

DOCUMENT TYPE PART NUMBER

1626LM R5.0B Performance Design

Specification8DG 170740039 DSZZA

1626LM R5.0B SPLM User Provisioning

Guide3AL 75164 BAAA

1626LM R5.0B Product Information and

Planning Guide3AL 75164 EAAA

1626LM R5.0B Maintenance and

Trouble-Clearing Guide3AL 75164 FAAA

1626LM R5.0B Safety Guide 3AL 75164 HAAA

1626LM R5.0B System Turn-Up Guide 3AL 75164 GAAA

1626LM R5.0B Installation Handbook 3AL 75164 KAAA

1626LM R5.0B O�DP Installation Guide 3AL 75164 LAAA

1626LM R5.0B O�DP Engineering and

Planning Tool User Guide3AL 75164 JAAA

1626LM R5.0B O�DP User Guide CDROM 3AL 75184 AAAA

1626LM R5.0B Customer Doc CD 3AL 75165 AAAA

Related training

Alcatel-Lucent University provides courses to train telecommunication technicians in

installation, operations, and maintenance personnel. Contact Alcatel-Lucent at

1-888-582-3688 to enroll in training classes.

Technical support

For technical support, contact your local customer support team. Reach them via the web

at http://alcatel-lucent.com/support or through the telephone number listed under the

Technical Assistance Center menu at https://support.lucent.com/portal/olcsHome.do

(https://support.lucent.com/portal/olcsHome.do) .

How to order

To order Alcatel-Lucent documents, use the following website: https://support.lucent.com

(http://support.alcatel-lucent.com)

About this document

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

xxviii Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction


https://support.lucent.com/portal/olcsHome.do


http://support.alcatel-lucent.com

http://support.alcatel-lucent.com

Quality policy

We ensure that everything we do must be focused on becoming the trusted partner of our

customers by:

• Delivering high quality, secure and reliable products, services, software and solutions

the first time, every time, and on time - as promised.

• Continuously making improvements and looking for innovative ways to anticipate

and fully meet the highest expectations of our customers.

• Counting on all employees to be personally accountable for putting the customer first

and honoring the commitments we make.

This policy will be regularly reviewed, updated as necessary, applied and communicated

to all employees and persons working for or on behalf of Alcatel-Lucent, and made

available to interested parties and the public.

Safety messages

For your safety, this document contains safety statements. Safety statements are given at

points where risks of damage to personnel, equipment, and operation may exist. Failure to

follow the directions in a safety statement may result in serious consequences.

How to comment

You can send your feedback to your local Alcatel-Lucent Technical Assistance Center at

https://support.lucent.com/portal/olcsHome.do (https://support.lucent.com/portal/

olcsHome.do) . Your feedback will be forwarded to the appropriate documentation team

for evaluation and action, as appropriate. Be sure to cite the relevant information such as

product name, document title, document ID, release, issue number, date, page number,

etc. in your feedback.

About this document

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



xxix




1 1Discovering Alcatel-Lucent

1626 LM

Overview

Purpose

This chapter gives a brief description of the Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM features and lists the

operation domain you can access to manage your configuration.

Contents

Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM Quick Presentation 1-2

Introducing Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM 1-2

Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LMManagement 1-3

Introducing Alcatel-Lucent LM Management 1-3

About the Online Help 1-4

Online Help Scope 1-4

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



1-1

Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM Quick Presentation

Introducing Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM

The Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM (Light Manager) is a third-generation DWDM platform that

addresses long-haul to ultra long-haul terrestrial applications. The 1626 LM supports the

best of terrestrial technologies to provide the following unmatched performance at the

lower cost:

• a capacity of up to 96 channels at 10 and 40 Gbps in the extended C-band,

• spanning distances up to 4,500 km without electrical regeneration.

The 1626 LM can be used to upgrade existing links, resulting in cost-efficiency and better

performance for legacy platforms, and it can be used for new DWDM deployments,

providing the most competitive technology on the market. The system helps service

providers move traffic efficiently and reliably throughout the network, minimizing their

total cost of ownership

See Also

“Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM Management” (p. 1-3)

Discovering Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM Quick PresentationIntroducing Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

1-2 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction


Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM Management

Introducing Alcatel-Lucent LM Management

The 1626 LM is managed through a friendly and intuitive Graphical User Interface.

Any operational support is provided by an online help facility which covers the following

chapters:

• Chapter 2, “Before You Start With 1626 LM Management”

• Chapter 3, “Operation Graphical User Interface”

• Chapter 4, “1626 LM Management Start Up”

• Chapter 5, “Software Download Management”

• Chapter 6, “Communication Configuration”

• Chapter 7, “Database Backup and Restore”

• Chapter 8, “Racks and Subracks Management”

• Chapter 9, “Board and SFP/XFPModule Management”

• Chapter 10, “R-OADM and TR-OADM Configuration Management”

• Chapter 11, “Transmission Management”

• Chapter 12, “Cross Connection Management”

• Chapter 13, “Connector and Cabling Management”

• Chapter 14, “Loopback Tests”

• Chapter 15, “Protection Management”

• Chapter 16, “Monitoring Procedures”

• Chapter 17, “Performance Monitoring”

• Chapter 18, “System Information Collection and Exportation”

• Chapter 19, “Alarm Management”

• Chapter 20, “Equipment Alarms”

• Chapter 21, “Transmission Alarms”

• Chapter 22, “Processing Alarms”

Discovering Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM ManagementIntroducing Alcatel-Lucent LM Management

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



1-3

About the Online Help

Online Help Scope

Supported systems

This Online Help covers the features of 1626 LM Release 5.0B.

Online Help release

The release of this current Online Help is: V5.0B-4.

To access the Online Help contents

To access the Online Help contents, click on the following link:

Chapter 1, “Discovering Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM”

Discovering Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM About the Online HelpOverview

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



2 2Before You Start With

1626 LM Management

Overview

Purpose

This chapter explains how to perform the required actions to put in place the 1626 LM

management means.

Contents

Understanding the 1626 LMManagement 2-2

Quick Overview of 1626 LM Management 2-2

Craft Terminal Hardware Requirements 2-3

Software Requirements 2-3

Management Start Up Procedures 2-4

Installing the Craft Terminal Application 2-5

Uninstalling the Craft Terminal Application 2-6

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



2-1

Understanding the 1626 LM Management

Quick Overview of 1626 LM Management

The 1626 LM is managed through a Graphical User Interface which is hosted either

remotely by a 1353 �M platform or locally by a PC equipped with a 1320 CT (Craft

Terminal) application. The management protocol is Q3 and the default network is OSI.

When the 1626 LM is managed from a Craft terminal application, the communication

interface is an RS232 serial line.

Figure 2-1, “1626 LM Management Context” (p. 2-2) illustrates the 1626 LM

management context.

Figure 2-1 1626 LM Management Context

Before You Start With 1626 LM Management Understanding the 1626 LM ManagementQuick Overview of 1626 LM Management

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



�ote:Because the Craft Terminal application runs exclusively on the hosting PC, the

two concepts are often merged and Craft Terminal usually means both the application

and the PC.

The following topics give useful information about:

• “Craft Terminal Hardware Requirements” (p. 2-3)

• “Software Requirements” (p. 2-3)

Craft Terminal Hardware Requirements

The Craft Terminal hardware consists in a PC which complies with the following

minimum requirements:

• CPU: Pentium II or higher,

• RAM: 256 Mbytes,

• Display: 15,4", 65536 colors, 1024x768,

• 1 CDROM drive,

• 3 buttons mouse or trackball,

• Serial cable.

Software Requirements

The Craft Terminal PC must run on Windows �T, 2000 or XP version and be installed

with the software delivered on theMaster setup CDROM.

Before You Start With 1626 LM Management Understanding the 1626 LM ManagementQuick Overview of 1626 LM Management

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



2-3

Management Start Up Procedures

Overview

Purpose

This topic describes the operation procedures to be performed to install and uninstall the

Craft Terminal applications.

Contents

Installing the Craft Terminal Application 2-5

Uninstalling the Craft Terminal Application 2-6

Before You Start With 1626 LM Management Management Start Up ProceduresOverview

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Installing the Craft Terminal Application

Purpose

Use this procedure to install the Craft Terminal application in the following

circumstances:

• Craft Terminal application first installation,

• Craft Terminal application release change.

Before you begin

You must have the Master setup CDROM.

How to install the Craft Terminal application

To install the Craft Terminal application, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Insert the Master setup CDROM into the CDROM drive.

Result:The installation wizard starts

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 If first installation, perform the following:

1. Click Next until the language selection window is displayed.

2. Select the language and click OK.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click Next until the WDM Master setup - IntallShield Wizard window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Tick the software components to install and click Next.

For first installation: Tick all the software components.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 For each software component installation:

1. Click Next.

2. Wait for the end of installation and click Finish.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Remove theMaster setup CDROM from the CDROM drive.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Before You Start With 1626 LM Management Management Start Up ProceduresInstalling the Craft Terminal Application

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



2-5

Uninstalling the Craft Terminal Application

Purpose

This procedure describes the step by step actions to perform when you want to uninstall

the Craft terminal application.

How to uninstall the Craft Terminal application

To uninstall the Craft Terminal application, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the Windows task bar, click Start>Settings>Control Panel>Add/Remove

Programs.

Result:The Add/Remove Programs windows opens.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select the program to remove and click Change/Remove.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Before You Start With 1626 LM Management Management Start Up ProceduresUninstalling the Craft Terminal Application

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



3 3Operation Graphical User

Interface

Overview

Purpose

This chapter describes the main windows of the 1626 LM GUI ( Graphical User

Interface). From these main screens, you can perform all the operation tasks to manage

the 1626 LM configuration.

Contents

Introducing the Operating and Maintenance GUI 3-2

The Equipment View Window 3-3

The Subrack View Window 3-5

The Board View Window 3-7

The Transmission View Window 3-15

The Equipment Overview Window 3-18

Describing the Permanent Displayed Areas 3-20

The Title Bar 3-20

The Menu Bar 3-20

Alarm Severity Indicators 3-26

Operation Domain Alarm Indicators 3-28

Management Status Indicators 3-29

Describing and Using the Search for Termination Point Input Windows 3-31

Search for Termination Point Input Window 3-32

Using the Search for Termination Point Input Window 3-32

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



3-1

Introducing the Operating and Maintenance GUI

Overview

Purpose

You manage the 1626 LM via a GUI (Graphical User Interface). Once you have

performed the complete startup procedure, the GUI displays the management entry

window of the 1626 LM you are connected to.

Contents

The Equipment View Window 3-3

The Subrack View Window 3-5

The Board View Window 3-7

The Transmission View Window 3-15

The Equipment Overview Window 3-18

Operation Graphical User Interface Introducing the Operating and Maintenance GUIOverview

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



The Equipment View Window

This is the entry window which gives access to the first level of the hardware structure:

the rack level.

Depending on your configuration, you may have a single rack configuration or a multi

rack configuration.

The empty spaces show the possible secondary racks to be provisioned.

The left rack is called the master rack. It contains at least one subrack.

To access to the subrack view, double click on its graphical representation.

You then access to the boards and empty slots graphical representations.

Figure 3-1 Example of an Equipment View Window

Operation Graphical User Interface Introducing the Operating and Maintenance GUIThe Equipment View Window

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



3-3

The displayed icons have the following meaning:

Icon Meaning

The component has raised at least one alarm.

The color is dependant on the higher alarm severity.

The component has no raised alarm.

Operation Graphical User Interface Introducing the Operating and Maintenance GUIThe Equipment View Window

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



The Subrack View Window

Figure 3-2, “Example of a Subrack View Window” (p. 3-5) gives an example of a subrack

view window of the 1626 LM.

This window displays the representation of the boards in the subrack.

The empty spaces show empty slots that you can select to declare a new board.

When you select a card, the border of its graphical representation is highligthed as shown

in Figure 3-2, “Example of a Subrack View Window” (p. 3-5).

Figure 3-2 Example of a Subrack View Window

Operation Graphical User Interface Introducing the Operating and Maintenance GUIThe Subrack View Window

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



3-5


Icon Meaning



The component is inserted but not declared.


The component is in service.

To access to the board view window, double-click on the graphical representation of a

board.

Operation Graphical User Interface Introducing the Operating and Maintenance GUIThe Subrack View Window

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



The Board View Window

The board view window may have several aspects depending on the type of selected

boards. The following illustrations give some examples of what you can see when

displaying boards.

This window is quite empty because an ESCT board cannot have any SFP/XFP modules,

and is not involved in the transmission process.

Figure 3-3 Example of an ESCT Board View

Operation Graphical User Interface Introducing the Operating and Maintenance GUIThe Board View Window

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



3-7

You can however see:

• the Administrative state of the board. Its color depends on its current status which can

be In Service or Out of Service.

• the alarms that the board can raise.

Green color indicates that there is not any alarms. In case of raised alarms the related

alarm graphical representation will have the color corresponding to the configured

severity level.

This window shows the example of a 2*GE_FC board which has one declared SFP

module.

The empty spaces show empty SFP slots that you can select to declare new SFP modules.

When you select an SFP module, the border of its graphical representation is highligthed.

Figure 3-4 Example of a 2*GBE_FC Board View


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




Icon Meaning





You can see:



• the alarms that the board can raise. Green color indicates that there is not any alarms.

In case of raised alarms the related alarm graphical representation will have the color

corresponding to the configured severity level.

To access to the transmission view window, double-click on the graphical representation

of a SFP module. The transmission view is then built from the selected SFP module.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



3-9

This window shows an example of a TRBD board which has one port in service.

When you select an SFP module, the border of its graphical representation is highligthed.

You can see:






severity level.

Figure 3-5 Example of a TRBD Board View


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



To access to the transmission view window, you double-click on the graphical

representation of the port. The transmission view is then built from the selected port.

This window shows an example of an ETHC board which has:

• one port in service on the mother board.

This port supports the concentration of the Ethernet flow streaming via the XFP

module.

• two SFP modules (over 9 possible) to interconnect with the client network.

The empty spaces show empty SFP slots that you can select to declare a new SFP or

XFP module.

When you select an SFP module, the border of its graphical representation is highligthed

Figure 3-6 Example of an ETHC Board View With SFP/XFP Modules


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



3-11


Icon Meaning





You can see:






severity level.




...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



This window shows an example of 4 ports in service of an OMDX board.

Figure 3-7 Example of an OMDX Board View


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



3-13

You can see:






severity level.

The presence of several graphical representations with the same alarm acronym

means that the alarm can be raised from several points of the board. Mouse focus on

an alarm graphic representation gives information on each point.




...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



The Transmission View Window

This window shows an example of a transmission view window built from the selected

port.

It is composed of blocks which represent the TP (Termination Points) involved in the

transmission process.

You can read the transmission view according two perspectives as explained in the

following:

If you consider... Then...

the left block as the

reference block• the sink signal flows from left to right until the Optical

Regeneration Point.

The icons mentioned at the top of the block refer to the sink

alarms that the block can raise.

• The source signal flows from the Optical Regeneration Point to

the left.

Figure 3-8 Example of a Transmission View Window

Operation Graphical User Interface Introducing the Operating and Maintenance GUIThe Transmission View Window

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



3-15

If you consider... Then...

the right block as the

reference block• The sink signal flows from right to left until the Optical

Regeneration Point.

The icons mentioned at the bottom of the block refer to the sink

alarms that the block can raise.

• The source signal flows from the Optical Regeneration to the

right.

In case of multiplexing blocks (OMS, ODU2 or RSTTP), you can double click to expand

the representation. In this context, the next TP appear. You then see the complete

transmission view beginning from the initial selected block.

The following table describes the transmission specific graphical conventions.

Table 3-1 Transmission Specific Graphical Conventions

Transmission Graphical

Representations

Description

TTP (Trail Termination Point)

CTP (Connection Termination Point)

TTP and CTP

TTP and CTP with:

• FEC enabled,

• Cross Connection.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Table 3-1 Transmission Specific Graphical Conventions (continued)

Transmission Graphical

Representations

Description

TTP with Performance Monitoring enabled.

TTP with a loopback.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



3-17

The Equipment Overview Window

Figure 3-9, “Example of an Equipment Overview Window” (p. 3-18) gives an example of

an equipment overview window.

This window displays a tree diagram representation of your configuration.

Each box represents a specific component that you can expand or reduce by a double

click or a right click.

Figure 3-9 Example of an Equipment Overview Window

Operation Graphical User Interface Introducing the Operating and Maintenance GUIThe Equipment Overview Window

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Right clicking a component box gives access to a contextual menu list that notably

enables to:

• expand or hide the tree representation,

• navigate to other views,

• access to the transmission view from a port level.


Icon Meaning




Operation Graphical User Interface Introducing the Operating and Maintenance GUIThe Equipment Overview Window

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



3-19

Describing the Permanent Displayed Areas

Overview

Purpose

This topic describes the areas which are always displayed and accessible from the 1626

LM GUI.

Contents

The Title Bar 3-20

The Menu Bar 3-20



Management Status Indicators 3-29

The Title Bar

The title bar displays the name and the release number of the selected 1626 LM.

The Menu Bar

The menu bar is always displayed. From each of the menu items you can perform

management tasks described in the next tables:

• View menu

• Configuration menu

• Diagnosis menu

• Supervision menu

• Download menu

• Equipment menu

• Board Menu

Table 3-2 Views Menu

First Menu Item Submenu Description

Backward �one. Enables to return to the previous visited window.

Forward �one. Enables to re-access the next window from a visited

window.

Equipment �one. Displays the 1626 LM Equipment view.

Operation Graphical User Interface Describing the Permanent Displayed AreasOverview

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Table 3-2 Views Menu (continued)


Equipment

Overview

�one. Display a graphical representation of the

configuration hierarchy.

External Points �one. Lists the external devices connected to the 1626

LM.

Transmission �one. Opens the TP Search window.

Enables to select TP according to search criteria.

Open Object �one. Displays the view of a selected managed entity.

Open in window �one. Displays the view of a selected managed entity in a

new window.

Close �one. Closes the Graphical User Interface.

Table 3-3 Configuration Menu


Alarm Severity... �one. Opens the ASAP Management

window.

Lists the existing ASAP and enables

ASAP management.

Set Alarm Severities... �one. Opens the Set ASAP window.

Enables to assign ASAP to managed

entities.

NE Time... �one. Opens the NE Time window.

Enables to set the �E time with the

1353 �M time.

Performance Threshold

Tables...

Opens PM Threshold Table Select

window.

Enables to manage Performance

Monitoring Threshold tables.

Cross Connection Management... �one. Opens the Cross Connection

Management window.

Enables to list existing cross

connections and to perform cross

connection management commands.

Loopback Management... �one. Opens Signal Loopback

Management window.

Enables to list existing loopbacks

and to perform loopback

management commands.

Operation Graphical User Interface Describing the Permanent Displayed AreasThe Menu Bar

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



3-21

Table 3-3 Configuration Menu (continued)


Comm/Routing Local

Configuration

Opens the Local Configuration

window.

Enables to manage the 1626 LM

network addresses.

OS

Configuration

Opens the OS Configuration

window.

Enables to manage the 1353 �M

network addresses.

NTP Server

Configuration

Opens the NTP Server

Configuration window.

Enables to manage the �TP server

network addresses.

Interface

Configuration >

LAPD

Configuration

Opens LAPD Configuration window.

Enables to set LAPD.

Interface

Configuration >

Ethernet

Configuration

Opens Ethernet Configuration

window.

Enables to set Ethernet addresses.

IP Configuration

> IP Static

Routing

Configuration

Opens IP Static Routing

Configuration window.

Enables to set specific route to reach

specific IP node.

Connectors/Cabling... �one. Opens Connectors Configuration

window.

Enables to activate the connectors

and to declare the cabling between

the different boards.

Transmission Update �one. Starts the update of the

Transmission model.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Table 3-4 Configuration Menu


Alarms NE Alarms...

Object Alarms...

Subtree

Alarms...

Equipment

Alarms...

Transmission

Alarms...

External Points

Alarms...

Launch the ALMAP (AS) Alarm Surveillance

window.

Display the details of the raised alarms for each of

the selected managed entities.

Log Browsing Command Log

Alarm Log

Event log

Open the Event Log browsing application which

enables to retrieve commands, alarms and event

according to search criteria.

View Remote

Inventory...

Firmware

version...

Lists respectively the inventory or the firmware

version of a selected hardware component.

Abnormal Condition

List

�one. Lists the boards which are not working properly.

From a selected item of the list, you can display a

view which focus on the malfunction.

Table 3-5 Supervision Menu


Access State OS

Requested

Enables to grant the access rights to the Craft

Terminal application (Requested) or to the 1353 �M

(OS).

Alarms Resynchronize

Allow Notifs

Inhibit Notifs

Enables to:

• resynchronize the alarm with the Craft Terminal

application,

• activate the alarm notification,

• inhibit the alarm notification.

Upload Remote

Inventory

�one. Starts the remote inventory upload.

Restart NE... �one. Reboots the 1626 LM.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



3-23

Table 3-6 Download Menu


Init Download... �one. Opens a window which enables to select the

required software package to download on the 1626

LM.

Units Info... �one. Opens a window which enables to display the status

of a selected software package.

MIB Management... �one. Opens a window which enables to save and to

restore MIB.

MIB Configuration

Mode...

Online Sets the online MIB configuration.

Table 3-7 Equipment Menu


Set... �one. Enables to declare the selected hardware

component.

Modify... �one. Enables to modify the declaration of a selected

hardware component.

Remove �one. Enables to undeclare a selected hardware

component.

Set in Service �one. Activates a selected hardware component for

operation.

Set out of Service �one. Deactivates a selected hardware component and

prevents most of operation tasks.

Remote Inventory Rack Level

Subrack Level

Board Level

Starts the remote inventory upload for the selected

hardware component.

Show Supporting

Equipment

�one. Highlights the unit which hosts the selected or

displayed hardware component.

Instantaneous

measurement on

Selected object Starts the instantaneous measurement on a selected

hardware component.

Table 3-8 Board menu


Show Supporting

Equipment

�one. Highlights the unit which hosts the selected or

displayed board.

Optical Power level

Configuration

�one. Opens the laser output power configuration window.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Table 3-8 Board menu (continued)


Modify Equipment

Configuration

�one. Opens board parameter configuration window.

Modify Specific

Equipment

Configuration

�one.

Manage ETHC

Connections

�one. Opens the matrix window displaying the cross

connections between the Client/User line and the

WDM lines.

Alarm Threshold

Configuration

�one. Opens the alarm threshold configuration window.

APT/MSV �one. Opens the amplifier laser output power

configuration window.

APSD Configuration �one. Opens the Automatic Power ShutDown

configuration window for amplifier boards.

�ote:Board menu appears only when a board is selected.

The described menu items are contextual to the type of the selected board.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



3-25

Alarm Severity Indicators

The 1626 LM tracks and reports faults. If a fault occurs, an alarm is generated.

You can identify very quickly if alarms have been reported with the alarm severity

indicators located at the top left of the GUI.

According to the severity level, Alarm indicators display different shapes and colors:

When there are no raised alarms, indicators are just rectangles, without any numbers as

illustrated the following figure.

When there are raised alarms, indicators display a circle with a figure for the number of

alarms corresponding to the severity level. The following figure gives an example of

alarm indicators displaying raised alarms.

Alarm severity levels are defined as mentioned in the following table.

Table 3-9 Alarm Severity Levels

Severity

Levels

Colors Description

CRITICAL (CRI) Red A service-affecting condition has occurred and immediate

corrective action is required.

MAJOR (MAJ) Orange A service-affecting condition has developed and urgent corrective

action is required.

MINOR (MIN) Yellow A non-service-affecting fault condition has occurred, and you need

to take corrective action to prevent a more serious fault (for

example, one affecting the service).

WARNING (WNG) Cyan Detection of a potential or impending service-affecting fault,

before any significant effects have been felt.

INDETERMINATE

(IND)

White The severity level cannot be determined.

Figure 3-10 Alarm Severity Indicators / No Raised Alarms

Figure 3-11 Alarm Severity Indicators / Raised Alarms

Operation Graphical User Interface Describing the Permanent Displayed AreasAlarm Severity Indicators

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



�ote: The five alarm severity indicators are greyed-out when the alarm notification

has been inhibited. The indicators keep the information they had just before the inhibit

action.

Operation Graphical User Interface Describing the Permanent Displayed AreasAlarm Severity Indicators

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



3-27

Operation Domain Alarm Indicators

To spot very quickly the operation domains which are impacted by alarms, you can use

the operation domain alarm indicators located at the top right of the GUI. With these

indicators, you know if alarms are related to:

• External Points

• Equipments

• Transmissions

According to the severity level, alarms domain indicators display different shapes and

colors:

• When there are no raised alarms, indicators are just rectangles, without any numbers.

• When there are raised alarms, indicators display a circle with a figure for the number

of alarms corresponding to the operation domain. The following figure gives an

example of operation domain alarm indicators displaying raised and no raised alarms.

The severity level conventions are the same as for alarm severity indicators.

Figure 3-12 Operation Domain Alarm Indicators

Operation Graphical User Interface Describing the Permanent Displayed AreasOperation Domain Alarm Indicators

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Management Status Indicators

To have a global view of the 1626 LM operational state, you can watch the management

status indicators located vertically on the right side of the GUI.

Management status indicators are defined as mentioned in Table 3-10, “Management

Status Indicators” (p. 3-29)

Table 3-10 Management Status Indicators

Indicator Icon Indicator

Name

Color Description

Supervision Green Supervised

Blue �ot supervised

Local Access Green Granted

Blue Denied

OS

Communication

Green Link Up

Red Link Down

Default

Configuration

Green �ot Active

Blue Active

OS Connection

State

Green �ot Connected

Blue Connected

Manager Level Green EML (Element Management Level)

Blue �ML (�etwork Management Level)

�etwork Time

Protocol

Brown Disabled

Green Enabled. �o �TP servers reachable.

Blue Enabled. Only one �TP server is

reachable.

Abnormal

Conditions

Green �one

Blue Yes

Database Green Database is consistent

Blue Database is corrupted. Database

restoration is required.

Operation Graphical User Interface Describing the Permanent Displayed AreasManagement Status Indicators

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



3-29

Table 3-10 Management Status Indicators (continued)

Indicator Icon Indicator

Name

Color Description

Line

Optimization

White �o line optimization process is

running.

Red APE (Automatic Power

Equalization) is running.

Transmission

Misalignment

Green Transmission aligned

Blue Transmission misaligned.

Transmission update required.

The Message Bar

The message bar is located at the bottom center of the GUI. It displays information

related to the managed entity pointed by the mouse. For example, you can see the

complete set of information related to a board location: r01sr01/board#01 (Rack#1,

Subrack#1, board in slot 1).

Operation Graphical User Interface Describing the Permanent Displayed AreasManagement Status Indicators

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Describing and Using the Search for TerminationPoint Input Windows

Overview

Purpose

This topic describes:

• the Search for Termination Point Input window that you will have the opportunity

to use in different contexts.

• the procedures to perform when using this window.

Contents

Search for Termination Point Input Window 3-32

Using the Search for Termination Point Input Window 3-32

Operation Graphical User Interface Describing and Using the Search for Termination PointInput Windows

Overview...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



3-31

Search for Termination Point Input Window

With this window, you can search for TP (Termination Points) which characteristics

match with search criteria. These search criteria are grouped within the TP Search

Criteria area.

Selection and display areas are named:

• Equipment (top left side),

• Termination Points (top right side).

Using the Search for Termination Point Input Window

Purpose

Use this procedure to learn how to use the Search to Termination Point Input window

How to use the Search for Termination Point input window

From the Equipment area:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Expand or collapse the tree structure of your configuration.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select a displayed entity.

Attention: Board History list box is inhibited.

From the TP Search Criteria area:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select one or several search criteria.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Click on Search.

From the Termination Point area:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 See the displayed TP.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 If necessary, select relevant TP.


Search for Termination Point Input Window...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 If necessary, use the following buttons to display specific information:

• Show Mon: to show monitored TP.

• Show PM: to show TP with started performance monitoring.

Attention: Show CC State is not applicable.

Search Criteria

The following table describes the search criteria you can use to search for TP.

Attention: search criteria availability are dependant on the context of use.

Table 3-11 Search Criteria Parameters

Search

Criteria

Description Possible Values

Class Lists all the TP types that you can select. List of TP types

Connection

State

This search criteria is not applicable. -

Alarm State Lists all the alarm severity levels that you can use:

• to select corresponding TP

• to search non alarmed TP.

• Non Alarmed

• Indeterminate

• Warning

• Minor

• Major

• Critical

Assign State This search criteria is not applicable. -

Perf Monitoring Enables to select:

• all TP whatever the performance monitoring is.

• TP with Performance Monitoring

• TP without Performance monitoring

• Ignore

• Any

• None

Monitoring

Objects

Enables to select all TP whether monitorable or not• Ignore

• Any

• None

Location This search criteria is not applicable. -

Name This search criteria is not applicable. -

ASAP value Enables to search TP having alarm severity profiles

assigned.

If used this search criteria inhibits all the other

profiles except Class.

List of alarm severity

profiles


Using the Search for Termination Point Input Window...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



3-33

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 41626 LM Management

Start Up

Overview

Purpose

This chapter describes the procedures to perform when you want to start up with 1626

LM management.

Starting up with 1626 LM management requires:

1. To start the Craft Terminal application,

2. To start the 1626 LM supervision,

3. To start the 1626 LM GUI (Graphical User Interface),

4. To manage the access state.

Contents

Starting Up with 1626 LMManagement 4-2

Starting the Craft Terminal Application 4-3

Starting the 1626 LM Supervision 4-4

Starting the 1626 LM GUI 4-5

Managing the Access State 4-6

Access State Icon Status 4-7

Setting the Access State to the Craft Terminal Application 4-8

Setting the Access State to the 1353 �M 4-9

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



4-1

Starting Up with 1626 LM Management

Overview

Purpose

This topic covers the following subjects:

• How to start the Craft terminal application,

• How to start the 1626 LM supervision,

• How to start the operation and maintenance GUI (Graphical User Interface).

Contents

Starting the Craft Terminal Application 4-3

Starting the 1626 LM Supervision 4-4

Starting the 1626 LM GUI 4-5

1626 LM Management Start Up Starting Up with 1626 LM ManagementOverview

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Starting the Craft Terminal Application

Purpose

Use this procedure to start the Craft Terminal application.

Before you begin

• All the required software environment must be installed,

• The serial cable must be connected between the Craft Terminal PC and the 1626 LM.

How to start the Craft Terminal application

To start the Craft Terminal application, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the Windows task bar, select Start>Alcatel>CTK vx.x.x>Alcatel 1320CT.

Result:The Alcatel Lower Layers Manager window is displayed.

A red triangle rotates indicating the initialization is on going.

If the red triangle stops and a cross displays, you must control the connection of theserial cable between the Craft Terminal and the 1626 LM.

If necessary reconnect the serial cable correctly.

The Network Element Synthesis window is displayed.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626 LM Management Start Up Starting Up with 1626 LM ManagementStarting the Craft Terminal Application

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



4-3

Starting the 1626 LM Supervision

Purpose

Use this procedure to start the 1626 LM supervision.

Before you begin

The Network Element Synthesis window is displayed.

How to start the 1626 LM supervision

To start the 1626 LM supervision, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the Map tab, select the 1626 LM to supervise.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select Supervision>Start.

Result:The supervision of the selected 1626 LM starts.

The 1626 LM icon changes.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626 LM Management Start Up Starting Up with 1626 LM ManagementStarting the 1626 LM Supervision

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Starting the 1626 LM GUI

Purpose

Use this procedure to start the 1626 LM GUI.

Before you begin

The 1626 LM supervision is started.

How to start the 1626 LM GUI

To start the 1626 LM GUI, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the Map window, select the 1626 LM to manage.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select Supervision>Show Equipment.

Result:The login window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Enter your user name and password.

Important! The login entry is case-sensitive.

Result:The entry window of the 1626 LM GUI appears.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626 LM Management Start Up Starting Up with 1626 LM ManagementStarting the 1626 LM GUI

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



4-5

Managing the Access State

Overview

Purpose

You can manage the 1626 LM remotely from a 1353 �M or locally from a PC equipped

with the Craft Terminal application.

Depending on whether you want to manage the 1626 LM remotely or locally, you must

set the Access State to specific status.

In normal operation, the 1353 �M is the default manager. If you want to grant

management rights to the Craft Terminal application, you must enable this change from

the 1353 �M.

Contents

Access State Icon Status 4-7

Setting the Access State to the Craft Terminal Application 4-8

Setting the Access State to the 1353 �M 4-9

1626 LM Management Start Up Managing the Access StateOverview

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Access State Icon Status

Table 4-1, “Access State Icon Status” (p. 4-7)describes the different status of the Access

State icon.

Table 4-1 Access State Icon Status

Access State icon Status Description

Granted The Craft Terminal application has the required

rights to manage the 1626 LM.

Denied The 1353 �M manages the 1626 LM.

The Craft Terminal application cannot manage the

1626 LM, but can access it for read only.

Requested The Craft Terminal application is waiting for

management rights from the 1353 �M. In the

meantime, the 1353 �M continues to support:

• Alarm handling

• Performance processing on TP

• Local Access management

�ote: In any case, the 1353 �M continues to support:

• Alarm handling

• Performance processing on TP

• Local Access management

1626 LM Management Start Up Managing the Access StateAccess State Icon Status

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



4-7

Setting the Access State to the Craft Terminal Application

Purpose

Use this procedure to set the Access State to the Craft Terminal application.

Before you begin

• From the 1353 �M, you have assigned LCA status to the 1626 Access State.

• On the Craft Terminal application, the Access Status is Denied.

How to set the Access State to the Craft Terminal application

To set the Access State to the Craft Terminal application, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Supervision > Access State > Requested.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Click Yes.

Result:On the Craft Terminal application, the Access State changes from Denied to

Granted

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626 LM Management Start Up Managing the Access StateSetting the Access State to the Craft Terminal Application

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Setting the Access State to the 1353 NM

Purpose

Use this procedure to set the Access State to the 1353 �M.

Before you begin

On the Craft Terminal application, the Access State must be Granted.

How to set the Access State to the 1353 NM

To set the Access State to the 1353 �M, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Supervision > Access State > OS...

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Click Yes.

Result:On the Craft Terminal application, the Access State changes from Granted to

Denied.

On the 1353 �M, the Access State changes from LCA to Denied.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1626 LM Management Start Up Managing the Access StateSetting the Access State to the 1353 NM

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



4-9

5 5Software Download

Management

Overview

Purpose

This chapter describes the procedures to follow when you want to download and activate

a software package.

Contents

Downloading a Software Package 5-2

Activating a Software Package 5-4

Displaying Software Package Information 5-5

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



5-1

Downloading a Software Package

Purpose

Use this procedure to download a software package.

Before you begin

• You must know the name of the software package to be downloaded.

• You must know where the software package is stored.

• You must have backuped your configuration before starting a download.

How to download a software package

To download a software package, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Download>Init download...

Result:The Software download initiate window appears.

If stored locally, the software package list is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 If necessary, do the following:

1. In the Server filter field, enter the download server name.

2. In the Package filter field, enter the software package name to download.

3. Click Apply Filter(s).

Result:The available software package list is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 From the list, select the software package to download.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 If appropriate, tick Forced to force the download to start from the beginning.

COMME�T: This is specifically appropriate if you restart a download after a crash.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Click OK.

Result:A confirmation dialog box appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click OK.

Result:The Software Download in Progress (SWDL) window appears.

A download progress bar displays the download percentage of completion.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 If necessary, click Abort to stop the download.

Software Download Management Downloading a Software Package

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Click Close to finish.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Software Download Management Downloading a Software Package

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



5-3

Activating a Software Package

Use this procedure to activate a software package.

Before you begin

The required software package must be downloaded on the 1626 LM.

How to activate a software package

To activate a software package, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Download>Units info...

Result:The Software packages information window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Click the tab related to the software package to activate.

Result:The Current state must be Standby.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 From the corresponding list box, select Activate.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click OK to finish.

Result:An error message is displayed to inform that the communication links are

interrupted.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Click OK.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Close all the current 1626 LM windows.

Result:The 1626 LM performs an automatic reboot.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 After 1626 LM reboot, do the following:

1. Restart the supervision.

2. Select Supervision>Show Equipment.

Result:The 1626 LM GUI starts.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Software Download Management Activating a Software Package

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Displaying Software Package Information

Purpose

Use this procedure to display software package information.

Before you begin

The software package must be downloaded on the 1626 LM.

How to display software package information

To display software package information, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Download>Units info...

Result:Tabs display information related to downloaded software packages

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select the relevant tab and click Sw units Det.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click + or - to expand or collapse information details.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click Close to return to the list.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Software Download Management Displaying Software Package Information

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



5-5

6 6Communication

Configuration

Overview

Purpose

Communication configuration consists in setting up all the necessary network addresses

and elements to enable the communication between the 1626 LM and the other network

elements. This chapter describes the procedures to perform when you want to declare the

required addresses and protocols to enable the 1626 LM to communicate with other

network elements or with network manager.

Contents

Communication and Routing Management Parameters 6-2

Common �etwork Concepts 6-3

Local Area Addressing Parameters 6-4

Time Synchronization Parameters 6-6

Ethernet Interface Parameters 6-7

IP Static Routes Parameters 6-9

LAPD Parameters 6-10

IP Tunnel Parameter 6-11

Managing Communication and Routing 6-12

Setting Up 1626 LM Local Area Addressing Parameters 6-13

Setting Up the �etwork Manager Address Associated to the 1626 LM 6-14

Identifying a �etwork Element as a �TP Server 6-15

Disabling A�TP from the 1626 LM 6-16

Forcing the 1626 LM Date and Time with 1353 �M values 6-17

Configuring the Ethernet Interface 6-18

Configuring IP Static Routes 6-19

Configuring LAPD 6-21

Managing OSI over IP 6-23

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



6-1

Communication and Routing ManagementParameters

Overview

Purpose

This section describes the communication and routing parameters that you will have to

manage at 1626 LM commissioning.

Contents

Common �etwork Concepts 6-3

Local Area Addressing Parameters 6-4

Time Synchronization Parameters 6-6

Ethernet Interface Parameters 6-7

IP Static Routes Parameters 6-9

LAPD Parameters 6-10

IP Tunnel Parameter 6-11

Communication Configuration Communication and Routing Management ParametersOverview

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Common Network Concepts

OSI

1626 LM communication is driven by the OSI reference model (Open System

Interconnection).

OSI is a network architecture model which relies, from top to bottom, on the 7 following

layers:

• Layer 7: Application

• Layer 6: Presentation

• Layer 5: Session

• Layer 4: Transport

• Layer 3: �etwork

• Layer 2: Data

• Layer 1: Physical

Each layer hosts one or several functions that provides/receives services to/from other

functions hosted by the immediate layer above or below. Communication from one layer

to another is done through selectors.

Selectors

A selector is a string which identifies a communication interface between two layers of

the OSI model.

In a 1626 LM configuration context, you need to manage following selectors:

• Presentation selector (P Sel)

• Session selector (S Sel)

• Transport selector (T Sel)

• �etwork selector (� Sel)

Areas, Routing and System Type

At design stage, a network is divided into domains and sub-domains also called areas.

Areas hosts network elements. When a network element supports the routing function, it

is qualified as an IS (Intermediate System).

• When routing occurs between IS of the same area, they are called Level 1 IS.

• When routing occurs between IS of different areas, they are called Level 2 IS.

An IS may operate at level 1, level 2 or level 1 and level 2.

When an IS does not host the routing function, they are qualified as End Systems in the

sense that they can only send or receive data.

Communication Configuration Communication and Routing Management ParametersCommon Network Concepts

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



6-3

NSAP and Synonymous Area Addresses

The �SAP (�etwork Service Access Point) address identifies a network element in a

given OSI area. A network element may have two different addresses depending on the

area it is viewed from. In this case the network element is assigned with multiple

synonymous area addresses.

In a 1626 LM configuration context, you need to complete the 3 following blocks:

• AFI (Authority and Format Identifier)

AFI specifies the type and the format of the network address. AFI possible values are

given in NSAP Address Section in Table 6-1, “1626 LM Local Area Addressing

Parameters” (p. 6-4).

• Non labelled block

A string made of a header and the network area (4 last digits).

The header is driven by the AFI.

The combination of AFI and header part is always the same for all network elements

of a given WDM area.

• System Id: according to the case, identifies a 1626 LM or a network manager (ie:

1353 �M).

• Nsel: identifies a user of a network service (layer 3).

Local Area Addressing Parameters

Good to Know

“Common �etwork Concepts” (p. 6-3)

Table 6-1, “1626 LM Local Area Addressing Parameters” (p. 6-4) describes the local area

address parameters.

Table 6-1 1626 LM Local Area Addressing Parameters

Parameters

Possible

Values Description

Local Address Section

P Sel 0002 Presentation Selector

S Selector 00 Session Selector

T Sel 00 Transport Selector

NSAP Address Section

Communication Configuration Communication and Routing Management ParametersCommon Network Concepts

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Table 6-1 1626 LM Local Area Addressing Parameters (continued)

Parameters

Possible

Values Description

AFI 39 Authority and Format Identifier value for ISO-DCC

format

�SAP address length must be 40 characters

47 Authority and Format Identifier value for

GOSIP-V2 format

�SAP address length must be 40 characters

49 Authority and Format Identifier value for local

format

16 <= �SAP address length <= 40 characters

Non labelled block Driven by

AFI

If AFI = 39 or 47, Length must be 24 characters

If AFI = 49, Length = 24 characters maximum

System Id Value made

of 12

hexadeci-

mal

characters

A unique identifier of a node in a network area. By

default, it is set to the node or network manager

MAC address. Depending on the context, can be:

• 1626 LM id

• Main network manager id

• Spare network manager id

Once set, the System Id is definitively assigned.

N Sel 1D

(Default)

Identifies a user of a network service (layer 3).

In this context, the default value identifies the

transport layer.

Synonymous Area Address Section

Optional. If completed, System Id and N Sel must be identical to mandatory �SAp address.

System Type Section

Intermediate system

level

L1

(Default)

The network element acts as a level 1 IS

(intermediate system).

It is strongly recommended to keep L1 default

value.

L2 The network element acts as a level 2 IS

(intermediate system).

End System The network element acts as an end system.

See Also

• “Common �etwork Concepts” (p. 6-3)

• “Setting Up 1626 LM Local Area Addressing Parameters” (p. 6-13)

• “Setting Up the �etwork Manager Address Associated to the 1626 LM” (p. 6-14)

Communication Configuration Communication and Routing Management ParametersLocal Area Addressing Parameters

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



6-5

Time Synchronization Parameters

�TP (�etwork Time Protocol) is used for date and time synchronization among network

elements. In an Alcatel-Lucent network it is A�TP (Alcatel �TP) which is implemented

for date and time synchronization.

When A�TP is enabled, you then need to identify what network element is the �TP

server to enable the 1626 LM to synchronize with. The �TP server can be a specific

network element or a network manager like the 1353 �M.

�ote: For high availability reasons, you may decide to have a redundant �TP server.

In this case, you will have a main �TP server and a spare �TP server.

If A�TP is not enabled, you can force the 1626 LM to take the date and time of the

network manager.

Table 6-2, “�TP Server �etwork Address Parameters” (p. 6-6) describes �TP server

network address parameters.

Table 6-2 NTP Server Network Address Parameters

Parameters

Possible

Values Description

NSAP Address Section

AFI 39 Authority and Format Identifier value for

ISO-DCC format

Length must be 40 characters

47 Authority and Format Identifier value for

GOSIP-V2 format

Length must be 40 characters

49 Authority and Format Identifier value for local

format

16 <= Length <= 40 characters

IDI Driven by

AFI

If AFI = 39 or 47, Length must be 24 characters

If AFI = 49, Length = 24 characters maximum

System Id Value made

of 12

hexadeci-

mal

characters

A unique identifier of a node in a network area. By

default, it is set to the node or network manager

MAC address. Depending on the context, can be:

• 1626 LM id

• Main network manager id

• Spare network manager id

Once set, the System Id is definitively assigned.

NSel 7B

(Default)

Identifies a user of a network service (layer 3).

In this context, the default value identifies the time

synchronization application.

Communication Configuration Communication and Routing Management ParametersTime Synchronization Parameters

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



See Also

• “Identifying a �etwork Element as a �TP Server” (p. 6-15)

• “Disabling A�TP from the 1626 LM” (p. 6-16)

• “Forcing the 1626 LM Date and Time with 1353 �M values” (p. 6-17)

Ethernet Interface Parameters

In the 1626 LM context, the Ethernet interface is supported by the RJ45 connector n°2 of

the ESCT2000 board.

You need to configure this interface only if your 1626 LM has to connect with an

Ethernet network. Otherwise this task is not mandatory.

Table 6-3, “Ethernet Interface Parameters” (p. 6-7) describes Ethernet interface

parameters.

Table 6-3 Ethernet Interface Parameters

Parameters Possible

Values

Description

Ethernet Interface Section

Yes Enables an Ethernet port.

No Disables an Ethernet port.

MAC Address Section

Displays the MAC address of the Ethernet port of the ESCT2000 board.

Synonymous Section

Optional. If completed, must be identical to �SAP address.

Network Protocol Section

OSI (Default) Indicates the type of network supported by the Ethernet

port.

In case of an OSI network, Ethernet port is automatically

detected by an IS-IS (Intermediate System-to-

Intermediate System) router.

It is recommended to keep OSI as the default value.

IP

OSI and IP

OSI Section Section

L2 Only Yes The Ethernet port acts as a Level 2 IS-IS router only.

No The Ethernet port acts as a Level 1 and 2 IS-IS router.

L1 & L2 Default

Metric

1 to 63

Default: 12

A value which is assigned to a link between 2 adjacent

routers. In the 1626 LM context, all the links have the

same default metric.

In case of optimization, the rule is: the lowest Default

Metric, the highest bandwidth.

Communication Configuration Communication and Routing Management ParametersTime Synchronization Parameters

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



6-7

Table 6-3 Ethernet Interface Parameters (continued)

Parameters Possible

Values

Description

L1 & L2 Priority 0 to 127

Default: 1

Allocates a priority to a router. The router which has the

highest priority becomes the designated router.

Allocate a low priority to avoid the Ethernet port to

become a designated router.

With value 0, you are sure that the Ethernet port will

never be a designated router.

IP Section Section

The configuration of this section is not mandatory if you do not need to rely on an IP network

to access the network manager.

You must configure IP addressing parameters if:

• You select IP or OSI and IP radio buttons in the Network Protocol section.

• you want to rely on an IP tunnel to reach the network manager via an IP subnetwork.

IP Address x.x.x.x

4 position

numerical

characters

x= 0 to 255

Unique address that identifies a sender or a receiver of

packets in an IP �etwork.

IP Mask x.x.x.x

4 position

numerical

characters

x= 0 to 255

The address used to divide the IP address into subnets.

IP Routing

Protocols

IS-IS Intermediate System-to-Intermediate System protocol

OSPF Open Shortest Path First protocol

(�ot applicable for this current release)

RIP Routing Information Protocol

(�ot applicable for this current release)

None -

Associated OSPF Section (�ot applicable for this current release)

See Also

“Configuring the Ethernet Interface” (p. 6-18)

Communication Configuration Communication and Routing Management ParametersEthernet Interface Parameters

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



IP Static Routes Parameters

Good to Know

• Table 6-4, “IP Routing Parameters” (p. 6-9) describes the IP routing parameters.

• You need to complete these parameters only for IP Tunnel configuration in case of

OSI tranport over IP.

Table 6-4 IP Routing Parameters

Parameters Possible Values Description

Destination Section (Enabled if check box is ticked)

x.x.x.x

4 position

numerical

characters

x= 0 to 255

Unique address that identifies the network element that

the 1626 LM must reach via IP.

Destination Network Section (Enabled if check box is ticked)

IP Address x.x.x.x

4 position

numerical

characters

x= 0 to 255

Unique address that identifies the destination network.

IP Mask x.x.x.x

4 position

numerical

characters

x= 0 to 255

The address used to divide the destination network into

subnets.

Default

Gateway IP

Address

x.x.x.x

4 position

numerical

characters

x= 0 to 255

IPAddress of the equipment enabling the inter-LA�

communication.

Enabled if check box is checked.

CLNP Tunnel �ot applicable for this current release.

IP Point to Point

Interface Id

�ot applicable for this current release.

Communication Configuration Communication and Routing Management ParametersIP Static Routes Parameters

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



6-9

See Also

“Configuring IP Static Routes” (p. 6-19)

LAPD Parameters

LAPD (Link Access Protocol - channel D) is a point-to-point protocol that can be

activated if you decide to transport the supervision via the optical fiber rather than the

TM� (Telecommunication Management �etwork).

As LAPD is a point-to-point protocol, each end-point has a specific role. If one end-point

is declared User, the other end-point is Network.

Table 6-5, “LAPD Parameters” (p. 6-10) describes LAPD parameters.

Table 6-5 LAPD Parameters

Parameters Possible

Values

Description

LAPD Creation (Point to Point creation under OTS)

OTS Instance List of OTS

blocks attached

to an OSCU

board.

Each item of the list corresponds to an OSCU port.

You can activate LAPD on 2 OSCU ports maximum.

LAPD Role Network The role of one of the two LAPD end-points.

If one end-point is declared as being Network, the other

must be User.

User The role of one of the two LAPD end-points.

If one end-point is declared as being Network, the other

must be User.

OSC Byte

Configuration• D1 - D3

• D4 - D12

The bytes which transport the supervision signal within

the supervision frame.

• D1-D3 bytes are typically used for supervision

transport between adjacent nodes (regeneration

section). Rate is 192 Kbps.

These bytes are configured for any type of nodes.

• D4-D12 bytes are typically used for supervision

transport between nodes which terminate

multiplexing section. Rate is 576 Kbps.

These bytes are configured only for Line Terminals

and xOADM nodes.

Communication Configuration Communication and Routing Management ParametersIP Static Routes Parameters

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



See Also

“Configuring LAPD” (p. 6-21)

IP Tunnel Parameter

IP tunnel is required when you want to reach the network manager via an IP subnetwork.

The following table describes the IP tunnel parameter.

Parameter Possible Value Description

IP Tunnel

Address

x.x.x.x

4 position

numerical

characters

x= 0 to 255

IP address of the remote machine where IP

communication terminates.

Depending on your network design, can be the

network manager or a router.

Note 1: The IP tunnel becomes effective when you

have set �E IP address at network manager or at

relevant router. Once these two addresses assigned,

the IP tunnel is considered as a Point-To-Point link

by the IS-IS router.

Note 2: If you want to have a spare IP tunnel, click

New to enable a new tab where you can set a new IP

tunnel address.

See Also

“Managing OSI over IP” (p. 6-23)

Communication Configuration Communication and Routing Management ParametersLAPD Parameters

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



6-11

Managing Communication and Routing

Overview

Purpose

This section describes all the required procedures to be performed when you want to set

or to update 1626 LM communication and routing parameters.

Contents

Setting Up 1626 LM Local Area Addressing Parameters 6-13

Setting Up the �etwork Manager Address Associated to the 1626 LM 6-14

Identifying a �etwork Element as a �TP Server 6-15

Disabling A�TP from the 1626 LM 6-16

Forcing the 1626 LM Date and Time with 1353 �M values 6-17

Configuring the Ethernet Interface 6-18

Configuring IP Static Routes 6-19

Configuring LAPD 6-21

Managing OSI over IP 6-23

Communication Configuration Managing Communication and RoutingOverview

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Setting Up 1626 LM Local Area Addressing Parameters

Purpose

Use this procedure to declare the 1626 LM network addresses.

Before you begin

• You must know all the network identifiers of the 1626 LM,

• The 1626 LM GUI is started.

How to set up the 1626 LM Network address

To set up 1626 LM network addresses, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Configuration>Comm/Routing>Local Configuration menu.

Result:The Local Address area window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Set the values to each parameters as described in Table 6-1, “1626 LM Local Area

Addressing Parameters” (p. 6-4).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


See Also

• Table 6-1, “1626 LM Local Area Addressing Parameters” (p. 6-4)

• “Common �etwork Concepts” (p. 6-3)

Communication Configuration Managing Communication and RoutingSetting Up 1626 LM Local Area Addressing Parameters

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



6-13

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Setting Up the Network Manager Address Associated to the1626 LM

Purpose

Use this procedure to declare the network manager address which supervise the 1626 LM.

Good to Know

“Common �etwork Concepts” (p. 6-3)

Before you begin

• You must know all the network identifiers of the network manager,


How to set up the Network Manager Address associated to the 1626 LM

To set up the network manager address associated to the 1626 LM, perform the following

steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Configuration>Comm/Routing>OS Configuration menu.

Result:The OS Configuration window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Set the values to each parameters as described in Table 6-1, “1626 LM Local Area

Addressing Parameters” (p. 6-4)for the Main OS Address area.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


See Also

Table 6-1, “1626 LM Local Area Addressing Parameters” (p. 6-4)

Communication Configuration Managing Communication and RoutingSetting Up the Network Manager Address Associated to

the 1626 LM...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Identifying a Network Element as a NTP Server

Purpose

Use this procedure to identify a �etwork Element as a �TP server.

Before you begin

• You must know all the network identifiers of the selected network element.


How to identify a Network Element as a NTP Server

To identify a �etwork Element as a �TP server, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Configuration>Comm/Routing>NTP Server Configuration.

Result:The �TP Server Configuration window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 In the Enabling NTP protocol area, click Yes.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Set the values to each parameters as described in Table 6-2, “�TP Server �etwork

Address Parameters” (p. 6-6) for the Main NTP server Address area.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 If applicable, set the values to each parameters as described in Table 6-2, “�TP Server

�etwork Address Parameters” (p. 6-6) for the Spare NTP server Address area.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


See Also

“Time Synchronization Parameters” (p. 6-6)

Communication Configuration Managing Communication and RoutingIdentifying a Network Element as a NTP Server

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



6-15

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Disabling ANTP from the 1626 LM

Purpose

Use this procedure to disable A�TP from the 1626 LM.

Before you begin

The 1626 LM GUI is started.

How to disable ANTP from the 1626 LM

To disable A�TP from the 1626 LM, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Configuration>Comm/Routing>NTP Server Configuration.

Result:The NTP Server Configuration window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 In the Enabling NTP protocol area, select No.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


See Also


Communication Configuration Managing Communication and RoutingDisabling ANTP from the 1626 LM

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Forcing the 1626 LM Date and Time with 1353 NM values

Purpose

Use this procedure to force the 1626 LM date and time with the 1353 �M values.

Before you begin

• A�TP is disabled.


How to force the 1626 LM Date and Time with 1353 NM values

To force the 1626 LM Date and Time with 1353 �M values, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Configuration>NE Time.

Result:The �E Time window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 In the Set NE Time with OS Time area, click Set.

Result:The 1626 LM local clock takes the 1353 �M date and time values as

references.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 In case of multirack configuration, restart the 1626 LM.

�ote: The restart guarantees a complete synchronization across the racks.

See Also


Communication Configuration Managing Communication and RoutingForcing the 1626 LM Date and Time with 1353 NM values

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



6-17

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Configuring the Ethernet Interface

Purpose

Use this procedure to assign the required values to the Ethernet parameters

Before you begin

• The ESCT2000 board must be plugged in the master rack and configured.


How to configure the Ethernet Interface

To configure the Ethernet interface, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Configuration>Comm/Routing>Interfaces Configuration>Ethernet

Configuration.

Result:The Ethernet Configuration window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 In the Ethernet Interface area, click Yes.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Set the values to each parameters as described in Table 6-3, “Ethernet Interface


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click Apply to validate the configuration.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


Result:The 1626 LM restarts automatically.

�ote: If you have configured the IP addressing parameters, you must configure the IP

static routing parameters.

See Also


• Table 6-3, “Ethernet Interface Parameters” (p. 6-7)

• “Configuring IP Static Routes” (p. 6-19)

Communication Configuration Managing Communication and RoutingConfiguring the Ethernet Interface

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Configuring IP Static Routes

Purpose

You must perform this procedure if:

• OSI over IP is implemented,

• �etwork manager is not located into the same area as you �E.

Before you begin

Check that:

• OSI over IP is implemented.

• �etwork manager is not located into the same area as you �E.

• You have configured the IP addressing parameters of the ESCT2000 board.


How to configure IP Static Routes

To configure IP static routes, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Configuration>IP Configuration>IP Static Routing Configuration.

Result:The IP Static Routing Configuration window is displayed

• To create a new IP static route, go to Step 2.

• To modify an existing IP static route, go to Step 3.

• To delete an existing IP static route, go to Step 4.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 To create a new IP static route, click New and perform the following steps:

1. Set the values to each parameters as described in Table 6-4, “IP Routing Parameters”

(p. 6-9).

2. Click Apply to validate the configuration.

3. Restart the 1626 LM to take into account the new configuration.

4. Go to Step 5 in “How to configure the Ethernet Interface” (p. 6-18).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 To modify an existing IP static route, select the relevant tab and perform the following

steps:

1. Set the new values to the required parameters as described in Table 6-4, “IP Routing


2. Click Apply to validate the configuration.


4. Go to Step 5 in “How to configure the Ethernet Interface” (p. 6-18).

Communication Configuration Managing Communication and RoutingConfiguring IP Static Routes

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



6-19

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 To delete an existing IP static route, select the relevant tab and perform the following

steps:

1. click Delete.


See Also


• Table 6-3, “Ethernet Interface Parameters” (p. 6-7)

• Table 6-4, “IP Routing Parameters” (p. 6-9)


Communication Configuration Managing Communication and RoutingConfiguring IP Static Routes

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Configuring LAPD

Purpose

Use this procedure to configure LAPD on your 1626 LM.

Before you begin

OSCU board is declared and cabled.

How to configure LAPD

To configure LAPD, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Comm/Routing>Interface Configuration>LAPD Configuration.

Result:The LAPD Configuration window is displayed.

• To create LAPD for a new OTS or OTU point, go to step 2).

• To modify LAPD configuration for an existing OTS, go to step 3).

• To delete LAPD configuration from an existing OTS, go to step 4).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 To create LAPD for a new OTS or OTU point, perform the following steps:

1. In the LAPD Creation area, click an OTS point reference.

2. Click the relevant LAPD role for this OTS point.

3. In the OSC byte Configuration list, click on the relevant transport bytes identification.

4. Click Create.

5. The LAPD configuration information is displayed in LAPD Configuration area.

6. End of configuration. Go to Step 5 in “How to configure the Ethernet Interface”

(p. 6-18).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 To modify LAPD configuration for an existing OTS point, perform the following steps:

• In the LAPD Configuration area, click an OTS point reference.

The Modify button is activated.

• In the LAPD Role area, click the relevant LAPD role for this OTS point.

• Click Modify.

• End of modification. Go to Step 5

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 To delete LAPD configuration from an existing OTS point, perform the following steps:

1. In the LAPD Configuration area, click an OTS point reference.

The Delete button is activated.

2. Click Delete.

Communication Configuration Managing Communication and RoutingConfiguring LAPD

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



6-21

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

See Also

“LAPD Parameters” (p. 6-10)

Communication Configuration Managing Communication and RoutingConfiguring LAPD

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Managing OSI over IP

Purpose

Use this procedure when you want to create or delete an IP tunnels which transport OSI

packets via an IP tunnel.

Before you begin

You must have previously configured:

• the �E IP address

• the Ethernet interface with OSI and IP enabled

• at least one static route

How to create an IP tunnel

To create IP tunnels, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Comm/Routing>Tunneling Configuration>OSI over IP.

Result:The OSI over IP Tunneling Configuration window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 If necessary, click New to create a new IP tunnel.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Enter the IP address of the remote machine where IP communication terminates.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 If necessary, repeat from Step 2.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Click Apply.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


See Also

• “IP Tunnel Parameter” (p. 6-11)

• “Configuring the Ethernet Interface” (p. 6-18)


• “Setting Up 1626 LM Local Area Addressing Parameters” (p. 6-13)

Communication Configuration Managing Communication and RoutingManaging OSI over IP

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



6-23

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

How to delete an IP tunnel

To delete an IP tunnel, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select the relevant tab.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Click Delete.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


See Also

“IP Tunnel Parameter” (p. 6-11)

Communication Configuration Managing Communication and RoutingManaging OSI over IP

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 7Database Backup and

Restore

Overview

Purpose

The MIB (Management Information Base) is the database which stores all the

configuration information and processes to be executed by the 1626 LM.

The MIB is the database that you must save on a regular basis.

This chapter describes the procedures to follow when you want to:

• backup and restore the MIB,

• manage the MIB files.

Contents

When to Backup and Restore ? 7-2

When to Backup? 7-2

When to Restore? 7-2

Managing the MIB 7-3

Backing Up the MIB 7-4

Restoring the MIB 7-5

Deleting the MIB 7-7

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



7-1

When to Backup and Restore ?

When to Backup?

Backup creation is basically performed after the following events:

• installation,

• version change.

Installation

Installation corresponds to the initial introduction of programs and configuration data in

the 1626 LM.

Version Change

Version change corresponds to a change of software providing new services compared to

the previous version.

Operation Context

In your daily operation context and according to your data security standards, you should

plan to backup the MIB on a regular basis. Choose the time which will have the lowest

impact on the traffic. With this type of backup, you can restore your configuration with

the minimum loss of data.

See Also

“Backing Up the MIB” (p. 7-4)

When to Restore?

Backup restoration consists of restoring a MIB from a backup file.

The following lists the main restoration cases:

• Replacement of an ESCT board,

• Return to a previous operation configuration,

AMIB restore must be performed only if there is serious software and/or hardware

problems and if normal troubleshooting actions have not solved the problem.

See Also

“Restoring the MIB” (p. 7-5)

Database Backup and Restore When to Backup and Restore ?When to Backup?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Managing the MIB

Overview

Purpose

This topic describes the MIB management procedures:

Contents

Backing Up the MIB 7-4

Restoring the MIB 7-5

Deleting the MIB 7-7

Database Backup and Restore Managing the MIBOverview

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



7-3

Backing Up the MIB

Purpose

Use the procedure to back up the MIB.

Before you begin

1626 LM GUI is started.

How to backup the MIB

To backup the MIB, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Download>MIB management.

Result:The �E MIB management window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 In Backup name field, enter a name for your MIB backup.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click Backup.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click OK.

Result:The backup starts.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Click Cancel to close the dialog box.

Result:The backup process continues.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Wait until the successful backup message is displayed and click Cancel.

Result:The NE MIB management window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 In the Backup name field, the name of the recent MIB backup file is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Database Backup and Restore Managing the MIBBacking Up the MIB

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Restoring the MIB

Purpose

Use this procedure to restore the MIB.

Before you begin

• Read the Database and Local Configuration Maintenance chapter of the 1626 LM

Maintenance and Trouble Clearing Guide to know in what context the MIB

restoration takes place.

• 1626 LM GUI is started.

• LAPD must be deactivated.

How to restore the MIB

To restore the MIB, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the Available Backups on local server list, select the relevant backup file to

restore.

Result: In the Backup name field, the name of the selected MIB backup file is

displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click Restore.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click OK.

Result:The restoration starts.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Click Cancel to close the dialog box.

Result:The restoration process continues.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Wait until the successful message is displayed and click Cancel.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Select the MIB to restore and click Activate.

Database Backup and Restore Managing the MIBRestoring the MIB

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



7-5

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Click OK to confirm.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Wait until the successful restoration message is displayed and click Cancel.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................


�ote:After activation, the 1626 LM performs an automatic reboot.

Database Backup and Restore Managing the MIBRestoring the MIB

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Deleting the MIB

Purpose

Use this procedure to delete the MIB.

Before you begin

�one.

How to delete the MIB

To delete the MIB, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the Available Backups on local server list, select the relevant backup file to delete.

Result: In the Backup name field, the name of the selected MIB backup file is

displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click Delete.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click OK.

Result:The deletion starts.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Wait until the successful deletion message is displayed and click Cancel.

Result:The �E MIB management appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Database Backup and Restore Managing the MIBDeleting the MIB

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



7-7

8 8Racks and Subracks

Management

Overview

Purpose

This chapter explains:

• how to display 1626 LM racks and subracks,

• how to manage the declaration of 1626 LM racks and subracks.

Contents

Displaying Hardware Views 8-2

Displaying the General Overview of the 1626 LM Hardware 8-3

Displaying the Rack View 8-4

Displaying the Subrack View 8-5

Displaying the Board View 8-6

Managing Racks 8-7

Declaring a Rack 8-8

Setting a Rack In Service 8-10

Setting a Rack Out Of Service 8-11

Undeclaring/Removing a Rack 8-12

Managing Subracks 8-13

Declaring a Subrack 8-14

Setting a Subrack In Service 8-15

Setting a Subrack Out Of Service 8-16

Undeclaring/Removing a Subrack 8-17

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



8-1

Displaying Hardware Views

Overview

Purpose

This topic explains how to display the different graphical representation of the 1626 LM

hardware.

Contents

Displaying the General Overview of the 1626 LM Hardware 8-3

Displaying the Rack View 8-4

Displaying the Subrack View 8-5

Displaying the Board View 8-6

Racks and Subracks Management Displaying Hardware ViewsOverview

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Displaying the General Overview of the 1626 LM Hardware

Purpose

Use this procedure to display the general overview of the 1626 LM hardware.

Before you begin


How to display the general overview of the 1626 LM hardware

To display the general overview of the 1626 LM hardware, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Views>Show Equipment.

Result:

• The Equipment View window is displayed.

• The master rack and possible associated secondary rack are displayed.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Racks and Subracks Management Displaying Hardware ViewsDisplaying the General Overview of the 1626 LM

Hardware...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



8-3

Displaying the Rack View

Purpose

Use this procedure to display the 1626 LM rack view.

Before you begin

The Equipment View window is displayed.

How to display the rack view

To display the rack view, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Double click on a rack.

Result:

• The rack view appears and displays the associated subracks.

• The associated subracks can be configured or empty.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Racks and Subracks Management Displaying Hardware ViewsDisplaying the Rack View

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Displaying the Subrack View

Purpose

Use this procedure to display the 1626 LM subrack view.

Before you begin

The Rack View window is displayed.

How display the subrack view

To display the subrack view, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Double click on a subrack.

Result:The subrack view appears and displays the associated boards and empty slots.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Racks and Subracks Management Displaying Hardware ViewsDisplaying the Subrack View

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



8-5

Displaying the Board View

Purpose

Use this procedure to display the details of a selected board.

Before you begin

The Subrack View window is displayed.

How to display the board view

To display the board view, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Double click on a board.

Result:The board view appears and displays the following:

• board administrative state,

• board alarms,

• depending on the board type:

– specific configuration information,

– XFP (eXtended Form Factor Pluggable) or SFP (Small Form Factor Pluggable)

modules,

– ports with status In Service.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Racks and Subracks Management Displaying Hardware ViewsDisplaying the Board View

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Managing Racks

Overview

Purpose

This topic explains how to manage rack declaration.

Contents

Declaring a Rack 8-8

Setting a Rack In Service 8-10

Setting a Rack Out Of Service 8-11

Undeclaring/Removing a Rack 8-12

Racks and Subracks Management Managing RacksOverview

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



8-7

Declaring a Rack

Purpose

Use this procedure to declare a new rack.

Before you begin

• The Rack View window is displayed,

• The rack slot is empty.

Good to Know

To declare a compact rack for first time, you need to:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Declare a generic rack as described in the procedure below.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Set the rack out of service.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Undeclare/remove the rack.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Perform the compact rack declaration as described in the procedure below.

How to declare a rack

To declare a rack, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Click an empty rack slot.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select Equipment>Set.

Result:The Set Equipment window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Untick Actual Equipment only.

Result:The list of available rack types appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 In the Allowed Equipment Types area, select the rack type.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Click OK.

Racks and Subracks Management Managing RacksDeclaring a Rack

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 In the dialog box, click OK.

Result:

• The rack representation appears.

• The rack operational status is In Service.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Racks and Subracks Management Managing RacksDeclaring a Rack

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



8-9

Setting a Rack In Service

Purpose

Use this procedure to set a rack in service.

Before you begin

• The Rack View window is displayed.

• The rack operational status is Out of Service.

How to set a rack in service

To set a rack in service, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select the rack.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select Equipment>Set in Service.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 In the dialog box click OK.

Result:The rack operational status becomes In Service.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Racks and Subracks Management Managing RacksSetting a Rack In Service

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Setting a Rack Out Of Service

Purpose

Use this procedure to set a rack out of service.

Before you begin


• The rack operational status is In Service.

How to set a rack out of service

To set a rack out of service, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select the rack.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select Equipment>Set out of Service.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


Result:The rack operational status becomes Out of Service.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Racks and Subracks Management Managing RacksSetting a Rack Out Of Service

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



8-11

Undeclaring/Removing a Rack

Purpose

Use this procedure to undeclare a rack.

Before you begin


• All the subracks have been undeclared/removed.

• The shelf operational status is Out of Service.

How to undeclare a rack

To undeclare a rack, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select the rack.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select Equipment>Remove.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


Result:The rack disappears from the shelf view.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Racks and Subracks Management Managing RacksUndeclaring/Removing a Rack

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Managing Subracks

Overview

Purpose

This topic explains how to manage subrack declaration.

Contents

Declaring a Subrack 8-14

Setting a Subrack In Service 8-15

Setting a Subrack Out Of Service 8-16

Undeclaring/Removing a Subrack 8-17

Racks and Subracks Management Managing SubracksOverview

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



8-13

Declaring a Subrack

Purpose

Use this procedure to declare a new subrack.

Before you begin

The Rack View window is displayed.

How to declare a subrack

To declare a subrack, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Click an empty subrack slot.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 In the Allowed Equipment Types area, select the subrack type.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click OK.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 In the dialog box, click OK.

Result:

• The subrack representation appears.

• The subrack operational status is In Service.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Racks and Subracks Management Managing SubracksDeclaring a Subrack

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Setting a Subrack In Service

Purpose

Use this procedure to set a subrack in service.

Before you begin


• The subrack operational status is Out of Service.

How to set a subrack in service

To set a subrack in service, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Click the subrack.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select Equipment>Set in Service.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


Result:The subrack operational status becomes In Service.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Racks and Subracks Management Managing SubracksSetting a Subrack In Service

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



8-15

Setting a Subrack Out Of Service

Purpose

Use this procedure to set a subrack out of service.

Before you begin


• The subrack operational status is In Service.

How to set a subrack out of service

To set a subrack out of service, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Click the subrack.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select Equipment>Set out of Service.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


Result:The subrack operational status becomes Out of Service.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Racks and Subracks Management Managing SubracksSetting a Subrack Out Of Service

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Undeclaring/Removing a Subrack

Purpose

Use this procedure to undeclare a subrack.

Before you begin

• The Subrack View window is displayed.

• All the boards have been undeclared/removed.

• The subrack operational status is Out of Service.

How to undeclare a subrack

To undeclare a subrack, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select the subrack.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................


Result:The subrack disappears from the rack view.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Racks and Subracks Management Managing SubracksUndeclaring/Removing a Subrack

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



8-17

9 9Board and SFP/XFP

Module Management

Overview

Purpose

Boards are the hardware components which host the functions delivered by the 1626 LM.

For connectivity reasons, boards can be enhanced with hot swappable optical transceivers

called SFP (Small Form Factor Pluggable) or XFP (eXtended Form Factor Pluggable)

modules.

This chapter explains how to manage boards and SFP/XFP modules.

Contents

About Board Provisioning and Configuration 9-4

About the Provisioning Process 9-4

About ETHC Configurations 9-5

About TRBD1191 Board 9-11

Declaring/Undeclaring Boards 9-12

TRBx and Mux/Demux Models and Features 9-13

Declaring OCPU Protection Boards 9-19

Declaring Control and Service Boards 9-20

Declaring TRBD Boards 9-22

Declaring TRBC boards 9-26

Declaring OSCU Supervision Boards 9-29

Declaring BMDX Boards 9-31

Declaring OMDX Boards 9-33

Declaring CMDX Boards 9-35

Declaring the ALCT (Automatic Level Control) Board 9-36

Declaring LOFA11xx Amplifier Boards 9-38

Declaring BOFAAmplifier Boards 9-40

Declaring Ethernet Boards 9-42

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



9-1

Declaring TDMX 1180 boards 9-44

Declaring OADC boards 9-46

Declaring WMA�1100 Boards 9-47

Declaring WMA� 3x74 Boards 9-49

Undeclaring/Removing Boards 9-51

Board Configuration Parameters 9-53

Board Generic Configuration Parameters 9-53

Board Specific Configuration Parameters 9-55

Laser Power Configuration Parameters 9-62

TRBx Shutdown Criteria 9-64

LOFA11xx Power Tuning Parameters 9-65

LOFA11xx APSD Parameters 9-68

TDMX and WMA� Configuration Parameters 9-69

Configuring Boards 9-73

Configuring ETHCWorking Mode 9-74

Managing ETHC Cross Connections 9-75

Configuring 2xGBE_FC Board Signal Type Transportation 9-77

Configuring TRBx or ALCT Laser Output Power 9-78

Configuring LOFA11xx Laser Output Power 9-79

Configuring WMA� Laser Power 9-80

Configuring TRBx Frequency 9-81

Configuring TRBx Transmission Parameters 9-82

Configuring TRBx Shutdown Criteria 9-83

Configuring 40 Gbps TRBC Ethernet Mapping 9-84

Configuring LOFA11xx APSD 9-85

Configuring Contradirectionality 9-86

Configuring the BMDX Band associated to a CMDX Board 9-87

Configuring ALCTWorking Mode 9-88

Configuring ALCT Stimulated Brillouin Scattering Mechanism 9-90

Configuring TDMX 1180 Port Profile 9-91

Configuring TDMX 1180 Output Power 9-92

Configuring WMA� Provisioning Parameters 9-93

Configuring WMA� 1100 Equalization Parameter 9-94

Configuring Channels on WMA� 3x74 boards 9-95

Setting Boards In/Out of Service 9-96

Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Overview

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Setting a Board In Service 9-97

Setting a Board Out of Service 9-98

Managing SFP/XFPModules 9-99

About SFP/XFPModules and Board Compatibility 9-100

Declaring a SFP/XFPModule 9-101

Setting a SFP/XFPModule In Service 9-102

Setting a SFP/XFPModule Out of Service 9-103

Undeclaring/Removing SFP/XFPModules 9-104

Displaying SFP/XFPModule Payload 9-105

Changing an SFP or an XFP 9-106

Activating Firmware 9-107

Firmware Activation Displayed Information 9-107


Controlling TRBx, ETHC and 2*GE_FC Board Laser 9-109

Laser Control Parameters 9-109

Controlling TRBx, ETHC and 2*GE_FC Boards Laser 9-111

Managing External Points 9-113

About External Points 9-113

External Points Parameters 9-115

Displaying all External Points 9-116

Managing External Input Points 9-117

Managing External Output Points 9-118

Filtering External Input Points 9-119

Filtering External Output Points 9-120

Managing LOFAUpgrade with EMPM1000 9-121

Upgrading LOFAwith EMPM1000 in a Line Terminal or a B-OADM without

OMSP

9-122

Upgrading LOFAwith EMPM1000 in a Line Terminal or a B-OADM with

OMSP

9-124

Upgrading LOFAwith EMPM1000 in a T/R-OADM 9-126

Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Overview

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



9-3

About Board Provisioning and Configuration

About the Provisioning Process

Board installation and declaration is necessary but not sufficient to perform a complete

provisioning process.

Important! Board declaration is not applicable when board insertion triggers an

automatic provisioning.

The following describes the step by step provisioning process:

1. Declare boards.

Important: This step is not applicable when board insertion triggers an automatic

provisioning

2. If applicable, declare SFP/XFP modules.

3. Set the connectors in service.

4. If applicable, set the board generic and/or specific parameters.

5. For each board to connect, declare cabling between the relevant connectors.

6. Update transmission.

7. If necessary, create cross connections.

8. End.

See Also

• “Declaring/Undeclaring Boards” (p. 9-12)

• “Board Configuration Parameters” (p. 9-53)

• “Configuring Boards” (p. 9-73)

• “Setting Boards In/Out of Service” (p. 9-96)

• “Managing SFP/XFPModules” (p. 9-99)

• “Activating Firmware” (p. 9-107)

• “Controlling TRBx, ETHC and 2*GE_FC Board Laser” (p. 9-109)

• “Managing External Points” (p. 9-113)

Board and SFP/XFP Module Management About Board Provisioning and ConfigurationAbout the Provisioning Process

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



About ETHC Configurations

ETHC Basic Concept

An ETHC board aggregates Gigabit Ethernet channels at 1 Gbps rate into optical lines at

10 Gbps rate.

It can be connected either to a TRBD1191 transponder or to an XFP module before to

connect to a Mux/Demux.

Depending on the configuration modes, the ETHC board enables:

• Up to 12 channels at 1 Gps rate on the User/Client side,

• Up to 2 optical lines at 10 Gps rate on the line to MUX side.

The following figure illustrates the basic concept of an ETHC.

The following figure illustrates an example of how an ETHC can interface with a

TRBD1191.

Figure 9-1 ETHC Basic Concept

Board and SFP/XFP Module Management About Board Provisioning and ConfigurationAbout ETHC Configurations

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



9-5

Figure 9-2 Example of ETHC-TRBD1191 connection


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



ETHC Configuration Modes

Depending on your network design, you can configure the ETHC into different

configuration modes. As a consequence, you will have access to different level of

resources as explained in the following table:

If you configure the ETHC in... You can...

Concentration Mode use the following resources:

• Up to 9 User-Client channels numbered

from 51 to 59.

These numbers are automatically assigned

and cannot be changed.

• One 10 Gbps optical line labelled L13.

L13 supports 9 User-Client channels.

•

connect the ETHC to one of the following:

• a TRBD1191 board via the backplane

• an XFP module

Add & Drop Mode use the following resources:

• Up to 12 User-Client channels which

numbers can be picked up in the following

range: 100 to 999

• Two optical lines labelled L13 and L14.

Each of these two lines supports a

maximum of 9 User-Client channels.

In case of migration from Concentrator

mode to Add & Drop mode , you can:

• Keep the existing channels numbered from

51 to 59, as Add & Drop channels. For any

circumstances, you want to redesign the

way your services are handled, you may

need to delete these existing cross

connections and to create new ones.

• Implement the new channels by picking

the channel numbers from the range: 100

to 999.

ATTENTION:You cannot change your

configuration fromAdd & Drop mode to

Concentration mode.

The following figures illustrate the ETHC concept in the context of the different

configuration modes.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



9-7

ETHC Working in a Concentration Mode

To configure an ETHC in a concentration mode, you must perform the following:

1. Depending on your node configuration:

• to connect ETHC line toward MUX via XFP module, or

• to connect User-Client traffic to TRBD1191 line module.

2. to set the specific CONF_MODE parameter to Concentrator_Auto.

Figure 9-3 Illustration of an ETHC in Concentration Mode

Figure 9-4 Illustration of an ETHC in Add & Drop Mode


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



To connect User-Client channels to line modules, you must establish cross connections

via functional blocks from the transmission view as follows:

If you want to connect...

Then, cross connection is...

And you connect thefollowing TP ...

ETHC line to ETHC XFP

line• Mandatory

• Operator responsibility

port#13 - RsTTP

to

port#13 - OCH

ETHC line to TRBD1191

line• Depending on node

configuration

• Operator responsibility

ETHC port#13 - RsTTP

to

TRBD1191 port#101 - ODU2

For information only:

ETHC User-Client channels

to ETHC line

• Automatic

• �ot operator

configurable

For information only:

OCHgdc port

to

RSgdc port

See Also

“Managing Cross Connections” (p. 12-7)


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



9-9

ETHC Working in an Add & Drop Mode

To configure an ETHC in an Add & Drop mode, you must perform the following:

1. Depending on your node configuration:

• to connect ETHC line toward MUX via XFP module, or

• to connect ETHC line to TRBD1191 line module.

2. to set the specific CONF_MODE parameter to AddDrop_Manual.

3. to manage channel connections via the VLAN Cross Connection Management

window.

ATTENTION:You cannot change the configuration mode from AddDrop_Manual to

Concentrator_Auto without de-provisioning the board.

See Also

• Table 9-15, “ETHC Configuration Mode Parameters Table” (p. 9-58)

• “Configuring ETHCWorking Mode” (p. 9-74)


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



About TRBD1191 Board

TRBD1191 Basic Concept

ATRBD1191 board is an interface between WDM network and User-Client networks.

User-Client channels are processed through an XFP connection module which is called

User-Client XFP.

Channels to WDM network are transported via TRBD1191 line through a connection

matrix.

Figure 9-5, “TRBD1191 Basic Concept” (p. 9-11) illustrates TRBD1191 basic concepts.

TRBD1191 Cross Connections

To connect User-Client channels to line module, you must establish a cross connection

between port#1 - OCH and port#101 - ODU2.

To know how to create a cross connection, refer to “Creating Cross Connections”

(p. 12-10).

Figure 9-5 TRBD1191 Basic Concept

Board and SFP/XFP Module Management About Board Provisioning and ConfigurationAbout TRBD1191 Board

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



9-11

Declaring/Undeclaring Boards

Overview

Purpose

This topic describes all the required procedures and parameters to declare or undeclare

1626 LM boards.

Contents

TRBx and Mux/Demux Models and Features 9-13

Declaring OCPU Protection Boards 9-19

Declaring Control and Service Boards 9-20

Declaring TRBD Boards 9-22

Declaring TRBC boards 9-26

Declaring OSCU Supervision Boards 9-29

Declaring BMDX Boards 9-31

Declaring OMDX Boards 9-33

Declaring CMDX Boards 9-35

Declaring the ALCT (Automatic Level Control) Board 9-36

Declaring LOFA11xx Amplifier Boards 9-38

Declaring BOFAAmplifier Boards 9-40

Declaring Ethernet Boards 9-42

Declaring TDMX 1180 boards 9-44

Declaring OADC boards 9-46

Declaring WMA�1100 Boards 9-47

Declaring WMA� 3x74 Boards 9-49

Undeclaring/Removing Boards 9-51

Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Declaring/Undeclaring BoardsOverview

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



TRBx and Mux/Demux Models and Features

The following tables give an overview of the main characteristics of transponder and

Mux/Demux boards.

Table 9-1 Transponder Models and Features

Transponder Models Features

TRBD4612• 40 Gbps rate, P-DPSK

• 50 GHz grid

• 3 slots wide

• U�I/G.709 compliant

• STM-256/OC-768 User-Client

• Fully tunable over 80 channels of C band

• Less than 83 W power consumption

• 1+1 OS�CP protection

• Embedded TDCM

• PMDC to enhance performances w/ poor PMD

fibers. Implemented as an external board.

• Compliant with mux/demux CMDX1012 (8

channels, 50 GHz)

TRBD4412• 40 Gbps rate, DPSK

• 100 GHz grid

• 3 slots wide


• STM-256/OC-768 User-Client




• Embedded TDCM




channels, 100 GHz)

Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Declaring/Undeclaring BoardsTRBx and Mux/Demux Models and Features

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



9-13

Table 9-1 Transponder Models and Features (continued)


TRBD1191 TRBD1191 general characteristics:

• 10 Gbps rate, �RZ

• I-64.1/S-64.2b/10GBASE S/P1L1-2D2 User

Interface

• 50 GHz grid

• 1 slot wide

• G.709 compliant

• STM-64/OC-192 CBR at 9,95 Gbps/OTU2/10 GbE

WA�/ 10 GbE LA� User-Client

• Fully tunable over 96 channels of C+ band




channels, 50 GHz)

Specific MLSE characteristics:

• 50 GHz grid / Frequency range from 191.700 THz to

196.000 THz

• Up to 46 W power consumption (Maximum number

of units per shelf: 14)

• High PMD tolerance

TRBD1131• 10 Gbps rate, �RZ

• LR User Interface

• 50 GHz grid

• 1 slot wide

• G.709 compliant

• 10 GbE LA� User-Client





channels, 50 GHz)


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Table 9-1 Transponder Models and Features (continued)



• S-64.2b User Interface

• 50 GHz grid

• 1 slot wide

• G.709 compliant


WA� User-Client





channels, 50 GHz)


• I-64.1 User Interface

• 50 GHz grid

• 1 slot wide

• G.709 compliant


WA� User-Client





channels, 50 GHz)


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



9-15

Table 9-2 Concentrator Models and Features

Concentrator Models Features

TRBC4612• 40 Gbps rate WDM side, P-DPSK

• 4x10 Gbps rate User-Client side, XFP pluggable

mode

• 50 GHz grid

• 3 slots wide


• STM-64/OC-192 CBR at 9,95 Gbps/10GbE LA�

User-Client



• Embedded TDCM




channels, 50 GHz)

TRBC4412• 40 Gbps rate WDM side, DPSK

• 4x10 Gbps rate User-Client side, XFP pluggable

mode

• 50 GHz grid

• 3 slots wide


• STM-64/OC-192 CBR at 9,95 Gbps/10GbE LA�

User-Client



• Embedded TDCM




channels, 50 GHz)


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Table 9-2 Concentrator Models and Features (continued)

Concentrator Models Features

TRBC1111• 10 Gbps rate WDM side, �RZ

• 4x2.5 Gbps User-Client side, SFP Pluggable

• I-16/S-16.1/L-16.1/L-16.2/Generic SFP User

Interface

• 50 GHz grid

• 1 slot wide

• G.709 compliant

• STM-16/OC-48 CBR at 2.48 Gbps User-Client





channels, 50 GHz)

Table 9-3 Mux/Demux Models and Features

Mux/Demux Models Features

OMDX 4100 4 channels in C band, 100 GHz grid

OMDX 8100 8 channels in L1, L2, S1 or S2 band, 100 GHz grid

OMDX 8100_L1_X 8 channels in L1 band, 100 GHz grid, expansion

capacity

CMDX 1010 8 channels in C+ band, 50 GHz grid

CMDX 1012 8 channels in C band, 50 GHz grid

CMDX 1052 4 channels in C band, 100 GHz grid

BMDX 1100 12 bands of 7 channels in C+ band, 50 GHz grid

BMDX 1000 12 bands of 8 channels in C+ band, 50 GHz grid

Table 9-4 OMDX Specificities

OMDX Models Band Id Multiplexed Frequency Range (GHz) 100

GHz Grid

OMDX 8100 L2 192000 to 192800 (exception: 192400)

L1 193000 to 193800 (exception: 193400)

S2 194200 to 195000 (exception: 194600)

S1 195200 to 196000 (exception: 195600)


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



9-17

Table 9-4 OMDX Specificities (continued)

OMDX Models Band Id Multiplexed Frequency Range (GHz) 100

GHz Grid

OMDX 4100 20-23 192000 to 192300

25-28 192500 to 192800

30-33 193000 to 193300

35-38 193500 to 193800

42-45 194200 to 194500

47-50 194700 to 195000

52-55 195200 to 195500

57-60 195700 to 196000


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Declaring OCPU Protection Boards

Purpose

Use this procedure to declare OCPU protection boards.

Before you begin

• You know the slot dedicated to OCPU board.

• You know the TRBx to be protected by the OCPU board.

• Subrack View window is displayed.

How to declare OCPU protection board

To declare OCPU protection boards, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Click on a subrack.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Click on an empty slot between slot#11 and slot#18.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 In case of pre provisioning, untick Actual Equipment only.

Result:The list of all board types appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 In the Allowed Equipment Types area, click on the relevant board type.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click OK.

Result:The OCPU board appears in the subrack view with operational state In

service (Red padlock).

Post-Declaration Task

To activate the protection, you must perform cabling declaration between the OCPU

board and the two TRBx to protect.

Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Declaring/Undeclaring BoardsDeclaring OCPU Protection Boards

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



9-19

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Declaring Control and Service Boards

Purpose

Use this procedure to declare the following boards:

• ESCT 2000,

• ESCT 1000,

• PSUP 1000,

• RAIU 1000,

• FA�S 1000,

• USIB 1000.

Good to Know

If the board isa ...

Then, board name is ... And possiblesubrack slot#are ...

Control board ESCT 2000

For the current release, ESCT 2000 is mandatory in a

master shelf and may be installed in secondary shelves.

1

ESCT 1000

This board can be installed in secondary shelves only,

with specific engineering rules.

ESCT 1000 is prohibited as soon as WMA�, TDMX and

ETHC boards are implemented.

1

Power Supply

board

PSUP 1000 21 and 40

Rack Alarm

board

RAIU 1000 22 and 39

Fan board FANS 1000 41

User Interface

board

USIB 1000 From 23 to 38

Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Declaring/Undeclaring BoardsDeclaring Control and Service Boards

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Before you begin

Subrack View window is displayed.

How to declare Control and Service boards

To declare control and service boards, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Click on an empty slot.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Click OK.

Result:The board appears in the subrack view with operational state In Service (Red

padlock).

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Declaring/Undeclaring BoardsDeclaring Control and Service Boards

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



9-21

Declaring TRBD Boards

Purpose

Use this procedure to declare TRBD boards.

Before you begin

• In case of protection mechanisms:

– You know the slot and the associated role of the TRBD (main or spare).

– You know the slot of the OCPU in charge of protection management.


CAUTION: At board plugging, you must check that Rx input power at User-Client

and WDM side does not exceed the maximum acceptable values. This measure is

relevant ONLY IF the related channel is present. This check is mandatory to

prevent any damage for the WDM receiver.

The following tables indicate the maximum acceptable input power per TRBD board.

Table 9-5 TRBD4xxx Maximum Acceptable Input Power

TRBD4xxx Maximum Acceptable Input Power

User-Client Side WDM Side

+3 dBm +5 dBm

Table 9-6 TRBD4312 Maximum Acceptable Input Power

TRBD4312 Maximum Acceptable Input Power

User-Client Side WDM Side

+3 dBm +5 dBm

Table 9-7 TRBD1x9z Maximum Acceptable Input Power

TRBD1x9z Maximum Acceptable Input Power

Interface Type User-Client Side WDM Side

I-64.1 +0.5 dBm Caution:

• For TRBD1191 MLSE: -6 dBm

• For other TRBD1x9z: Refer to

the value noticed on the front

panel sticker. If no sticker: +2

dBm

S-64.2b -1 dBm

10GBASE S -2 dBm

Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Declaring/Undeclaring BoardsDeclaring TRBD Boards

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Table 9-8 TRBD1xyz Maximum Acceptable Input Power

TRBD1xyz Maximum Acceptable Input Power


y=1

(VSR/I-64.1

module)

+0.5 dBm Refer to the value noticed on the

front panel sticker. If no sticker: +2

dBm

y=2 and 4

(S-64.2b

module)

-1 dBm

y=3

(10GBASE LR)

+0.5 dBm

How to declare TRBD boards

To declare TRBD boards, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 In the Allowed Equipment Types area, click on the relevant TRBD model.

Result:The Channel Configuration and Grid, Band and Interface Configuration

areas appear.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 In the Channel Configuration area, click on the relevant frequency.

Result:

• The selected frequency is displayed on the left.

• In the Grid, Band and Interface Configuration area, the associated grid and

network interface are displayed.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



9-23

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 For TRBD1xyz, select the relevant interface:

• UNI: for a User to �etwork Interface.

• NNI: for a �etwork to �etwork Interface.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 In the State of the Line area, select the required Line State.

Line State to On enables the optical interface (Emission/Reception).

Line State to Off disables the optical interface (Emission/Reception).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Click OK.

Result:The TRBD board appears in the subrack view with operational state In

Service (Red padlock).

Good to know

• ARUP alarm may appear during approximately 1 minute.

• Line State management have the following consequences:

If Line State is set to ... Then ...

ON – Force LOSS parameters is set to

Un-Activated.

– APSD Control is set to Disable.

The reception interface and the laser are enabled.

To change these parameter values refer to:

– “Configuring TRBx Transmission

Parameters” (p. 9-82),

– “Controlling TRBx, ETHC and 2*GE_FC

Boards Laser” (p. 9-111).

OFF – Force LOSS parameters is set to Activated.

– APSD Control is set to Laser Forced Off.

The reception interface and the laser are disabled.






Post-Declaration Tasks

1. If necessary, set the specific parameters.

2. Set the connectors and cabling in service.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

For 40 Gbps transponders, you can set the WDM line connector in service only

if:

a. WDMModule output connector is in service.

b. VOA input connector is in service.

c. Cabling between WDMModule output connector and VOA input or BOFA input

is declared.


�ote: Any action on Tributary connections at physical or configuration level,

requires SPLM synchronization.

See Also

• Table 9-12, “TRBx Transmission Parameters Table” (p. 9-55)

• Table 9-24, “TRBx Shutdown Criteria Table” (p. 9-64)

• “Laser Power Configuration Parameters” (p. 9-62)

• Chapter 13, “Connector and Cabling Management”,

• “Configuring TRBx Transmission Parameters” (p. 9-82)


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



9-25

Declaring TRBC boards

Purpose

Use this procedure to declare TRBC boards.

Before you begin

• In case of protection mechanisms:

– You know the slot and the associated role of the TRBC (main or spare).

– You know the slot of the OCPU in charge of protection management.


CAUTION At board plugging, you must check that Rx input power at User-Client

and WDM side does not exceed the maximum acceptable values. This measure is

relevant ONLY IF the related channel is present. This check is mandatory to

prevent any damage for the WDM receiver.

Table 9-9 TRBC4xxx Maximum Acceptable Input Power

TRBC4xxx Maximum Acceptable Input Power


10GBEWA�

SW

0 dBm +5 dBm

10GBE LA� SR 0 dBm

P1L1-2D2 -7 dBm

How to declare TRBC boards

To declare TRBC boards, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................


Result: Set Equipment window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 In the Allowed Equipment Types area, click on the relevant TRBC model.

Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Declaring/Undeclaring BoardsDeclaring TRBC boards

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




areas appear.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


Result:The selected frequency is displayed on the left.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 In the Grid, Band and Interface Configuration area, the relevant interface type for each

User /Client port is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 In the State of the Line area, select the required Line State.

Line State to On enables the optical interface (Emission/Reception).

Line State to Off disables the optical interface (Emission/Reception).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Click OK.

Result:The TRBC board appears in the subrack view with operational state In


Good to know

• ARUP alarm may appear during approximately 1 minute.

• Line State management have the following consequences:


ON – Force LOSS parameters is set to

Un-Activated.

– APSD Control is set to Disable.

The reception interface and the laser are enabled.







...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



9-27

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................


OFF – Force LOSS parameters is set to Activated.

– APSD Control is set to Laser Forced Off.

The reception interface and the laser are disabled.









For 40 Gbps transponders, you can set the WDM line connector in service only

if:

a. WDMModule output connector is in service.

b. VOA input connector is in service.

c. Cabling between WDMModule output connector and VOA input or BOFA input

is declared.


�ote: Any action on Tributary connections at physical or configuration level,

requires SPLM synchronization.

See Also

• “Board Specific Configuration Parameters” (p. 9-55)

• Table 9-24, “TRBx Shutdown Criteria Table” (p. 9-64)

• “Declaring a SFP/XFPModule” (p. 9-101)

• “Setting a SFP/XFPModule In Service” (p. 9-102)

• Chapter 13, “Connector and Cabling Management”,

• “Configuring TRBx Transmission Parameters” (p. 9-82)


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Declaring OSCU Supervision Boards

Purpose

Use this procedure to declare OSCU supervision boards.

Before you begin


How to declare OSCU supervision boards

To declare OSCU supervision boards, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 In the Allowed Equipment Types window, click on the relevant board type.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 In Type of Line area, select the relevant entry:

• REPEATER

This option triggers the following:

– OSCU clock is set to Receive Signal Clock.

– For LAPD configuration, only D1-D3 bytes are enabled.

• OTHERS:

This option triggers the following:

– OSCU clock is set to Local Clock.

– Full LAPD configuration is enabled.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click OK.

Result:The OSCU board appears in the subrack view with operational state In


Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Declaring/Undeclaring BoardsDeclaring OSCU Supervision Boards

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



9-29

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

See Also

“Board Specific Configuration Parameters” (p. 9-55)

Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Declaring/Undeclaring BoardsDeclaring OSCU Supervision Boards

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Declaring BMDX Boards

Purpose

Use this procedure to declare BMDX boards.

Before you begin


How to declare BMDX boards

To declare BMDX boards, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Click on a subrack.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 The Set Equipment window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Click OK.

Result:The BMDX board appears in the subrack view with operational state In





Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Declaring/Undeclaring BoardsDeclaring BMDX Boards

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



9-31

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

See Also

• “TRBx and Mux/Demux Models and Features” (p. 9-13)


Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Declaring/Undeclaring BoardsDeclaring BMDX Boards

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Declaring OMDX Boards

Purpose

Use this procedure to declare OMDX boards.

Before you begin


How to declare OMDX boards

To declare OMDX boards, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Click on an empty slot.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 In the Channel Min&Max area, select the required frequency range.

�ote: This step does not apply for OMDX8100_L1_X.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click OK.

Result:The OMDX board appears in the subrack view with operational state In





Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Declaring/Undeclaring BoardsDeclaring OMDX Boards

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



9-33

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

See Also


• Table 9-4, “OMDX Specificities” (p. 9-17)


Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Declaring/Undeclaring BoardsDeclaring OMDX Boards

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Declaring CMDX Boards

Purpose

Use this procedure to declare CMDX boards.

Before you begin


How to declare CMDX boards

To declare CMDX boards, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 In the Grid, Band and Interface Configuration area, select the required band.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click OK.

Result:The CMDX board appears in the subrack view with operational state In





See Also



Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Declaring/Undeclaring BoardsDeclaring CMDX Boards

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



9-35

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Declaring the ALCT (Automatic Level Control) Board

Purpose

Use this procedure to declare the ALCT (Automatic Level Control) Board.

Before you begin


• You must declare the associated BMDX board before the ALCT board.

How to declare the ALCT (Automatic Level Control) board

To declare an ALCT board, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 In the Allowed Equipment Types area, click on the relevant ALCT model.


areas appear.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


Result:

• The selected frequency is displayed on the left.

• In the Channel Configuration area, the following is displayed:

– Grid: 400 GHz

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Select the frequency corresponding to the supported wavelength.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Click OK.

Result:The ALCT board appears in the subrack view with operational state In


Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Declaring/Undeclaring BoardsDeclaring the ALCT (Automatic Level Control) Board

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................




See Also


• “Laser Power Configuration Parameters” (p. 9-62)


Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Declaring/Undeclaring BoardsDeclaring the ALCT (Automatic Level Control) Board

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



9-37

Declaring LOFA11xx Amplifier Boards

Purpose

Use this procedure to declare LOFA11xx amplifiers.

Good to Know

• By default, LOFA11xx boards are declared as a bidirectional amplifiers:

– Stage 1 input and stage 2 output act as a bidirectional OTS port,

– Stage 2 input and stage 1 output act as a bidirectional OTS port.

• An unidirectional amplifier is a LOFA11xx board for which the first stage output has

been cabled with the second stage input.

• LOFA11x0 inter-stage cabling is mandatory because it can be unidirectional only.

• To use two unidirectional LOFA11xx boards as a bidirectional amplifier device, you

must set the contradirectionality between the two boards.

• Contradirectionality is a specific Alcatel-Lucent concept. This concept designates a

link between two unidirectional amplifiers to build a bidirectional set.

4 LOFA11xx Repeater Configuration Special Case

For a repeater configuration which includes 4 LOFA11xx, you must carefully check that

the following is implemented:

• The inter-stage cabling has been configured for each LOFA11xx.

• The cabling has been configured as described in Figure 9-6, “4 LOFA11xx Repeater

Configuration” (p. 9-38).

• Contradirectionality is configured between Amplifier 1 and Amplifier 4,

• Contradirectionality is configured between Amplifier 2 and Amplifier 3

Before you begin


Figure 9-6 4 LOFA11xx Repeater Configuration

Contradir

Ampli 1

Ampli4

Ampli 2

Ampli 3

Contradir Contradir

Ampli 1Ampli 1

Ampli4

Ampli 2Ampli 2

Ampli 3Ampli 3

Contradir

Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Declaring/Undeclaring BoardsDeclaring LOFA11xx Amplifier Boards

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



How to declare Amplifier boards

To declare amplifier boards, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Click OK.

Result:The LOFA11xx board appears in the subrack view with operational state In



1. If necessary, set the contradirectionality and power tuning parameters.



See Also

• Table 9-11, “Contradirectionality Parameters table” (p. 9-54)

• “LOFA11xx Power Tuning Parameters” (p. 9-65)


Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Declaring/Undeclaring BoardsDeclaring LOFA11xx Amplifier Boards

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



9-39

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Declaring BOFA Amplifier Boards

Purpose

Use this procedure to declare BOFA amplifiers.

Before you begin


How to declare BOFA amplifier boards

To declare BOFA amplifier boards, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Click OK.

Result:The BOFA board appears in the subrack view with operational state In

Service (Red padlock). According to the BOFA type, one or two gain blocks are set In

Service automatically.


1. According to the configuration, declare required TRBx, BMDX or CMDX boards.



See Also

• “Declaring TRBD Boards” (p. 9-22),

• “Declaring TRBC boards” (p. 9-26),

• “Declaring BMDX Boards” (p. 9-31),

Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Declaring/Undeclaring BoardsDeclaring BOFA Amplifier Boards

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

• “Declaring CMDX Boards” (p. 9-35),

• Chapter 13, “Connector and Cabling Management”.

Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Declaring/Undeclaring BoardsDeclaring BOFA Amplifier Boards

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



9-41

Declaring Ethernet Boards

Purpose

Use this procedure to declare Ethernet boards.

Before you begin


How to declare Ethernet boards

To declare Ethernet boards, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Click an empty slot between slot#3 and slot#18.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Click OK.

Result:The Ethernet board appears in the subrack view with operational state In


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click Close.



2. Declare SFP/XFP module(s),

3. Activate the connectors and cabling.


Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Declaring/Undeclaring BoardsDeclaring Ethernet Boards

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

See Also


• “Declaring a SFP/XFPModule” (p. 9-101)



Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Declaring/Undeclaring BoardsDeclaring Ethernet Boards

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



9-43

Declaring TDMX 1180 boards

Purpose

Use this procedure to declare TDMX 1180 boards.

Before you begin


• The TDMX 1180 board takes 4 consecutive slots. As a consequence, the selected

subrack must have enough consecutive empty slots to host a TDMX 1180 board.

How to declare TDMX 1180 boards

To declare TDMX 1180 boards, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Click OK.

Result:The TDMX 1180 board appears in the subrack view with operational state In


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click Close.


1. Configure the port profiles (Specific parameters configuration),

2. Configure the port signal transmission,

3. Activate the connectors and cabling,


Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Declaring/Undeclaring BoardsDeclaring TDMX 1180 boards

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

See Also

• “Board Specific Configuration Parameters” (p. 9-55),

• “TDMX and WMA� Configuration Parameters” (p. 9-69),

• Chapter 13, “Connector and Cabling Management”.

Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Declaring/Undeclaring BoardsDeclaring TDMX 1180 boards

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



9-45

Declaring OADC boards

Purpose

Use this procedure to declare OADC boards.

Before you begin


How to declare OADC boards

To declare OADC boards, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Click OK.

Result:The OADC board appears in the subrack view with operational state In


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click Close.


�one.

Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Declaring/Undeclaring BoardsDeclaring OADC boards

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Declaring WMAN1100 Boards

Purpose

Use this procedure when you want to declare WMA�1100 boards.

Before you begin


• The WMA�1100 board takes 3 consecutive slots. As a consequence, the selected

subrack must have enough consecutive empty slots to host a WMA� 1100 board.

• WMA�1100 declaration requires to understand what Contradirectionality concept is.

Contradirectionality is a specific Alcatel-Lucent concept. This concept designates a

link between two unidirectional boards to build a bidirectional set.

How to declare WMAN 1100 boards

To declare WMA� 1100 boards, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 In the Allowed Equipment Types window, click on WMAN 1100.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


Result:The WMA� 1100 board appears in the subrack view with operational state In


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click Close.

Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Declaring/Undeclaring BoardsDeclaring WMAN1100 Boards

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



9-47

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................


If necessary:

1. Configure provisioning parameters.

2. Configure laser power

3. Activate the connectors and cabling

4. Configure contradirectionality

See Also


• “Configuring WMA� Laser Power” (p. 9-80)

• “Configuring Contradirectionality” (p. 9-86)

Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Declaring/Undeclaring BoardsDeclaring WMAN1100 Boards

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Declaring WMAN 3x74 Boards

Purpose

Use this procedure to declare WMA� 3x74 boards.

Before you begin


• The WMA� 3x74 board takes 4 consecutive slots. As a consequence, the selected

subrack must have enough consecutive empty slots to host a WMA� 3x74 board.

How to declare WMAN 31x74 boards

To declare WMA� 3x74 boards, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 In the Allowed Equipment Types window, click WMAN 3174 or WMAN 3374.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


Result:The WMA� 3x74 board appears in the subrack view with operational state In


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click Close.


If necessary:

1. Configure provisioning parameters.

2. Configure laser power

3. Activate the connectors and cabling

Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Declaring/Undeclaring BoardsDeclaring WMAN 3x74 Boards

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



9-49

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

See Also



Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Declaring/Undeclaring BoardsDeclaring WMAN 3x74 Boards

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Undeclaring/Removing Boards

Purpose

Use this procedure to undeclare boards.

Before you begin

• This procedure does not apply to SFP/XFP modules.

To know how to undeclare a SFP/XFP module, refer to the relevant section.


• Board operational status must be set to Out of Service.

• For TRBx boards, perform the following:

1. Remove loopbacks, then

2. Delete cable configuration, then

3. Stop performance monitoring.

• For BMDX boards, disconnect CMDX boards.

• For CMDX boards, disconnect TRBD boards.

• For OMDX boards, disconnect associated OMDX boards.

CAUTIO�: Do not unplug a board during a firmware download (Hardware failure LED

in yellow). Otherwise the board will not restart and you will have to return it for

manufacturer repair.

Good to Know

For 40 Gbps transponder, you must follow the required sequence:

1. Set the User/Client and WDM line connectors out of service.

2. Delete the cabling between WDMModule output connector and VOA Input

connector.

To know how to delete the cabling between two connectors refer to “Deleting the

Cabling between 2 Connectors” (p. 13-5)

3. Set the VOA Input connector out of service.

4. Set the WDM module output connector out of service.

How to undeclare/remove boards

To undeclare/remove boards, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select the board.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................


Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Declaring/Undeclaring BoardsUndeclaring/Removing Boards

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



9-51

Result:The board disappears from the subrack view.

An UEP (Unconfigured Equipment Present) is raised if the board is still plugged intothe slot.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Declaring/Undeclaring BoardsUndeclaring/Removing Boards

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Board Configuration Parameters

Overview

Purpose

This topic describes the required parameters and procedures to manage board

configuration.

Contents

Board Generic Configuration Parameters 9-53

Board Specific Configuration Parameters 9-55

Laser Power Configuration Parameters 9-62

TRBx Shutdown Criteria 9-64

LOFA11xx Power Tuning Parameters 9-65

LOFA11xx APSD Parameters 9-68

TDMX and WMA� Configuration Parameters 9-69

Board Generic Configuration Parameters

Generic configuration parameters are associated to the following boards:

• CMDX boards

CMDX generic configuration parameter is about the band associated to a CMDX

board.

• LOFA11xx and WMAN1100 boards

LOFA and WMA�1100 generic configuration parameters are about

contradirectionality.

Contradirectionality is a specific Alcatel-Lucent concept.

This concept designates a link between two unidirectional boards to build a

bidirectional set.

An amplifier is unidirectional when the interstage cable links the first stage output to

the second stage input.

Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Board Configuration ParametersOverview

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



9-53

The following tables describe CMDX, LOFA11xx and WMA�1100 boards generic

configuration parameters:

• Table 9-10, “CMDX Band Parameter Table” (p. 9-54) is dedicated to CMDX band

parameter,

• Table 9-11, “Contradirectionality Parameters table” (p. 9-54) is dedicated to

contradirectionality parameters.

Table 9-10 CMDX Band Parameter Table

Parameters Description Possible Values

Band The BMDX band# to which the

CMDX board is connected.

1 to 12

See Also

“Configuring the BMDX Band associated to a CMDX Board” (p. 9-87)

Table 9-11 Contradirectionality Parameters table


RRSBBP Contradirectional

Rack Indicates the rack number which

hosts the related subrack.

Rack#,Subrack#andslot#

of the related board.

Subrack Indicates the subrack number which

hosts the board.

Slot Indicates the slot number where the

board is plugged.

Enter Contradir Enables the Rack, Subrack and Slot

fields.

On/Off

Remove Contradir Disables the Rack, Subrack and Slot

fields.

See Also

• “Declaring LOFA11xx Amplifier Boards” (p. 9-38)

• “Declaring WMA�1100 Boards” (p. 9-47)

• “Configuring Contradirectionality” (p. 9-86)

Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Board Configuration ParametersBoard Generic Configuration Parameters

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Board Specific Configuration Parameters

Specific configuration parameters are associated to the following boards:

• TRBx boards. Table 9-12, “TRBx Transmission Parameters Table” (p. 9-55) is

dedicated to TRBx transmission parameters.

• LOFAx boards. Table 9-13, “LOFA Safety Cover Parameter Table” (p. 9-57) is

dedicated to

• ALCT boards. Table 9-14, “ALCT Stimulated Brillouin Scattering Parameter Table”

(p. 9-58) is dedicated to ALCT Stimulated Brillouin Scattering parameters.

• ETHC boards. Table 9-15, “ETHC Configuration Mode Parameters Table” (p. 9-58) is

dedicated to ETHC configuration mode parameters.

• 2*GE_FC boards. Table 9-16, “2*GE_FC Signal Type Transportation Parameters

Table” (p. 9-59) is dedicated to 2*GE_FC signal type transportation parameters.

• TDMX 1180 boards. Table 9-17, “TDMX 1180 Port Profile Parameters Table”

(p. 9-59) is dedicated to TDMX 1180 port profile parameters.

• WMAN 1100 boards. Table 9-18, “WMA� 1100 Provisioning Parameters Table”

(p. 9-59) is dedicated to WMA� 1100 provisioning parameters.

• WMAN 3x74 boards. Table 9-19, “WMA� 3x74 Provisioning Parameters Table”

(p. 9-60) is dedicated to WMA� 3x74 provisioning parameters.

• OSCU boards. Table 9-20, “OSCU Channel Supervision Synchronization Parameter

Table” (p. 9-62) is dedicated to OSCU supervision synchronization parameters.

Depending on TRBx models, some of the following parameters may not apply.

Table 9-12 TRBx Transmission Parameters Table


UDC_CONFIG Configuration of a User Data

Channel.

A 2.048 kbps link may be plugged

into the User Data Channel faceplate

connection.

Not used

The configuration plans

that no link is plugged

into the User Data

Channel faceplate

connection.

Add/drop to front panel

The configuration plans

that a link is plugged into

the User Data Channel

faceplate connection.

Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Board Configuration ParametersBoard Specific Configuration Parameters

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



9-55

Table 9-12 TRBx Transmission Parameters Table (continued)


RPO_MODE Receiver Parameter Optimization

Mode.

An optimization mechanism enables

to clearly determine if the optical

signal corresponds to digital value 0

or 1.

Automatic

The optimization

mechanism is based on

the FEC (Forward Error

Correction).

Factory

The optimization

mechanism is based on

the standard manufacturer

mechanism.

SBS_SUPPR Suppression of Stimulated Brillouin

Scattering.

Amechanism to compensate for

vibrations inside the fiber.

This parameter does not apply for

TRBD4xxx boards.

Enabled

The suppression

mechanism is enabled.

Disabled

The suppression

mechanism is disabled.

Force_LOSS Amechanism to force a TRBx to

send a LOSS indication to the remote

network element.

When Force_LOSS is Activated, the

receiver interface is disabled

Activated

The mechanism is

activated.

Un-activated

The mechanism is

deactivated.

TDCM_Mode Tunable Dispersion Compensator

Module Mode

automatic

Chromatic dispersion

tuning is performed

automatically.

manual

Chromatic dispersion

tuning must be done

manually via

Board>Optical Power

level Configuration

menu.

Signal_TYPE Indicates the type of client signal. CBR10G

10 Gigabit SH, Constant

Bit Rate

10GBLAN

10 Gigabit Ethernet LA�


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



See Also

“Configuring TRBx Transmission Parameters” (p. 9-82)

Good to Know

Depending on the value you assigned to Line State at TRBx declaration, you may need to

take an action on TRBx transmission parameters:

If you have set Line State to ... and you want to ...

ON disable the optical interface emission and reception, then

you must set:

• Force LOSS to Activated,

• APSD Control to Laser Forced Off.

Refer to: “Controlling TRBx, ETHC and 2*GE_FC

Boards Laser” (p. 9-111)

OFF enable the optical interface, then you must set Force

LOSS to Un-Activated.

Table 9-13 LOFA Safety Cover Parameter Table


COVER_DISABLE Drives the LOFA shutdown delay

depending on the assigned value.

Cover_Enable

The laser is shutdown

immediately and the

traffic is interrupted.

Cover_Disable

The laser is shutdown

after 5 minutes delay.

• This delay lets you

remove the cover

without traffic

interruption.

• During these 5

minutes, you can

perform tasks that

require the cover to be

removed.

ATTENTION: If after the 5

minutes delay, the safety

cover is not replaced,

LOFA laser is shutdown.

See Also

“Managing LOFAUpgrade with EMPM1000” (p. 9-121)


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



9-57

Table 9-14 ALCT Stimulated Brillouin Scattering Parameter Table


SBS_SUPPR Suppression of Stimulated Brillouin

Scattering.

Amechanism to compensate for

vibrations inside the fiber.

Enabled

The suppression

mechanism is enabled.

Disabled

The suppression

mechanism is disabled.

See Also

“Configuring ALCT Stimulated Brillouin Scattering Mechanism” (p. 9-90)

Each of these parameters may have a Reference Point value.

A Reference Point is a label for display only, which value informs about the location

where the related parameter applies in the board.

Table 9-15 ETHC Configuration Mode Parameters Table


CONF_MODE Enables the ETHC to work in

concentration or Add & Drop mode.

Concentrator_Auto

Default value

Only L13 optical line is

enabled.

AddDrop_Manual

Enables L13 and L14

optical lines.

ATTENTION:You cannot

change the configuration

mode from

AddDrop_Manual to

Concentrator_Auto.

Concentrator_Manual

�ot used in the current

configuration.

See Also

“Configuring ETHCWorking Mode” (p. 9-74)


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Table 9-16 2*GE_FC Signal Type Transportation Parameters Table


Signal_Type Indicates the type of signal

transported by the Ethernet medium.

The selected value applies to both

client lines.

1GBE LAN

1 Gigabit Ethernet LA�

FIBER CHANNEL

Fiber Channel

See Also

“Configuring 2xGBE_FC Board Signal Type Transportation” (p. 9-77)

Table 9-17 TDMX 1180 Port Profile Parameters Table


Power Tolerance (dB) Determines the maximum variation

between actual and target power the

system tolerates without raising a

Performance Degraded (PD) alarm.

Beyond this tolerance, PD alarm is

raised.

1 to +3 dB

Default: 2 dB

Blocking Level The maximum power value which

determines a channel blocking.

-50 to -30 dBm

See Also

“Configuring TDMX 1180 Port Profile” (p. 9-91)

Table 9-18 WMAN 1100 Provisioning Parameters Table


Background Control

Process

Background control process of the

output power. When enabled, it is one

of the parameters which determines if

the output power is kept.

• Enabled

• Disabled

Correction Process Attenuation correction process.

When enabled, adjusts the attenuation

when discrepancies exist between

requested and measured attenuation

values.

• Enabled

• Disabled

Board Output According to the selected value,

determines if the board provides

optical output or not.

• No optical output

• Optical output


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



9-59

Table 9-18 WMAN 1100 Provisioning Parameters Table (continued)


Blocking Threshold The value which determines when a

channel is blocked.

+30 to +40 dBm, 1 dB

step.

Default: +40 dBm.






raised.

1 to +3 dB

Default: 2 dB

Control Period Periodicity of background control

process execution.

+30 to +600 sec, 10 sec

step.

Default: 60 sec.

Input Channel Threshold The minimum power value to

consider that there is a channel at the

input port.

-26 to 0 dBm, 1 dB step.

Default: -22 dBm.

PGE Commissioning Enables to determine a flat spectrum

at WMA� 1100 commissioning

phase.

Attention: Refer to “Configuring

WMA� 1100 Equalization

Parameter” (p. 9-94) to understand

how to manage this parameter.

• Off

The equalization

process is not active.

• Even

The equalization

process is enabled for

even channels.

• Odd

The equalization

process is enabled for

odd channels.

Context of the NE Qualifies the configuration of the �E

where WMA� board is plugged.• OADM

• REPEATER

See Also

• “Configuring WMA� Provisioning Parameters” (p. 9-93)

• “Configuring WMA� 1100 Equalization Parameter” (p. 9-94)

Table 9-19 WMAN 3x74 Provisioning Parameters Table


Background Control

Process

Background control process of the

output power. When enabled, it is one

of the parameters which determines if

the output power is kept.

• Enabled

• Disabled


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Table 9-19 WMAN 3x74 Provisioning Parameters Table (continued)


Correction Process Attenuation correction process.

When enabled, adjusts the attenuation

when discrepancies exist between

requested and measured attenuation

values.

• Enabled

• Disabled

Board Output According to the selected value,

determines if the board provides

optical output or not.

No optical output






raised.

1 to +3 dB

Default: 2 dB

Control Period(s) Periodicity of background control

process execution.

+30 to +600 sec, 10 sec

step.

Default: 60 sec.

Blocking Level (dBm) The maximum power value which

determines a channel blocking.

-30 to -50 dBm, 1 dB

step.

Default: -30 dBm.

Express Port 1

Express Port 2

Express Port 3

According to the selected Express

port, determines if VOA is activated

or not.

• No Optical Output

The VOA is at

maximum attenuation.

• Optical Output

The VOA is activated.

Control / Correction

Type

The flag which determines:

• if the channel power is kept at the

output of the Wavelength

Selective Switch,

• if the channel attenuation is kept

in the Wavelength Selective

Switch.

• Power

• Attenuation

Default: Power.

Context of the NE Qualifies the configuration of the �E

where WMA� board is plugged.• OADM

• REPEATER

See Also

“Configuring WMA� Provisioning Parameters” (p. 9-93)


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



9-61

Table 9-20 OSCU Channel Supervision Synchronization Parameter Table


OSC Clock

Synchronization

OSCU board supports channel

supervision. When several nodes

have OCSU boards, you need to

decide which OSCU board will be the

reference and which OSCU board

will have to synchronize with the

reference one.

• Local Clock

This value defines the

reference OSCU

board for

synchronization.

• Receive Signal Clock

This value defines the

OSCU board which

synchronizes with the

reference board.

See Also

“Declaring OSCU Supervision Boards” (p. 9-29)

Laser Power Configuration Parameters

Table 9-21, “TRBx/ALCT Laser Output Power Configuration Parameter Table” (p. 9-62)

describes the laser output power level configuration which applies to TRBx or ALCT

boards.

Table 9-21 TRBx/ALCT Laser Output Power Configuration Parameter Table


Pre-Emphasis Assigns the laser output power value

for the selected TRBx or ALCT

channel.

• For 10 Gbps

transponders and

concentrators:

-24 to +1 dBm

• For 40 Gbps

transponders and

concentrators without

BOFA:

-15 to +1 dBm

• For 40 Gbps

transponders and

concentrators with

BOFA:

-15 to +9,5 dBm

For ALCT board:

-14 to +11 dBm


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Table 9-21 TRBx/ALCT Laser Output Power Configuration Parameter Table

(continued)


Chromatic Dispersion Enables to tune manually the value of

the chromatic dispersion

compensation module.

• For TRBD44xx:

-400 to 400 ps/nm,

10 ps/nm step

• For TRBD46xx:

-500 to 500 ps/nm,

10 ps/nm step

See Also

• “Configuring TRBx or ALCT Laser Output Power” (p. 9-78)

• Table 9-22, “WMA� 1100 Laser Output Power Configuration Parameters Table”

(p. 9-63) describes the laser output power level configuration which applies to

WMA� 1100 boards.

Table 9-22 WMAN 1100 Laser Output Power Configuration Parameters Table


Attenuation - Line

Output

Offset attenuation applied at the

board output.

The assigned value includes the offset

attenuation defined in the previous

parameter.

1.5 to 11.5 dB,

Default: 1.5 dB

Attenuation - Channel Attenuation applied to the selected

channel.

8.7 to 30.7 dB, 0.1 dB

step

Default: 20.7 dB

See Also


• Table 9-23, “WMA� 3174 Laser Power Configuration Parameters Table” (p. 9-63)

describes the laser power level configuration which applies to WMA� 3174 boards.

Table 9-23 WMAN 3174 Laser Power Configuration Parameters Table


Attenuation -

Wavelength Selective

Switch Input

Offset attenuation applied to any

channel going through the given

Express port.

1 to 11 dB, 0.1 dB step

Optical Power Level-

Channel

Power applied to the selected

channel.

-27 to +20 dBm, 0.1 dBm

step

Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Board Configuration ParametersLaser Power Configuration Parameters

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



9-63

See Also

“Configuring WMA� Laser Power” (p. 9-80)

TRBx Shutdown Criteria

Table 9-24, “TRBx Shutdown Criteria Table” (p. 9-64) describes TRBx shutdown criteria.

Table 9-24 TRBx Shutdown Criteria Table


Incoming Alarms A group of specific WDM incoming

alarms that can be raised from the

transmission blocks of TRBC/TRBD

boards.

For each group of alarms corresponds

a set of 3 associated actions.

Radio button: On

The associated Incoming

Alarms / Action is

selected.

By default the first group

is selected.

Radio button: Off

The associated Incoming

Alarms / Action is not

selected.

Action Indicates the resultant consequence

on the signal if one of the incoming

alarm is raised.

AIS

AIS (Alarm Indicator

Signal) is inserted toward

client/user side.

SHUTDOWN

If one of the

corresponding incoming

alarms is raised, the

client/user side laser is

shutdown.

TRANSPARENT

The signal flows without

any change.

See Also

“Configuring TRBx Shutdown Criteria” (p. 9-83)

Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Board Configuration ParametersLaser Power Configuration Parameters

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



LOFA11xx Power Tuning Parameters

2 families of parameters enable to manage a LOFA11xx board:

• APT: Amplifier Power Tuning

• VOA: Variable Optical Attenuation

APT Parameters

APT parameter family enables to tune the LOFA11xx laser power.

VOA Parameters

VOA parameter family enables to correct the optical signal deviation resulting from the

laser power increase or decrease.

LOFA11xx board tuning is driven by APT and VOAmodes.

• Table 9-25, “APT Modes Table” (p. 9-65) describes the different APT modes

• Table 9-26, “VOAModes Table” (p. 9-66) describes the different VOAmodes

• Table 9-27, “APT/VOA Parameters Table” (p. 9-67) describes the APT / VOA

parameters

Table 9-25 APT Modes Table

APT Modes Description

Manual 1rst stage output power (OP1) and 2nd stage output power (OP2) values are

entered manually.

In the Manual APT mode, other APT parameters are inactivated.

The Manual APT mode:

• is possible for all types of LOFA boards.

• is compatible with all VOAmodes for unidirectional LOFA board.

• is compatible with Manual VOAmode only for bidirectional LOFA

board.

Power The 2 following parameters are configured manually:

• 2nd stage output power (OP2)

• Limitation parameter of non linear effects (OP_Diff)

The configuration of these 2 parameters determines the value of 1rst stage

output power (OP1).

The Power APT mode:

• is possible for unidirectional LOFA board only.

• is compatible with all VOAmodes.

Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Board Configuration ParametersLOFA11xx Power Tuning Parameters

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



9-65

Table 9-25 APT Modes Table (continued)

APT Modes Description

Gain The 2 following parameters are configured manually:

• IT

The Effective IntersTage attenuation.

This parameter represents the attenuation between the location where

the channels are added and the 2nd stage input.

• EOL span

The Effective End Of Life span attenuation.

This parameter represents the attenuation between the upstream node

where the channels are added and the 1rst stage input.

In the Gain APT mode, other parameters are inactivated.

The Gain APT mode:

• is possible for all types of LOFA board.

• is compatible with Manual VOAmode only.

See Also

“Configuring LOFA11xx Laser Output Power” (p. 9-79)

Table 9-26 VOA Modes Table

VOA Modes Description

Manual Attenuation value (VOA) is entered manually.

In the Manual VOAmode, other VOA parameters are inactivated.

The Manual VOAmode:

• is possible for all types of LOFA board.

• is compatible with all APT mod

MSV In the Mid Stage VOA tuning, K_Diff is entered manually:

K_Diff is the difference between the theoretical ideal flatness constant (given

by the manufacturer) and the effective flatness constant.

In the MSV VOAmode, other VOA parameters are inactivated.

The MSV VOAmode:

• is possible for unidirectional LOFA board only.

• is compatible with Manual and Power APT modes.

See Also



...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Table 9-27 APT/VOA Parameters Table


APT Parameters Area

Mode APT tuning mode• Manual

• Power

• Gain

OP1 1rst stage Output Power +1 to +17.5 dBm,0.5 dB

step

Default: +1 dBm

OP2 2nd stage Output Power +2 to +17 dBm,0.5 dB

step

Default: +8 dBm

OP_Diff Limitation parameter of non linear

effects

-10.5 to +37 dB,0.25 dB

step

Default: +9 dB

IT The Effective IntersTage attenuation.

This parameter represents the

attenuation between the location

where the channels are added and the

2nd stage input.

0 to +47 dB,0.25 dB step

Default: 15 dB

VOA Parameters Area

Mode VOA tuning mode• Manual

• MSV

VOA Variable Output Attenuation• +1 to +15 dB,0.5 dB

step

• To compensate for

span degradation (line

ageing), it is

recommended to

assign VOA value

greater than 1 dB.

• For detailed

information, refer to

1626LM System

Turn-Up Guide

K_Diff The difference between the

theoretical ideal flatness constant

(given by the manufacturer) and the

effective flatness constant.

-14 to +14 dB,0.25 dB

step

Default: 0 dB

EOL Span Parameters Area


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



9-67

Table 9-27 APT/VOA Parameters Table (continued)


EOLspan The Effective End Of Life span

attenuation.

This parameter represents the

attenuation between the upstream

node where the channels are added

and the 1rst stage input.

10 to +62.5 dB,0.25 dB

step

Default: +14 dB

See Also


LOFA11xx APSD Parameters

APSD (Automatic Power ShutDown) is an optical safety mechanism which prevent

powerful light to be emitted in case of fiber brake.

APSD mechanism applies:

• to bidirectional amplifiers, or

• to 2 unidirectional amplifiers linked by a directionality contract.

When enabled, APSD mechanism is able:

1. to detect a loss of signal at amplifier stage 1 reception,

2. to stop the amplifier stage 2 emitting laser,

3. to restart amplifier laser automatically when the problem is solved.

Table 9-28, “APSD Parameters Table” (p. 9-68) describes APSD parameters.

Table 9-28 APSD Parameters Table


Laser Stage Identifies the amplifier laser stage• Laser Stage 01

• Laser Stage 02

Laser Current State Displays the current state of the

amplifier laser stages.

Off/On


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Table 9-28 APSD Parameters Table (continued)


APSD Displays the state of the ASPD

mechanism which has been

configured via ASPD configuration

list box of ASPD Configuration

window.

Enabled

ASPD mechanism is

enabled. In case of

problem at signal

reception, the

contradirectional emitting

laser is switched off.

Laser Forced Off

APSD mechanism is

disabled and the laser is

switched off.

APSD Control Enable the selection of possible

configuration for APSD mechanism.

Enabled

ASPD mechanism is

enabled. In case of

problem at signal

reception, the

contradirectional emitting

laser is switched off.

Laser Forced Off

APSD mechanism is

disabled and the laser is

switched off.

Laser Current State Displays the laser operational state. Laser Off/On

See Also

“Configuring LOFA11xx APSD” (p. 9-85)

TDMX and WMAN Configuration Parameters• For TDMX parameters, refer to “TDMX Port Configuration Parameters” (p. 9-69)

• For WMA� parameters, refer to “WMA�3x74 Channel Configuration Parameters”

(p. 9-70)

TDMX Port Configuration Parameters

TDMX boards have 8 ports.

For each port, you can set:

• the channel wavelength to be assigned to the selected port,

• the output power level.

Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Board Configuration ParametersLOFA11xx APSD Parameters

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



9-69

Table 9-29, “TDMX Port Configuration Parameters Table” (p. 9-70) describes the port

configuration parameters.

Table 9-29 TDMX Port Configuration Parameters Table


Port Number Indicates the port number to be

configured.

1 to 8

Channel Indicates the channel frequency to

drop.

This parameter is for display only.

• Blocked

The channel

frequency is not

transmitted to the

output of the TDMX

1180 board.

• One of the 96

possible channels

The channel

frequency to be

dropped toward

tributary boards.

Output Power Indicates the output power to be

assigned to the selected port.

-30 to 0 dBm,1 dB step

�ote: To know how to configure TDMX ports, refer to “Configuring TDMX 1180

Output Power” (p. 9-92).

WMAN3x74 Channel Configuration Parameters

�ote:WMA� 3x74 parameters can be set for each channel frequency.

However, you can propagate a set of parameter values at once, as follows:

If you want topropagate a set ofparameter values ...

Then, on the top first line of Channel Configurationwindow, you must ...

to some or all frequencies 1. Assign the values for each parameters.

2. Select the frequency to configure.

3. Click Apply.

4. End.

to all non configured

frequencies1. Assign the values for each parameters.

2. Click Apply.

3. End.

Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Board Configuration ParametersTDMX and WMAN Configuration Parameters

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Table 9-30 WMAN 3x74 Channel Configuration Parameters Table


Frequency The frequency of the wavelength handled

by the WMA� board.

One of the 96 possible channels

from 191150 GHz

Input The WMA� input port of the channel to be

transmitted to the WMA� output port.

WMA� input port can be:

• Express: the input port type handling

WDM channels coming from other

�E.

• Add: the input port type handling

WDM channels coming from Tributary

boards.

• 0

The channels are blocked. There

is no transmission to the output

port whatever the input port.

• IN 1

The channel frequency is

assigned to express input port

number 1.

• IN 2



number 2.

• IN 3



number 3.

• Add1

The channel frequency coming

from Tributary board is assigned

to add & drop input port number

1.

• Add2




2.

• Add3




3.

• Add4




4.

Default value: 0.

Power in dBm The power value to be applied between

input and output port for transmission

channel optimization.

From -27 to 20 dBm.

Default value: -27 dBm.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



9-71

Table 9-30 WMAN 3x74 Channel Configuration Parameters Table (continued)


Power Maintain This parameter makes part of a process

which guarantees the channel output power

if:

• Power Maintain is Enabled, A�D

• Background Control Process is

Enabled, A�D

• Correction Process is Enabled, A�D

• Control/Correction Type is set to

Power

• Enabled

• Disabled

Default value: Enabled.

�ote: To know how to configure WMA�3x74 channels, refer to “Configuring

Channels on WMA� 3x74 boards” (p. 9-95)


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Configuring Boards

Overview

Purpose

This topic describes board configuration procedures.

Contents

Configuring ETHCWorking Mode 9-74

Managing ETHC Cross Connections 9-75

Configuring 2xGBE_FC Board Signal Type Transportation 9-77

Configuring TRBx or ALCT Laser Output Power 9-78

Configuring LOFA11xx Laser Output Power 9-79

Configuring WMA� Laser Power 9-80

Configuring TRBx Frequency 9-81

Configuring TRBx Transmission Parameters 9-82

Configuring TRBx Shutdown Criteria 9-83

Configuring 40 Gbps TRBC Ethernet Mapping 9-84

Configuring LOFA11xx APSD 9-85

Configuring Contradirectionality 9-86

Configuring the BMDX Band associated to a CMDX Board 9-87

Configuring ALCTWorking Mode 9-88

Configuring ALCT Stimulated Brillouin Scattering Mechanism 9-90

Configuring TDMX 1180 Port Profile 9-91

Configuring TDMX 1180 Output Power 9-92

Configuring WMA� Provisioning Parameters 9-93

Configuring WMA� 1100 Equalization Parameter 9-94

Configuring Channels on WMA� 3x74 boards 9-95

Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Configuring BoardsOverview

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



9-73

Configuring ETHC Working Mode

Purpose

Use this procedure to configure ETHC working mode.

Before you begin

Board View window is displayed.

How to configure ETHC working mode

To configure ETHC working mode, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Board>Modify specific equipment configuration

Result:The Specific parameter configuration window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 For CONF_MODE parameter, select the relevant value from the following list:

• Concentrator_Auto

• AddDrop_Manual

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click OK.

See Also

• “About ETHC Configurations” (p. 9-5)

• Table 9-15, “ETHC Configuration Mode Parameters Table” (p. 9-58)

Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Configuring BoardsConfiguring ETHC Working Mode

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Managing ETHC Cross Connections

Purpose

Use this procedure when you want:

• to display ETHC cross connections

• to create ETHC cross connection in an Add & Drop context.

The VLAN Cross Connection Management Window

The VLAN Cross Connection Management window shows:

• vertically: the ports (1 to 9) for both L13 and L14 10 Gbps optical lines. The

User-Client channel numbers (51-59 and/or 100-999, depending on the ETHC

configuration mode) are displayed next to the port number.

• horizontally: the User-Client ports (1 to 12, depending on ETHC working mode)

which supports the User-Client channels. The User-Client channel numbers (51-59

and/or 100-999, depending on the ETHC configuration mode) are displayed next to

the port number.

When applicable a graphical link shows the cross connection between a User-Client

channel port and an ETHC line port. Each port number is associated with a channel

number.

Before you begin

• ETHC board view is displayed.

• To understand the content of this window , refer to “The VLA� Cross Connection

Management Window” (p. 9-75).

How to display ETHC cross connections

To display ETHC cross connections, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Board> Manage ETHC Cross Connections....

Result:The VLAN Cross Connection Management window is displayed.

If necessary, refer to “The VLA� Cross Connection Management Window” (p. 9-75)to understand the content of this window.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Click Cancel to finish.

Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Configuring BoardsManaging ETHC Cross Connections

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



9-75

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

How to create ETHC cross connections in an Add & Drop context

To create ETHC cross connections in an Add & Drop context, perform the following

steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 If necessary, to remind how channel and port numbers are managed, refer to “About

ETHC Configurations” (p. 9-5).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Check that ETHC working mode is set to AddDrop_Manual.

To know how to configure the ETHC working mode, refer to “Configuring ETHC

Working Mode” (p. 9-74)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Select Board> Manage ETHC Cross Connections....

Result:The VLAN Cross Connection Management window is displayed.

If necessary, refer to “The VLA� Cross Connection Management Window” (p. 9-75)to understand the content of this window.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Perform one of the following:

• To create an Add & Drop cross connection:

1. Enter a channel number (picked from range 100 to 990) associated with a

User-Client port (Horizontal)

2. Enter the same channel number to the selected User-Client port.

3. Keep clicked the selected port number and drag until the target port of either L13

or L14 lines.

• To create a path-through cross connection:

1. Enter a channel number associated with one port of either L13 or L14 lines.

2. Enter the same channel number to the selected port.

3. Keep clicked the selected port number and drag until the target port of the lines.

Reminder:

In case of migration from Concentrator mode to Add & Drop mode , you can:

• Keep the existing channels numbered from 51 to 59. For any circumstances, if you

want to redesign the way your services are handled, you will need to delete these

existing cross connections and to create new ones.

• Implement the new channels by picking the channel numbers from the range: 100 to

999.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 If necessary, repeat from Step 4 until the end of cross connection process.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Configuring BoardsManaging ETHC Cross Connections

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Configuring 2xGBE_FC Board Signal Type Transportation

Purpose

Use this procedure to configure 2xGBE_FC board signal type transportation.

Before you begin


How to configure 2xGBE_FC board signal type transportation

To configure 2xGBE_FC board signal type transportation, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Board>Modify specific equipment configuration


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 For Signal_Type parameter, select the relevant value.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click OK.

See Also

Table 9-16, “2*GE_FC Signal Type Transportation Parameters Table” (p. 9-59)

Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Configuring BoardsConfiguring 2xGBE_FC Board Signal Type Transportation

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



9-77

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Configuring TRBx or ALCT Laser Output Power

Purpose

Use this procedure to configure TRBx or ALCT laser output power

Before you begin


How to configure TRBx or ALCT Laser Output Power

To configure TRBx or ALCT laser output power, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Board>Optical Power Level Configuration

Result:The ALC & Output power level configuration window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select the relevant pre-emphasis value for the selected channel.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click Apply.

See Also

Table 9-21, “TRBx/ALCT Laser Output Power Configuration Parameter Table” (p. 9-62)

Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Configuring BoardsConfiguring TRBx or ALCT Laser Output Power

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Configuring LOFA11xx Laser Output Power

Purpose

Use this procedure to configure LOFA laser output power.

Before you begin


How to configure LOFA Laser Output Power

To configure LOFA11xx laser output power, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Board > APT/MSV.

Result:The APT/VOA configuration window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 For each required parameter, select the relevant value.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click OK.

See Also

“LOFA11xx Power Tuning Parameters” (p. 9-65)

Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Configuring BoardsConfiguring LOFA11xx Laser Output Power

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



9-79

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Configuring WMAN Laser Power

Purpose

Use this procedure to configure WMA� laser output power.

Before you begin


How to configure WMAN Output Power

To configure WMA� laser output power, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Board>Optical Power Level Configuration

Result:The ALC & Output power level configuration window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select the relevant attenuation parameter value for each selected element.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click Apply.

See Also

• Table 9-22, “WMA� 1100 Laser Output Power Configuration Parameters Table”

(p. 9-63)

• Table 9-23, “WMA� 3174 Laser Power Configuration Parameters Table” (p. 9-63)

Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Configuring BoardsConfiguring WMAN Laser Power

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Configuring TRBx Frequency

Purpose

Use this procedure to configure TRBx frequency.

Before you begin


How to configure TRBx Frequency

To configure TRBx frequency, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Board > Modify equipment configuration

Result:The Modify Equipment parameter window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 In the list, click on the frequency corresponding to required wavelength.

Result:The selected frequency is displayed on the left.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click OK.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Configuring BoardsConfiguring TRBx Frequency

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



9-81

Configuring TRBx Transmission Parameters

Purpose

Use this procedure to configure TRBx transmission parameters.

Before you begin


How to configure TRBx transmission parameters

To configure TRBx transmission parameters, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Board > Modify specific equipment configuration.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 For each required parameter, select the relevant value.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click OK.

See Also

Table 9-12, “TRBx Transmission Parameters Table” (p. 9-55)

Good to Know


take an action on TRBx transmission parameters:



you must set:

• Force LOSS to Activated,

• APSD Control to Laser Forced Off.

Refer to: “Controlling TRBx, ETHC and 2*GE_FC

Boards Laser” (p. 9-111)

OFF enable the optical interface, then you must set Force


Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Configuring BoardsConfiguring TRBx Transmission Parameters

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Configuring TRBx Shutdown Criteria

Purpose

Use this procedure to set the TRBx shutdown criteria.

Before you begin

User-Client OGPI transmission block is displayed

How to configure TRBx Shutdown Criteria

To configure TRBx shutdown criteria, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Transmission > Shutdown Criteria Configuration.

Result:The Shutdown Criteria Configuration window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Click on the relevant radio button to change.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click OK.

See Also

Table 9-24, “TRBx Shutdown Criteria Table” (p. 9-64)

Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Configuring BoardsConfiguring TRBx Shutdown Criteria

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



9-83

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Configuring 40 Gbps TRBC Ethernet Mapping

Purpose

Use this procedure when you want to configure the 10 GBE LA� data frame GFP-F

encapsulation into G.709 frame for 40 Gps TRBC.

Before you begin

• 40 Gps TRBC is declared.

• XFP module(s) is/are declared.

• Cabling is performed.

• Transmission update is performed.

• Transmission View is displayed.

How to configure 40 Gbps TRBC Ethernet mapping

To configure 10 GBE LA� data frame GFP-F encapsulation into G.709 frame for 40 Gps

TRBC, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Verify that prerequisites are fulfilled (Refer to “Before you begin” (p. 9-84)).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Right-click Transmission block port#x-ODU2 (where x = 1,2,3 or 4 depending on the

number of XFP in service) and select Ethernet Mapping.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Depending on the type of GFP-F encapsulation, tick one of the following:

• Standard: This option blocks the Start of Frame, Ethernet Preambule and Ordered

Sets.

• Proprietary: This option lets the Start of Frame, Ethernet Preambule and Ordered

Sets to be transmitted into the G.709 frame according to ITU-T Serie G, Supplement

43, § 7.3

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Configuring BoardsConfiguring 40 Gbps TRBC Ethernet Mapping

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Configuring LOFA11xx APSD

Purpose

Use this procedure to configure LOFA11xx APSD.

Before you begin


How to configure LOFA APSD

To configure LOFA11xx APSD, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Board > APSD Configuration.

Result:The APSD Management window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select a LOFA11xx stage and click Configuration....

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 The APSD Configuration window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 From the APSD Control list, select the required value and click OK.

See Also

“LOFA11xx APSD Parameters” (p. 9-68)

Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Configuring BoardsConfiguring LOFA11xx APSD

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



9-85

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Configuring Contradirectionality

Purpose

Use this procedure when you want to configure bidirectionality for:

• 2 unidirectional horizontal LOFA11xx,

• 2 WMA�1100.

Before you begin

• The 2 boards to link are declared.

• If applicable, the 2 LOFA11xx boards are unidirectional.

• Connectors are in service,

• Cabling has been declared and activated,

• One board is selected.

• Board view window is displayed.

How to configure Bidirectionality

To configure bidirectionality, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Board > Modify Equipment Configuration.

Result:The Modify Equipment parameters window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 In the relevant fields, enter the identification of the contradirectional board:

• Rack number,

• subrack number,

• Slot number.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


See Also

• “Declaring LOFA11xx Amplifier Boards” (p. 9-38)

• “Declaring WMA�1100 Boards” (p. 9-47)

• Table 9-11, “Contradirectionality Parameters table” (p. 9-54)

Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Configuring BoardsConfiguring Contradirectionality

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Configuring the BMDX Band associated to a CMDX Board

Purpose

Use this procedure to configure the BMDX band associated to a CMDX board.

Before you begin

CMDX Board View window is displayed.

How to configure the BMDX Band associated to a CMDX

To configure the BMDX band associated to a CMDX board, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Board > Modify Equipment Configuration...

Result:The Modify Equipment parameters window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 For Band parameter, select the relevant band number.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click OK.

See Also

Table 9-10, “CMDX Band Parameter Table” (p. 9-54)

Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Configuring BoardsConfiguring the BMDX Band associated to a CMDX Board

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



9-87

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Configuring ALCT Working Mode

Purpose

Use this procedure to configure ALCT board working mode as static or dynamic.

Good to Know

The ALCT (Automatic Level ConTrol) board hosts the 1626 LM power regulation

function which performs the following:

• enables to maintain the booster input at a constant power,

• helps to keep low enough the transmitted power per channel for a low channel count

to avoid non-linear effects on working channels,

• helps to compensate for the power variations when some channels are missing.

As a consequence, the ALCT board configuration has a major impact on the booster input

power.

ALCT Working Modes

The ALCT board works according to the two following modes:

• Static (or Disable) Mode

In this mode the ALCT board output power is manually set at a constant value. The

booster input power varies depending on this fixed value and the number of channels.

To manage the ALCT board output power, refer to “Configuring TRBx or ALCT

Laser Output Power” (p. 9-78).

• Dynamic Mode

In this mode, a set point value is defined as the booster input power (Power

Configuration section). In this mode the ALCT board will adapt dynamically its

output power to maintain the booster input power at this set point value whatever the

number of active channels is.

– If all or most of the channels are present, the role of ALCT in booster input power

will be insignificant.

– If some channels disappear, ALCT output power will rapidly increase to

compensate for the resultant power loss.

Before you begin

• Rx LOFA of relevant node is selected.

• Related OTS transmission view is displayed.

• Port#1-OMS is selected.

How to configure ALCT working mode

To configure ALCT working mode, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Right-click and select ALC Management.

Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Configuring BoardsConfiguring ALCT Working Mode

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Result:The Automatic Laser Control Management window is displayed

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Perform one or more of the following:

To specify the related ALCT board location:

1. From Dynamic ALC Configuration section, enter related ALCT board rack, subrack

and slot numbers.

2. Click Set.

3. End.

To set the configuration mode:

1. From Mode Configuration section, click the relevant radio button. For mode details

refer to “ALCTWorking Modes” (p. 9-88).

2. End.

To set the booster input power set point value:

1. In the Power Configuration section, enter a value.

The value displayed into the grayed part of Booster input is the last value set.

2. Click Set.

The new set point value is taken into account.

3. End.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Configuring BoardsConfiguring ALCT Working Mode

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



9-89

Configuring ALCT Stimulated Brillouin Scattering Mechanism

Purpose

Use this procedure to configure ALCT Stimulated Brillouin Scattering Mechanism.

Before you begin

ALCT Board View window is displayed.

How to configure ALCT Stimulated Brillouin Scattering Mechanism

To configure ALCT Stimulated Brillouin Scattering Mechanism, perform the following

steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 For SBS_SUPPR parameter, select the relevant value.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click OK.

See Also

Table 9-14, “ALCT Stimulated Brillouin Scattering Parameter Table” (p. 9-58)

Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Configuring BoardsConfiguring ALCT Stimulated Brillouin Scattering

Mechanism...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Configuring TDMX 1180 Port Profile

Purpose

Use this procedure to configure TDMX 1180 port profile.

Before you begin

TDMX 1180 Board View window is displayed.

How to configure TDMX 1180 port profile

To configure TDMX 1180 port profile, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 For ACC_WDM and BLCK_LVL parameters, select the relevant value.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click OK.

See Also

• Table 9-17, “TDMX 1180 Port Profile Parameters Table” (p. 9-59),

• “Configuring TDMX 1180 Output Power” (p. 9-92),

• Table 9-29, “TDMX Port Configuration Parameters Table” (p. 9-70).

Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Configuring BoardsConfiguring TDMX 1180 Port Profile

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



9-91

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Configuring TDMX 1180 Output Power

Purpose

Use this procedure to configure TDMX 1180 Output Power.

Before you begin

TDMX Board View window is displayed.

How to configure TDMX 1180 Output Power

To configure TDMX 1180 output power, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Board> Configure TDMX 1180...

Result:

• The TDMX Port Configuration window is displayed.

• The port number and related channel frequency are displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 For any port number/channel frequency, select the required output value as described in

Table 9-29, “TDMX Port Configuration Parameters Table” (p. 9-70).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click Set Selected Port.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click Apply to finish.

See Also

• Table 9-29, “TDMX Port Configuration Parameters Table” (p. 9-70),

• “Board Specific Configuration Parameters” (p. 9-55).

Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Configuring BoardsConfiguring TDMX 1180 Output Power

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Configuring WMAN Provisioning Parameters

Purpose

Use this procedure to configure WMA� provisioning parameters.

Before you begin

WMAN Board View window is displayed.

How to configure WMAN provisioning parameters

To configure WMA� provisioning parameters, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 For all the parameter displayed in the list, select the relevant value.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click OK.

See Also

• Table 9-18, “WMA� 1100 Provisioning Parameters Table” (p. 9-59)

• Table 9-19, “WMA� 3x74 Provisioning Parameters Table” (p. 9-60)

Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Configuring BoardsConfiguring WMAN Provisioning Parameters

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



9-93

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Configuring WMAN 1100 Equalization Parameter

Purpose

Use this procedure to equalize all the channels going through WMA� 1100 board.

Before you begin

• WMA� 1100 equalization parameter must be done at commissioning phase only.

• Channel must be blocked.

• WMAN 1100 Board View window is displayed.

How to configure WMAN 1100 equalization parameter

To configure WMA� 1100 equalization parameter, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 For PGE Commissioning parameter displayed in the list, perform the following steps:

1. Select Odd or Even and click OK.

Result:

• The equalization process starts for the channels of the selected parity.

• The window is open until the end of equalization process.

• At the end of the process, the value is reset to Off.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Continue the channel equalization process of the same parity on other nodes of your

network.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Once you have performed the channel equalization process of a given parity on all nodes

of your network, repeat the process for the other channel parity node by node.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Once all channel equalization of all nodes have been performed, reset PGE

Commissioning to Off on each relevant node.

See Also

Table 9-18, “WMA� 1100 Provisioning Parameters Table” (p. 9-59)

Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Configuring BoardsConfiguring WMAN 1100 Equalization Parameter

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Configuring Channels on WMAN 3x74 boards

Purpose

Use this procedure to configure channels on WMA� 3174 boards.

Before you begin

WMAN 3174 Board View window is displayed.

How to configure channels on WMAN 3174 boards

To configure channels on WMA� 3174 boards, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Board >Configure WMAN 3x74....

Result:The Channel Configuration window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 For all the parameter displayed in the list, select the relevant value.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click Apply.

See Also

“WMA�3x74 Channel Configuration Parameters” (p. 9-70)

Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Configuring BoardsConfiguring Channels on WMAN 3x74 boards

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



9-95

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Setting Boards In/Out of Service

Overview

Purpose

This topic describes the procedures to perform when you want to set boards in service or

out of service.

Contents

Setting a Board In Service 9-97

Setting a Board Out of Service 9-98

Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Setting Boards In/Out of ServiceOverview

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Setting a Board In Service

Purpose

Use this procedure to set a board in service.

Before you begin

�ote: This procedure does not apply to SFP/XFP modules. To know how to set a

SFP/XFP module in/out of service, refer to:


• “Setting a SFP/XFPModule Out of Service” (p. 9-103)


• The board operational status is Out of Service (�o red padlock).

How to set a board in service

To set a board in service, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select the board.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select Equipment > Set in Service.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


Result:The board operational status becomes In Service (Red padlock is displayed).

Good to Know

For 40 Gbps transponders, you can set the WDM line connector in service only if:

1. WDMModule output connector is in service.

2. VOA input connector is in service.

3. Cabling between WDMModule output connector and VOA input or BOFA input is

declared.

Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Setting Boards In/Out of ServiceSetting a Board In Service

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



9-97

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Setting a Board Out of Service

Purpose

Use this procedure to set a board out of service.

Before you begin

�ote: This procedure does not apply to SFP/XFP modules. To know how to set a

SFP/XFP module in/out of service, refer to:


• “Setting a SFP/XFPModule Out of Service” (p. 9-103)


• The board operational status is In Service (Red padlock is displayed).

How to set a board out of service

To set a board out of service, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select the board.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select Equipment > Set out of Service.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


Result:

• The board operational status becomes Out of Service (�o red padlock).

• Related alarms are inhibited and will no longer be raised.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Setting Boards In/Out of ServiceSetting a Board Out of Service

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Managing SFP/XFP Modules

Overview

Purpose

This topic describes the procedures to perform when you want to manage SFP/XFP

modules.

Contents

About SFP/XFPModules and Board Compatibility 9-100

Declaring a SFP/XFPModule 9-101

Setting a SFP/XFPModule In Service 9-102

Setting a SFP/XFPModule Out of Service 9-103

Undeclaring/Removing SFP/XFPModules 9-104

Displaying SFP/XFPModule Payload 9-105

Changing an SFP or an XFP 9-106

Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Managing SFP/XFP ModulesOverview

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



9-99

About SFP/XFP Modules and Board Compatibility

SFP means Small Form Factor Pluggable.

XFP means eXtended Form Factor Pluggable.

SFP/XFP modules are hot-swappable optical transceivers which plug in the following

boards:

For ... You can plug ... And possible slot#are ...

ETHC boards until 9 SFP modules to connect client lines 1 to 9

1 XFP module to connect WDM line (�ot

Mandatory)

13 or 14

2*GE_FC

boards

until 2 SFP modules to connect client lines 1 to 9

1 SFP module to connect WDM line (Mandatory) 13 or 14

TRBD1191

boards

1 XFP to connect client lines (Mandatory) 1

TRBC boards• 10 Gbps: until 4 SFP modules to connect client

lines

• 40 Gbps: until 4 XFP modules to connect client

lines

1 to 4

Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Managing SFP/XFP ModulesAbout SFP/XFP Modules and Board Compatibility

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Declaring a SFP/XFP Module

Purpose

Use this procedure to declare SFP/XFP modules

Before you begin


How to declare a SFP/XFP Module

To declare a SFP/XFP module, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Click on an empty slot dedicated to SFP/XFP modules.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Click OK.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 In the confirmation dialog box, click OK.

Result:The module appears in the board view with operational state In Service (Red

padlock is displayed).

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Managing SFP/XFP ModulesDeclaring a SFP/XFP Module

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



9-101

Setting a SFP/XFP Module In Service

Purpose

Use this procedure to set SFP/XFP module in service.

Before you begin

• Board View window is displayed.

• The module operational status is Out of Service (�o red padlock).

How to set a SFP/XFP module in service

To set a SFP/XFP module in service, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select the module.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select Equipment > Set in Service.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


Result:The module operational status becomes In Service (Red padlock is

displayed).

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Managing SFP/XFP ModulesSetting a SFP/XFP Module In Service

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Setting a SFP/XFP Module Out of Service

Purpose

Use this procedure to set a SFP/XFP module out of service.

Before you begin


• The module operational status is In Service (Red padlock is displayed).

• The module has no configured cabling.

• All connectors are out of service.

How to set a SFP/XFP module out of service

To set a SFP/XFP module out of service, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select the board.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select Equipment > Set out of Service.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


Result:The module operational status becomes Out of Service (�o red padlock).

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Managing SFP/XFP ModulesSetting a SFP/XFP Module Out of Service

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



9-103

Undeclaring/Removing SFP/XFP Modules

Purpose

Use this procedure to undeclare SFP/XFP modules.

Before you begin


• Module operational status must be set to Out of Service (�o red padlock displayed).

• For modules on concentrators, perform the following:

1. Remove loopbacks, then

2. Delete cable configuration.

Attention:Do not unplug a board during a firmware download (Hardware failure

LED in yellow). Otherwise the board will not restart and you will have to return it for

manufacturer repair.

How to undeclare/remove SFP/XFP

To undeclare/remove SFP/XFP modules, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select the board.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................


Result:The board disappears from the subrack view.

An UEP (Unconfigured Equipment Present) is raised if the board is still plugged intothe slot

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Managing SFP/XFP ModulesUndeclaring/Removing SFP/XFP Modules

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Displaying SFP/XFP Module Payload

Purpose

Use this procedure to display SFP/XFP module payload.

Before you begin

Module View window is displayed.

How to display SFP/XFP Module Payload

To display SFP/XFP module payload, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select Board > Payload Configuration.

Result:The Payload Configuration window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Managing SFP/XFP ModulesDisplaying SFP/XFP Module Payload

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



9-105

Changing an SFP or an XFP

Purpose

Use this procedure when you need to change the current SFP or XFP module of a board.

Before you begin

Board View is displayed.

How to change the current SFP or XFP module of a board

To change the current SFP or XFP module of a board, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Click Equipment> Modify...

Result:The Create/Modify Equipment window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 From the list, select the XFP_Generic or SFP_Generic entry.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click OK.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Perform the following sequence:

1. Disconnect the fibers.

2. Unplug the current module.

3. Plug the new module.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click Equipment> Modify...

Result:The Create/Modify Equipment window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 From the list, select the new module type entry.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Click OK.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Managing SFP/XFP ModulesChanging an SFP or an XFP

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Activating Firmware

Overview

Purpose

This topic describes the displayed information and the procedure related to firmware

management.

Contents

Firmware Activation Displayed Information 9-107


Firmware Activation Displayed Information

Table 9-31, “Firmware Activation Displayed Information” (p. 9-107) describes firmware

activation displayed information.

Table 9-31 Firmware Activation Displayed Information

Information Description

Board Type Displays the board acronym.

Location Displays the board location in the subrack with the following sequence:

• rack#

• subrack#

• slot#

Firmware

Version

Displays the firmware version

Firmware

Status

Displays the firmware status, which can take the following values:

• In Service: firmware is up to date and correctly loaded.

• Not Accessible: firmware download is not successfully completed. The

board is unstable. This state may require a manual reset.

• Downloading: firmware download is in progress.

• Misaligned: mismatch between the last downloaded version and the

current version. This state may require an activation.

See Also

“Activating Firmware” (p. 9-108)

Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Activating FirmwareOverview

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



9-107

Activating Firmware

Purpose

Use this procedure to activate board firmware.

Before you begin

• 1626 LM GUI is started.

• Board firmware status is Misaligned.

How to activate board firmware

To activate board firmware, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Configuration > Firmware activation...

Result:The Firmware activation window is displayed, displaying firmware

information for each board supporting a firmware.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 To activate all misaligned boards, perform the following steps:

1. Tick Activate all check box.

2. Click Activate.

3. Go to End.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 To activate a selection of misaligned boards, perform the following steps:

1. Select one or several misaligned boards.

2. Click Activate.

3. Go to End.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Activating FirmwareActivating Firmware

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Controlling TRBx, ETHC and 2*GE_FC Board Laser

Overview

Purpose

This topic describes the parameters and procedures to perform to manage TRBx, ETHC

and 2*GE_FC boards laser.

Contents

Laser Control Parameters 9-109

Controlling TRBx, ETHC and 2*GE_FC Boards Laser 9-111

Laser Control Parameters

Good to Know

• Port#1-OGPI refers to Client / User side.

• Port#101-OGPI refers to WDM line side.

Table 9-32, “Laser Control Parameters Table” (p. 9-109) describes the parameters you can

manage or display to take control of TRBx, ETHC and 2*GE_FC boards laser.

Table 9-32 Laser Control Parameters Table


APSD Control Enables:

• to force the laser to shutdown,

• to let the system to control the

laser.

Disable

The laser is not under operator

control. The system controls the

laser shutdown.

Laser Forced Off

You force the laser to shutdown.

Laser Current

State

Displays the laser operational state. Laser Off/On

See Also

“Controlling TRBx, ETHC and 2*GE_FC Boards Laser” (p. 9-111)

Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Controlling TRBx, ETHC and 2*GE_FC Board LaserOverview

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



9-109

Good to Know


take an action on TRBx laser:



you must set:

• APSD Control to Laser Forced Off,

• Force LOSS to Activated.

Refer to: “Configuring TRBx Transmission

Parameters” (p. 9-82)

OFF• enable the optical interface, then you must set Force




Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Controlling TRBx, ETHC and 2*GE_FC Board LaserLaser Control Parameters

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Controlling TRBx, ETHC and 2*GE_FC Boards Laser

Purpose

Use this procedure to control TRBx, ETHC and 2*GE_FC boards laser.

Before you begin

• The transmission view of the related boards is displayed.

• OGPI ports are available.

Port#1-OGPIrefers to Client/User side.

Port#101-OGPIrefers to WDM line side.

How to control TRBx, ETHC and 2*GE_FC boards laser

To control TRBx, ETHC and 2*GE_FC boards laser, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select the OGPI port.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Right click and select APSD Configuration...

Result:The APSD Configuration window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 To force the laser to shutdown, perform the following:

1. From APSD Control list box select Laser Forced Off.

2. Click OK.

3. Go to End.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 To let the system to control the laser, perform the following steps:

1. From APSD Control list box select Disable.

2. Click OK.

3. Go to End.

See Also

“Laser Control Parameters” (p. 9-109)

Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Controlling TRBx, ETHC and 2*GE_FC Board LaserControlling TRBx, ETHC and 2*GE_FC Boards Laser

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



9-111

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Good to Know


take an action on TRBx laser:


ON disable the optical interface emission and reception,

then you must set:

• APSD Control to Laser Forced Off,

• Force LOSS to Activated.


Parameters” (p. 9-82)

OFF• enable the optical interface, then you must set Force




Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Controlling TRBx, ETHC and 2*GE_FC Board LaserControlling TRBx, ETHC and 2*GE_FC Boards Laser

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Managing External Points

Overview

Purpose

This topic describes the parameters and procedures to perform when you want to manage

external points.

Contents

About External Points 9-113

External Points Parameters 9-115

Displaying all External Points 9-116

Managing External Input Points 9-117

Managing External Output Points 9-118

Filtering External Input Points 9-119

Filtering External Output Points 9-120

About External Points

External points are devices outside of the 1626 LM which connect to the 1626 LM via

HSKU boards.

Each HSKU board can connect up to:

• 9 external input points, and

• 9 external output points.

External input points

External input points trigger housekeeping alarm, based on specific circumstances.

For example:

• door open,

• intrusion or fire detection,

• temperature limit reach,

• hygrometry limit reach.

Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Managing External PointsOverview

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



9-113

External output points

External output points are triggered by the 1626 LM.

For example:

• Flashing light,

• Fire alarm klaxon.

The link [External Point - 1626 LM] can be assimilated to a circuit which status can be

open or closed.

A circuit logic can determine the external point activation or inactivation, depending on

the circuit status.

The following table gives the rules of external points activation.

If ... Then ...

External input logic is active

closed

The housekeeping alarm is raised.

A flag is displayed in the External Points View window.

External output point status is

active closed

The external device is triggered.

A flag is displayed in the External Points View window.

Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Managing External PointsAbout External Points

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



External Points Parameters

External input and output points have their own parameters:

• Table 9-33, “External Input Point Parameters Table” (p. 9-115) describes External

input point parameters

• Table 9-34, “External Output Point Parameters” (p. 9-115) describes External output

point parameters.

Table 9-33 External Input Point Parameters Table


Board HSKU board location in charge of

external point interface• External point type

• HSKU board number

• External point number

User Label External Point identification Alphanumeric character string.

Operator configurable.

Logic Circuit logic which determine

external point activation• Active closed

• Active open

External Point Circuit status Closed

�ot operator configurable.

Probable Cause The type of alarm which will be

raised if the circuit logic and the

circuit status match.

Housekeeping alarm


Table 9-34 External Output Point Parameters


Board HSKU board location in charge of

external point interface• External point type

• HSKU board number

• External point number

User Label External Point identification Alphanumeric character string.

Operator configurable.

Logic Circuit logic which determine

external point activation• Active closed

• Active open

External Point Circuit status• Open

• Closed

Mode The type of configuration mode. Manual


Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Managing External PointsExternal Points Parameters

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



9-115

Displaying all External Points

Purpose

Use this procedure to display all external points.

Before you begin

• The 1626 LM GUI is started, or

• The input points are displayed, or

• The output points are displayed.

How to display all external points

To display all external points, perform one of the following actions, depending on the

display:

From the 1626 LM menu bar:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Views>External Points.

Result:The External Points View window is displayed.

From the input or output points list display:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Right-click and select Show All External Points.

Result:The External Points View window is displayed.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Managing External PointsDisplaying all External Points

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Managing External Input Points

Purpose

Use this procedure to manage external input points.

Before you begin

• External Points View window is displayed, or

• Input points only are displayed

How to manage External Input Points

To manage external input points, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select an external input point.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Right-click and select Configuration...

Result:The External Input Point Configuration window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 According to your needs, complete the User Label or select the relevant Logic.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Managing External PointsManaging External Input Points

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



9-117

Managing External Output Points

Purpose

Use this procedure to manage external output points.

Before you begin

• External Points View window is displayed, or

• Output points only are displayed

How to manage External Input Points

To manage external output points, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select an external output point.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Right-click and select Configuration...

Result:The External Output Point Configuration window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 According to your needs, complete the User Label or select the relevant External Point

status.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Managing External PointsManaging External Output Points

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Filtering External Input Points

Purpose

Use this procedure to filter external input points.

Before you begin

• External Points View window is displayed.

• Input and output points are displayed, or

• Output points are displayed only.

How to filter External Input Points

To filter external input points, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the External Points View window, right-click and select Show External Input

Points.

Result:The input points are displayed.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Managing External PointsFiltering External Input Points

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



9-119

Filtering External Output Points

Purpose

Use this procedure to filter external output points.

Before you begin

• External Points View window is displayed.

• Input and output points are displayed, or

• Input points are displayed only.

How to filter External Output Points

To filter external output points, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the External Points View window, right-click and select Show External Output

Points.

Result:The output points are displayed.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Managing External PointsFiltering External Output Points

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Managing LOFA Upgrade with EMPM1000

Overview

Purpose

This section describes the procedures to follow when you need to instal and cable an

EMPM1000 for upgrading LOFA up to 23 dBm.

For any specific power value tuning, refer to 1626 LM System Turn-up Guide - 3AL

75138 GAAA.

Contents

Upgrading LOFAwith EMPM1000 in a Line Terminal or a B-OADM without

OMSP

9-122

Upgrading LOFAwith EMPM1000 in a Line Terminal or a B-OADM with

OMSP

9-124

Upgrading LOFAwith EMPM1000 in a T/R-OADM 9-126

Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Managing LOFA Upgrade with EMPM1000Overview

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



9-121

Upgrading LOFA with EMPM1000 in a Line Terminal or aB-OADM without OMSP

Purpose

Use this procedure when you need to instal and cable an EMPM1000 in a Line Terminal

or a B-OADM without OMSP.

Before you begin

• You must have the cabling plan of your configuration.

• If EMPM1000 is implemented for a preamplifier, collect remote inventory of BMDX

boards.

How to upgrade a LOFA with EMPM1000 in a Line Terminal or a B-OADM without OMSP

To upgrade a LOFAwith EMPM1000 in a Line Terminal or a B-OADM without OMSP,

perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Plug EMPM1000 into the slot immediately adjacent to the LOFA to upgrade.

If:

• LOFA is in slot n, n as an odd number, you must plug the EMPM1000 into slot n+1.

• LOFA is in slot n, n as an even number, you must plug the EMPM1000 into slot n-1.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Assign LOFA COVER_DISABLE specific parameter to Cover_Disable.

Result:You can remove the LOFA safety cover without traffic interruption.

ATTENTION: You have 5 minutes maximum to perform the requiredconnections. When these 5 minutes have passed, LOFA will shut down.

Refer to Table 9-13, “LOFA Safety Cover Parameter Table” (p. 9-57)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Remove the LOFA safety cover.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Connect fiber reference 1AB-36108-0002 from EMPM output port to LOFA EMPM input

port.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Replace the LOFA safety cover.

Result:The system detects that the safety cover has been replaced and turns the

COVER_DISABLE specific parameter to Cover_Enable.

ATTENTION: Do not remove the cover once it has been replaced. Otherwise,you take the risk to shut the LOFA down.


Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Managing LOFA Upgrade with EMPM1000Upgrading LOFA with EMPM1000 in a Line Terminal or a

B-OADM without OMSP...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Perform EMPM1000 feedback cabling as follows:

If LOFA is... Then...

A booster Connect EMPM Mon input port to 1rst stage

Mon input port of related contradirectional

LOFA.

A preamplifier Refer to BMDX remote inventory information.

If BMDX reference is:

• 3AL-95504-Ax-AA01, then connect

EMPM Mon input port to Demux output

port of the band dedicated to ALCT board.

• 3AL-95504-Bx-AA01, then there is no

optical cabling to perform. EMPM

feedback is performed via backpanel.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Set ports in service for all involved boards.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Perform logical cabling in compliance with physical cabling.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................


B-OADM without OMSP...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



9-123

Upgrading LOFA with EMPM1000 in a Line Terminal or aB-OADM with OMSP

Purpose

Use this procedure when you need to instal and cable an EMPM1000 in a Line Terminal

or a B-OADM with OMSP.

Before you begin

• You must have the cabling plan of your configuration.

• Remind that only 3 EMPM1000 boards fit into a B-OADM shelf which supports

OMSP.

How to upgrade a LOFA with EMPM1000 in a Line Terminal or a B-OADM with OMSP

To upgrade a LOFAwith EMPM1000 in a Line Terminal or a B-OADM with OMSP,


...................................................................................................................................................................................................


If:



...................................................................................................................................................................................................





...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................


port.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................







B-OADM with OMSP...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................





LOFA.

A preamplifier Connect EMPM Mon input port to OCPU Mon

input port of the corresponding OTS.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................


E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................


B-OADM with OMSP...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



9-125

Upgrading LOFA with EMPM1000 in a T/R-OADM

Purpose

Use this procedure when you need to instal and cable an EMPM1000 in a in a

T/R-OADM.

Before you begin

You must have the cabling plan of your configuration.

How to upgrade a LOFA with EMPM1000 in a T/R-OADM

To upgrade a LOFAwith EMPM1000 in a in a T/R-OADM, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


If:



...................................................................................................................................................................................................





...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................


port.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................






Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Managing LOFA Upgrade with EMPM1000Upgrading LOFA with EMPM1000 in a T/R-OADM

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................





LOFA.

A preamplifier Depending on the configuration:

• In case of TR-OADM: connect EMPM Mon

input port to TDMX Mon input port.

• In case of R-OADM with BMDX reference

3AL-95504-Ax-AA01: connect EMPM

Mon input port to Demux output port of

the band dedicated to ALCT board.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................


E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Board and SFP/XFP Module Management Managing LOFA Upgrade with EMPM1000Upgrading LOFA with EMPM1000 in a T/R-OADM

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



9-127

10 10R-OADM and TR-OADM

Configuration

Management

Overview

Purpose

This chapter describes the parameters and the associated procedures for configuring the

different types of R-OADM and TR-OADM nodes.

Contents

About R-OADM and TR-OADM 10-2

R-OADM and TR-OADMMain characteristics 10-3

Boards Involved in R-OADM and TR-OADM �odes 10-5

R-OADM and TR-OADM Configuration Tasks 10-7

R/TR-OADM �etwork Procedures/WMA�3x74 Based 10-9

Creating a Transmission Path 10-10

Deleting a Transmission Path 10-13

R/TR-OADM Unitary Procedures/WMA�3x74 Based 10-16

Performing R-OADM and TR-OADM Cross Connections 10-17

Blocking a Channel Connection 10-19

Setting an Add & Drop Connection 10-20

Setting an Express Connection 10-23

R-OADM Unitary Procedures / WMA�1100 Based 10-26

R-OADM/WMA�1100 Based Configuration Parameters 10-27

Configuring R-OADM with WMA�1100 Boards 10-28

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



10-1

About R-OADM and TR-OADM

Overview

Purpose

This section describes the main characteristics and the boards involved in:

• Reconfigurable Optical Add & Drop Multiplexer (R-OADM), or

• Tunable and Reconfigurable Optical Add & Drop Multiplexer (TR-OADM).

Contents

R-OADM and TR-OADMMain characteristics 10-3

Boards Involved in R-OADM and TR-OADM �odes 10-5

R-OADM and TR-OADM Configuration Tasks 10-7

R-OADM and TR-OADM Configuration Management About R-OADM and TR-OADMOverview

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



R-OADM and TR-OADM Main characteristics

R-OADM and TR-OADM Main Characteristics

The following table describes the main characteristics of a Reconfigurable or a Tunable

and Reconfigurable Optical Add & Drop Multiplexer.

Table 10-1 R-OADM and TR-OADM Main Characteristics

R-OADM and TR-OADM Main Characteristics Benefits

Remotely reconfigurable• Minimizes on-site intervention.

• Makes network planning more flexible in the

sense that channels can be dynamically added,

dropped or passed through according customer

needs.

Fixed wavelength transponder architecture (R-OADM

only)• Saves initial customer investments in

transponders.

• Enables migration from fixed OADM to

Reconfigurable OADM at a reasonable cost.

Transponder tunability architecture (TR-OADM only) Enables transponders to be remotely set at any

available wavelength.

R-OADM and TR-OADM Configuration Management About R-OADM and TR-OADMR-OADM and TR-OADM Main characteristics

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



10-3

Table 10-1 R-OADM and TR-OADM Main Characteristics (continued)

R-OADM and TR-OADM Main Characteristics Benefits

Connectivity The connectivity degree of R-OADM or a TR-OADM

depends on the number of nodes that one of these

configurations connect to.

For example:

• if a R-OADM or TR-OADM node connects to 2

nodes, the node will be degree 2.

• if a R-OADM or TR-OADM node connects to 3

or 4 nodes, the node will be degree 3 or degree 4.

The current release enables

• R-OADM degree 2 connectivity with

WMA�1100 boards.

• R-OADM degree 2 to 8 connectivity with

WMA�3x74 boards.

• TR-OADM degree 2 to 8 connectivity.

• TR-OADM with multidirectional Add & Drop

Amultidirectional Add & Drop configuration

enables to connect the frequency of a given

transponder to any available direction.

Current release handles multidirectional Add &

Drop configurations as follows:

– 2 directions + 2 Add & Drop blocks.






– 8 directions

R-OADM and TR-OADM Configuration Management About R-OADM and TR-OADMR-OADM and TR-OADM Main characteristics

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Boards Involved in R-OADM and TR-OADM Nodes

Significant Boards in R-OADM and TR-OADM Nodes

The following table lists the most significant boards involved in R-OADM and

TR-OADM nodes.

Table 10-2 R-OADM and TR-OADM Significant Boards

Boards Function Applicable Configuration

OADC1102 Splits or combines signals for

Express and Add & Drop channels.

R-OADM with WMA�1100.

board

WMA�1100 Controls channel output.

The WMA�1100:

• lets a channel to pass through

with an eventual attenuation,

or

• blocks a channel with a

maximum attenuation for Add

& Drop purpose.

R-OADM

BMDX/CMDX/OMDX Fix MUX/DEMUX R-OADM

OADC1300 Splits or combines signals for

Express and Add & Drop channels.

TR-OADM

OADC1750 Combines signals for dropped

channels.

TR-OADM

OC�C12x0:

• 1220 for degree 2 connectivity




that may be upgraded until

degree 8.

Splits signals for Express and Drop

channels.

TR-OADM

R-OADM and TR-OADM Configuration Management About R-OADM and TR-OADMBoards Involved in R-OADM and TR-OADM Nodes

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



10-5

Table 10-2 R-OADM and TR-OADM Significant Boards (continued)

Boards Function Applicable Configuration

WMA�3174 (50 GHz) Associated with TDMX1180 for

transponder tunability, the

WMA�3174 controls channel

output:

• from any input port, lets a

channel to pass through with

an eventual attenuation, or



TR-OADM

Without TDMX1180, the

WMA�3174 controls channel

output:






R-OADM

WMA�3374 (100 GHz) Controls channel output:






R-OADM

TDMX1180 Controls frequencies and power of

dropped channels.

TR-OADM

R-OADM and TR-OADM Configuration Management About R-OADM and TR-OADMBoards Involved in R-OADM and TR-OADM Nodes

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



R-OADM and TR-OADM Configuration Tasks

What you must absolutely know

For the current release, you are recommended:

• To know the cabling plan between transponder boards and associated WMA� ports,

• To know the cabling plan between TDMX and associated transponder boards (for

TR-OADM configurations).

• To have the traffic matrix document to know what the network context is.

• To have the �etwork Description Table (�DT) to know what parameter values must

be assigned for each board of each node.

What are the tasks to perform

R-OADM and TR-OADM configuration can be considered according to two

perspectives:

• From network perspective

• From node perspective

Configuration from network perspective

In this case you are requested to perform procedures which include actions on all nodes

involved in a transmission path. Configuring R or TR-OADM from a network perspective

comes to:

• Create a transmission path.

To know how to create a transmission path, refer to “Creating a Transmission Path”

(p. 10-10)

• Delete a transmission path.

To know how to delete a transmission path, refer to “Deleting a Transmission Path”

(p. 10-13)

Configuration from node perspective

In this case, you are requested to perform unitary procedures without any concern about

the global network context. Performing unitary procedures comes to:

• Create or delete specific cross connections between:

– splitter input and output points, for Express channels,

– splitter input points and TDMX or CMDX output points, for Add & Drop

channels.

TDMX boards are used in TR-OADM context for transponder tunability purposes.

CMDX boards are used in R-OADM context.

• Block a channel connection,

• Set an Add & Drop connection for a given channel,

• Set an Express connection for a given channel.

R-OADM and TR-OADM Configuration Management About R-OADM and TR-OADMR-OADM and TR-OADM Configuration Tasks

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



10-7

R and TR-OADM configuration depends on the type of WMA� boards which are

implemented into your nodes.

• If your R-OADM configuration is WMA�1100 based, refer to “R-OADM Unitary

Procedures / WMA�1100 Based” (p. 10-26)

• If your R or TR-OADM configuration is WMA�3x74 based, refer to “R/TR-OADM

Unitary Procedures/WMA�3x74 Based” (p. 10-16)

R-OADM and TR-OADM Configuration Management About R-OADM and TR-OADMR-OADM and TR-OADM Configuration Tasks

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



R/TR-OADM Network Procedures/WMAN3x74 Based

Overview

Purpose

In an R or TR-OADM context, you can be led to manage and configure more than a

specific node. You are led to manage a transmission path also called an OCH Trail. From

one end to the other, the transmission path may involve various nodes across your

network.

This section describes the necessary procedures to manage a transmission path in an R or

TR-OADM with WMA�3x74 boards.

Contents

Creating a Transmission Path 10-10

Deleting a Transmission Path 10-13

R-OADM and TR-OADM Configuration Management R/TR-OADM Network Procedures/WMAN3x74 BasedOverview

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



10-9

Creating a Transmission Path

Purpose

This topic describes all the required actions that you need to perform if you want to create

a transmission path within your network.

Before you begin

• You are recommended to have the traffic matrix document to know what the network

context is.

• You are recommended to have the �etwork Description Table (�DT) to know what

parameter values must be assigned for each board of each node.

• This procedure applies only if WMA�3x74 boards are used.

• Check that transponders are emitting.

Good to Know

• An OCH Trail represents the path taken by a channel between two termination

points.

• An OCH Group represents a group of channels using the same path between 2

termination points.

How to create a transmission path

To create a transmission path, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Create an Add & Drop connection for each termination points of the transmission path.

• To know how to create an Add & Drop connection for WMA�110 based

configurations, refer to “Configuring R-OADM with WMA�1100 Boards” (p. 10-28)

• To know how to create an Add & Drop connection for WMA�3x74 configurations,

refer to “Setting an Add & Drop Connection” (p. 10-20)

Result:

• If TR-OADM: on the relevant TDMX board, the channel frequency to drop is

assigned to the relevant port number.

• On the WDM side:

– the relevant transponder receiver is set to Force Loss: Off.

– the relevant transponder laser is switched on.

• On the relevant WMA� boards, the required channel is assigned to the relevant

Add & Drop input port number which connects the related transponder board.

• Channel output power of relevant WMA� boards is set to minimum (–27 dBm /

Blocked).

R-OADM and TR-OADM Configuration Management R/TR-OADM Network Procedures/WMAN3x74 BasedCreating a Transmission Path

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 If requested, for each intermediate entity crossed by the transmission path, create an

Express connection for the channel.

• To know how to create an Express connection for WMA�1100 based configurations,

refer to “Configuring R-OADM with WMA�1100 Boards” (p. 10-28)

• To know how to create an Express connection, refer to “Setting an Express

Connection” (p. 10-23)

Result:On the relevant WMA� boards, the required channel frequency is assigned to

the relevant Express input port number.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Tune the transmission path.

You can tune the transmission path automatically or manually. According to your

operation context, refer to one of the following:

• “How to tune the transmission path automatically” (p. 10-11)

• “How to tune the transmission path manually” (p. 10-12)

How to tune the transmission path automatically

�ote:Automatic transmission path tuning needs SPLM (Smart Photonic Layer

Manager) tool. To know how to use SPLM, refer to 1626LM SPLM User

Provisioning Guide.

To tune the transmission path automatically via SPLM, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Launch SPLM Graphical User Interface.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Synchronize SPLM with the subnetwork.

�ote: Any action on Rx and Tx Tributary connections at physical or configuration

level, requires SPLM synchronization.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Check that the ALC initial target reference power has been assigned once.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Select the relevant OCH Group.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Run the APE process.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



10-11

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

How to tune the transmission path manually

�ote: For all the following steps, you must follow the signal direction from Tx to Rx.

To tune the transmission path manually (without SPLM), perform the following steps for

all the entities crossed by the OCH Trail:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Set all involved amplifiers to GAI� mode.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Set the ALC initial target reference power for all involved ALCT boards.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Set channel power of involved WMA�3x and TDMX boards.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Update the ALC power resulting from the new configuration for all involved ALCT

boards.

For detailed information, refer to 1626 LM System Turn-up Guide.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Set all involved amplifiers back to Power-MSV mode.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Deleting a Transmission Path

Purpose

This topic describes all the required actions that you need to perform if you want to delete

a transmission path from your network.

To delete a transmission path you need to perform the following:

1. Tune the transmission path for deletion.

• To know how to tune the transmission path for deletion automatically, refer to

“How to tune the transmission path for deletion automatically” (p. 10-14)

• To know how to tune the transmission path for deletion manually, refer to “How

to tune the transmission path for deletion manually” (p. 10-14)

2. Block the relevant channel frequency.

3. End.

Before you begin

• You are recommended to have the traffic matrix document to know what the network

context is.

• You are recommended to have the �etwork Description Table (�DT) to know what

parameter values must be assigned for each board of each node.

Good to Know

• An OCH Trail represents the path taken by a channel between two termination

points.

• An OCH Group represents a group of channels using the same path between 2

termination points.

How to delete a transmission path

To delete a transmission path, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Tune the transmission path for deletion.

You can tune the transmission path automatically or manually. According to your

operation context, refer to one of the following:

• “How to tune the transmission path for deletion automatically” (p. 10-14)

• “How to tune the transmission path for deletion manually” (p. 10-14)

R-OADM and TR-OADM Configuration Management R/TR-OADM Network Procedures/WMAN3x74 BasedDeleting a Transmission Path

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



10-13

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Block the relevant channel frequency.

• For WMA�1100 configurations, set the relevant frequency to state: 0 (BLOCKED).

To know how to block a channel frequency, refer to “Configuring R-OADM with

WMA�1100 Boards” (p. 10-28)

• For WMA�3174 configurations:

For all entities crossed by the transmission path, delete existing cross connections.

To know how to display cross connections for a board, refer to “Displaying Cross

Connections for a Board” (p. 12-9).

R or TR-OADM cross connections involve the following transmission blocks:

– OMSOch-OMSoch for Express connections

– OMSoch-OGPIoch for Add & Drop connections

Result:On the relevant WMA� boards, the relevant channel frequency is assigned to

Input value 0 (BLOCKED).

How to tune the transmission path for deletion automatically

�ote: The automatic transmission path tuning needs SPLM (Smart Photonic Layer

Manager) tool. To know how to use SPLM, refer to 1626 LM/SPLM User

Provisioning Guide - 3AL 75138 BAAA.

To tune the transmission path automatically via SPLM, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Launch SPLM Graphical User Interface.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Synchronize SPLM with the subnetwork.

�ote: Any action on Rx and Tx Tributary connections at physical or configuration

level, requires SPLM synchronization.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Select the relevant OCH Group.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Run the APE process with Delete Channels option activated.

How to tune the transmission path for deletion manually

�ote: For all the following steps, you must follow the signal direction from Rx to Tx.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

To tune the transmission path manually (without SPLM), perform the following steps for

all the entities crossed by the OCH Trail:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Set all involved amplifiers to GAI� mode.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Set the ALC initial target reference power for all involved ALCT boards.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Set channel power of involved WMA�3x to minimum (-27 dBm).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Update the ALC power resulting from the new configuration for all involved ALCT

boards.

For detailed information, refer to 1626 LM System Turn-up Guide.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Set all involved amplifiers back to Power-MSV mode.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



10-15

R/TR-OADM Unitary Procedures/WMAN3x74 Based

Overview

Purpose

This section describes the R and TR-OADM management procedures when you are

required to focus on a specific node, rather than on a network perspective. In this context,

your node configuration is based on WMA�3x74 boards.

Contents

Performing R-OADM and TR-OADM Cross Connections 10-17

Blocking a Channel Connection 10-19

Setting an Add & Drop Connection 10-20

Setting an Express Connection 10-23

R-OADM and TR-OADM Configuration Management R/TR-OADM Unitary Procedures/WMAN3x74 BasedOverview

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Performing R-OADM and TR-OADM Cross Connections

Purpose

Use this procedure when you want to create cross connections for Express or Add & Drop

channel connections for R-OADM or TR-OADM nodes with WMA�3x74 boards.

�ote: To know how to delete a cross connection, refer to“Deleting Cross

Connections” (p. 12-12)

Before you begin

• Remind that this procedure applies only if WMA�3x74 boards are used.

• You must have the complete cabling plan of your configuration.

How to perform R-OADM and TR-OADM Cross Connections

To perform R-OADM and TR-OADM cross connections, perform the following steps:

If you want to set ... Then, perform the following cross connections ...

an Express connection 1. From the cross connection management window, click

Create.

2. Select the input TP.

The input TP consists in the channel frequency of the splitter

board input related to one direction/OTS, identified by the

following

format<rack/subrack/slot>,port#1,<channel

frequency>,OMSoch

3. From available output TP list, select the relevant output TP.

The output TP consists in the channel frequency of the splitter

board input related to the other direction/OTS, identified by

the following format

<rack/subrack/slot>,port#1,<same channel

frequency>,OMSoch.

4. To configure the Express path, refer to “Setting an Express

Connection” (p. 10-23).

5. End.

R-OADM and TR-OADM Configuration Management R/TR-OADM Unitary Procedures/WMAN3x74 BasedPerforming R-OADM and TR-OADM Cross Connections

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



10-17

If you want to set ... Then, perform the following cross connections ...

an Add & Drop

connection1. From the cross connection management window, click

Create.

2. Select the input TP.

The input TP consists in the channel frequency of the splitter

board input, identified by the following

formatport#1,<channel frequency>,OMSoch

3. From available output TP list, select the relevant output TP.

The output TP consists in:

• For TR-OADM: the TDMX board which connects the

relevant TRBD board, identified by the following format

<rack/subrack/slot>,<any available port

from 1 to 8>,OGPIoch

• For R-OADM: the CMDX board which connects the

relevant TRBD board, identified by the following format

<rack/subrack/slot>,<port#101 to 108>,

OGPIoch

4. To configure an Add & Drop path, refer to“Setting an Add &

Drop Connection” (p. 10-20).

5. End.

R-OADM and TR-OADM Configuration Management R/TR-OADM Unitary Procedures/WMAN3x74 BasedPerforming R-OADM and TR-OADM Cross Connections

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Blocking a Channel Connection

Purpose

Use this procedure, when you want to block a channel connection.

Before you begin



• The channel connection state must be either:

– Add & Drop, or

– Express.

How to block a channel connection

To block a channel connection perform the following step:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Delete the relevant cross connection.

To know how to delete a cross connection, refer to “Deleting Cross Connections”

(p. 12-12).

Result:

• If the channel connection initial state is Add & Drop:

– On the relevant WMA� boards, Input value 0 (BLOCKED) is assigned to the

relevant channel frequency.

– On WDM side, the relevant transponder laser is switched off.

– On the WDM side, the relevant transponder receiver is set to Force Loss: On.

– In case of TR-OADM configuration, the relevant TDMX board is blocked.

• If the channel connection initial state is Express:

– On the relevant WMA� boards, Input value 0 (BLOCKED) is assigned to the

relevant channel frequency.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

R-OADM and TR-OADM Configuration Management R/TR-OADM Unitary Procedures/WMAN3x74 BasedBlocking a Channel Connection

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



10-19

Setting an Add & Drop Connection

Purpose

Use this procedure, when you want to set an Add & Drop connection for a given channel

frequency.

Before you begin



• When you want to set an Add & Drop connection, the channel connection state can be

either:

– Blocked (Refer to “Channel Connection Initial State is Blocked” (p. 10-20)), or

– Express (Refer to “Channel Connection Initial State is Express” (p. 10-21)), or

– Add & Drop (Refer to “Channel Connection Initial State is Add & Drop (For

TR-OADM only)” (p. 10-22).

Channel Connection Initial State is Blocked

To set an Add & Drop connection when initial channel connection state is Blocked,


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Create the cross connection for the Add & Drop connection.

To know how to create a cross connection, refer to “How to perform R-OADM and

TR-OADM Cross Connections” (p. 10-17).

Result:






• On the relevant WMA� boards, the required channel frequency is assigned to the

relevant Add & Drop input port number which connects the related transponder

board.

• Channel output power of relevant WMA� boards is set to minimum (-27 dBm /

Blocked).

R-OADM and TR-OADM Configuration Management R/TR-OADM Unitary Procedures/WMAN3x74 BasedSetting an Add & Drop Connection

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Channel Connection Initial State is Express

To set an Add & Drop connection when channel connection initial state is Express,


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Delete the exiting cross connection dedicated to the Express connection.


(p. 12-12).


Inputvalue 0 (BLOCKED).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Create the cross connection for the newAdd & Drop connection.



Result:








board.


Blocked).


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



10-21

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Channel Connection Initial State is Add & Drop (For TR-OADM only)

To set an Add & Drop connection when channel connection initial state is Add & Drop.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Delete the cross connection dedicated to the exiting Add & Drop connection.


(p. 12-12).

Result:

• On the relevant WMA� boards, the relevant channel frequency is assigned to

Inputvalue 0 (BLOCKED).

• On the WDM side, the relevant transponder receiver is set to Force Loss: On.

• On relevant TDMX board, the relevant channel frequency is blocked.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Create the cross connection for the newAdd & Drop connection.



Result:








board.


Blocked).

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Setting an Express Connection

Purpose

Use this procedure, when you want to set an Express connection for a given channel

frequency.

Before you begin



• The channel connection initial state must be either:

– Blocked, or

– Add & Drop, or

– Express (TR-OADM only).

Find the right procedure quickly

According to the channel connection initial case, refer to one of the following:

• “Channel Connection Initial State is Blocked” (p. 10-23)

• “Channel Connection Initial State is Add & Drop” (p. 10-24)

• “Channel Connection Initial State is Express (For Degree higher than 2 only)”

(p. 10-24)

Channel Connection Initial State is Blocked

To set an Express connection when channel connection initial state is Blocked, perform

the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Create the relevant cross connection.

To know how to create a cross connection, refer to “Performing R-OADM and


Result:On the two relevant WMA� boards, the required channel frequency is

assigned to the relevant Express input port number.

R-OADM and TR-OADM Configuration Management R/TR-OADM Unitary Procedures/WMAN3x74 BasedSetting an Express Connection

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



10-23

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Channel Connection Initial State is Add & Drop

To set an Express connection when channel connection initial state is Add & Drop,


...................................................................................................................................................................................................



(p. 12-12).

Result:

• If TR-OADM: on relevant TDMX board, the required channel frequency is

blocked.

• On the relevant WMA� boards, the relevant channel frequency is assigned to


• On the WDM side, the relevant transponder receiver is set to Force Loss: On.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Create the new cross connection.





Channel Connection Initial State is Express (For Degree higher than 2 only)

To set an Express connection when channel connection initial state is Express, perform

the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................



(p. 12-12).



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Create the new cross connection.




...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................



E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



10-25

R-OADM Unitary Procedures / WMAN1100 Based

Overview

Purpose

This section describes:

• The configuration parameters of an R-OADM with WMA�1100 boards.

• The procedure for configuring an R-OADM with WMA�1100 boards.

when you are requested to focus R-OADM configuration on a specific node.

In this context, your R-OADM configuration is based on WMA�1100 boards.

Contents

R-OADM/WMA�1100 Based Configuration Parameters 10-27

Configuring R-OADM with WMA�1100 Boards 10-28

R-OADM and TR-OADM Configuration Management R-OADM Unitary Procedures / WMAN1100 BasedOverview

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



R-OADM/WMAN1100 Based Configuration Parameters

R-OADM / WMAN1100 Parameters

On a R-OADM configuration node with WMA�1100 boards, you can

configure/reconfigure channel connections by performing the following actions:

1. to determine Express and Add & Drop channel connections via frequency state as

shown in the following table:

Frequency State Values Description

Express The channel goes through the R-OADM node.

AddDrop1 The channel and its associated digital signal is extracted from

WDM line #1 toward client line. Then the channel and a new

digital signal from client line can be inserted into WDM line #1.



digital signal from client line can be inserted into WDM line #2.



digital signal from client line can be inserted into WDM line #1

A�D the channel and its associated digital signal is extracted

fromWDM line #2 toward client line. Then the channel and a

new digital signal from client line can be inserted into WDM line

#2.

Blocked The channel is blocked. There is no transmission whatever the

frequency state is.

2. To assign power attenuation for transmission optimization.

See Also

“Configuring R-OADM with WMA�1100 Boards” (p. 10-28)

R-OADM and TR-OADM Configuration Management R-OADM Unitary Procedures / WMAN1100 BasedR-OADM/WMAN1100 Based Configuration Parameters

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



10-27

Configuring R-OADM with WMAN1100 Boards

Purpose

Use this procedure when you want to configure Express and Add & Drop channel

connections in an R-OADM node, WMA�1100 based.

Before you begin

R-OADM configuration must be complete:

• Boards are declared and In Service.

• Cabling has been configured.

• Contradirectionality has been configured.

• Update Transmission has been performed.

How to configure R-OADM with WMAN1100 Boards

To configure R-OADM with WMA�1100 boards, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Configuration > R-OADM.

Result:The R-OADM Overview window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select the frequency to configure.

Result:The R-OADM Configuration window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Assign the relevant State and attenuations for the selected frequency.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Repeat from step 2 as many time as frequencies need to be configured.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Click Apply.

Good to Know

• To assign a given state to all frequencies, use Global Settings list box.

• To assign a given state to pre-selected frequencies, use Selected Settings list box.

• To set an attenuation value between input/output of a WMA� board, use relevant SET

OTS X > Y buttons, where X and Y are the OTS.

• To set an attenuation tolerance to the assigned attenuation, use relevant VAR OTS X >

Y buttons, where X and Y are the OTS.

R-OADM and TR-OADM Configuration Management R-OADM Unitary Procedures / WMAN1100 BasedConfiguring R-OADM with WMAN1100 Boards

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

See Also

“R-OADM/WMA�1100 Based Configuration Parameters” (p. 10-27)

R-OADM and TR-OADM Configuration Management R-OADM Unitary Procedures / WMAN1100 BasedConfiguring R-OADM with WMAN1100 Boards

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



10-29

11 11Transmission Management

Overview

Purpose

Transmission is a major topic in the 1626 LM management.

It is a representation of the transmission process with all the involved functional blocks.

From the transmission representation, you can perform a lot of operation tasks such as:

• Loopbacks,

• Performance Monitoring,

• Cross Connections,

• etc.

For clarity and relevancy purposes, a special focus has been done on specific operation

management subjects in specific chapters.

This chapter is limited to particular transmission parameters and configuration

procedures.

Contents

About Transmission Management Entities 11-2

The Main Transmission Management Entities 11-2

About RS-TTI and J0 Configuration 11-7

Introducing RS-TTI and J0 11-7

Configuring the RS-TTI/J0 11-9

About TTI (Trail Trace Identifiers) Configuration 11-10

Introducing Optical TTIs (Trail Trace Identifiers) 11-10

Configuring TTIs 11-12

Managing Error Correction 11-14

Enabling the FEC (Forward Error Correction) 11-15

Disabling the FEC (Forward Error Correction) 11-16

Modifying the BER (Bit Error Rate) Threshold 11-17

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



11-1

About Transmission Management Entities

The Main Transmission Management Entities

Transmission management enables to visualize the different TP (Termination Points)

involved in the transport processing functions supported by the 1626 LM boards.

According to their location in the transport process, 1626 LM boards have OGPI and/or

OTS ports.

OGPI ports

OGPI port is a bidirectional access point for a User-Client or a Line to Mux signal type.

A User-Client signal type is a fixed wavelength to be multiplexed in a Mux.

A Line to Mux signal type is a single or a set of wavelengths to be multiplexed in a Mux.

OTS ports

OTS port is a bidirectional access point for a WDM line signal type.

AWDM line signal transports a set of multiplexed wavelengths.

• Figure 11-1, “OGPI Ports and Associated Boards” (p. 11-3) illustrate the OGPI ports

of 1626 LM boards.

• Figure 11-2, “OTS Ports and Associated Boards” (p. 11-4) illustrates the OTS ports of

1626 LM boards.

Transmission Management About Transmission Management EntitiesThe Main Transmission Management Entities

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Figure 11-1 OGPI Ports and Associated Boards


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



11-3

Transport processing functions are compliant with the G.798 and G.709 standards.

In the 1626 LM context, the transport processing functions are represented by:

• TTP (Trail Termination Point),

• CTP (Connection Termination Point)

TTP (Trail Termination Point)

ATTP represents a point of insertion/extraction of adapted information to a given

network layer.

Figure 11-2 OTS Ports and Associated Boards


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



CTP (Connection termination Point)

ACTP represents a point of transfer and adaptation between two network layers.

Table 11-1, “TP (Termination Points)” (p. 11-5) describes the TP involved in the signal

transport.

Table 11-1 TP (Termination Points)

TP Meaning Description

OGPI Optical Generic Physical Interface TTP.

The access point for a single wavelength.

Corresponds to the client port. Hosts the

features of the optical port.

OTS Optical Transport Section TTP.

The access point for multiplexed wavelength.

Corresponds to the WDM line port. Hosts the

features of the optical port.WDM line signal

type

PGPloch Optical Generic Physical Interface / optical

channel

CTP.

The point where the adaptation between OGPI

and OCH occurs.

OCH Optical Channel TTP.

The point where the optoelectrical conversion

occurs.

OTU Optical Transmission Unit TTP.

The points where:

• FEC (Forward Error Correction) is created.

• Encapsulation / Decapsulation of G.709

frame takes place.

ODU Optical Data Unit

TM Trail Monitor TTP. This is the point where monitoring

information can be red.

RSgdc Regenerator Section/generic data client CTP.

The point where adaptation between RS and a

generic client occurs.

In the 1626 LM context, generic client is

Ethernet or Fiber Channel.

RsTTP Regenerator Section Trail Termination Point TTP.

The point where SDH encapsulation /

decapsulation occurs.

OMoch Optical Multiplex Section/optical channel CTP.

The point where the adaptation between OMS

and OCH occurs.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



11-5

Table 11-1 TP (Termination Points) (continued)

TP Meaning Description

OMS Optical Multiplex Section TTP.

The point where wavelength multiplexing

occurs.

OMSots Optical Multiplex Section/Adaptation CTP.

The point where adaptation between OMS and

OTS occurs

OMS-band Optical Multiplex Section/band CTP.

This is the point where adaptation of a set of

wavelength occurs.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



About RS-TTI and J0 Configuration

Introducing RS-TTI and J0

The RS-TTI (Regenerator Section - Trail Trace Identifier) is a connectivity control entity

dedicated for SDH frame.

This entity is carried by the RS overhead of the SDH frame via one byte called J0.

You configure the RS-TTI on each node of your transmission network, by indicating how

the J0 byte will be composed.

The RS-TTI is inserted in an SDH frame in the J0 byte at the source of a trail for

transmission.

At the sink of a trail, the received RS-TTI is compared with the expected one. Any

mismatch between the expected value and the received value means that there is an

integrity problem in your transmission process. In this case a TIM (Trail Identifier

Mismatch) alarm is raised.

You configure RS-TTI for the following boards:

• ETHC,

• 2*GBE_FC,

• TRBC,

• TRBD1191 only.

Transmission Management About RS-TTI and J0 ConfigurationIntroducing RS-TTI and J0

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



11-7

RS-TTI/J0 Parameters

Table 11-2, “RS-TTI/J0 Parameters” (p. 11-8) gives a description of RS-TTI/J0

configuration parameters.

Table 11-2 RS-TTI/J0 Parameters

RS-TTI/J0

parameters

Description

TX Side/Transmitted

This is the area where you configure the RS-TTI insertion for Ethernet boards only.

Mode 1 In this mode, you configure a RS-TTI which length needs to be greater than 1 byte but

less than 15 bytes.

You must process as follows:

1. You enter a 15 characters word in the entry field, on the right.

2. You calculate the associated transmission error control value type CRC7 (Cyclic

Redundancy Check 7) via the CRC7 button. The CRC7 value is displayed in the

CRC7 field.

3. Optionally, you can configure the expected RS-TTI in the RX Side / Expected area.

Each SDH frame is transmitted with a J0 byte which is successively composed of one

character of the 15 characters word.

At the end of 15 transmissions, the sink node receive the CRC7 code and checks the

consistency between the successive fifteen characters and the corresponding expected

{15 characters word, CRC7 value}.

If the sink node cannot rebuild the 15 characters word, the transmission integrity is not

guaranteed and a TIM (Trail Identifier Mismatch) alarm is raised.

One repeat Byte In this mode, you enter a one character RS-TTI.

Each SDH frame carries the RS-TTI via the J0 byte. The sink node checks the

consistency between the transmitted and the expected RS-TTI. In case of mismatch, a

TIM (Trail Identifier Mismatch) alarm is raised.

RX Side /Received This is the area where you see the received RS-TTI.

RX Side /Expected This is the area where you see the expected RS-TTI.

This area is optional for Ethernet and TRBx boards.

For TRBx boards, this is the area where you configure the expected RS-TTI, if you

decide to monitor it.

By default, the RS-TTI monitoring is disabled.

To enable the RS-TTI configuration, you must:

1. Click STM Mon. Disabled. The button turns to STM Mon. Enabled.

2. Refer to Mode 1 or to One repeat Byte related information to know how to

complete the necessary fields.

See Also

“Configuring the RS-TTI/J0” (p. 11-9)

Transmission Management About RS-TTI and J0 ConfigurationIntroducing RS-TTI and J0

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Configuring the RS-TTI/J0

Purpose

Use this procedure to configure the RS-TTI/J0.

Before you begin

• Transmission view of relevant Ethernet or TRBx board is displayed.

• Depending on the type of board, RSTTP or TM transmission block is selected.

How to configure the RS-TTI/J0

To configure the RS-TTI/J0, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Right-click the selected transmission block and select Path Trace Configuration.

Result:The J0 Configuration window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 According to the selected board and to your operation rules, complete:

• the TX Side / Transmitted area only, or

• the TX Side / Transmitted and RX side / expected areas.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 To enable RX Side / Expected area, click STM Mon. Disabled.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click Apply to finish.

See Also

• “About RS-TTI and J0 Configuration” (p. 11-7)

• Table 11-2, “RS-TTI/J0 Parameters” (p. 11-8)

Transmission Management About RS-TTI and J0 ConfigurationConfiguring the RS-TTI/J0

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



11-9

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

About TTI (Trail Trace Identifiers) Configuration

Introducing Optical TTIs (Trail Trace Identifiers)

The various optical TTIs (Trail Trace Identifiers)

Optical TTIs enable to check the connectivity between WDM nodes at different levels:

• ODU-TTI (Optical Data Unit TTI) enables to check the matching of data transmitted

between two WDM nodes, through regeneration units.

• OTU-TTI (Optical Transport Unit TTI) enables to check the matching of optical

channels connections between two WDM nodes.

• OTS-TTI (Optical Transport Section TTI) enables to check the matching of optical

lines between two WDM nodes.

You configure the TTI on each node of your transmission network, by indicating how the

SAPI and DAPI will be composed.

SAPI means Source Address Point Identifier.

DAPI means Destination Address Point Identifier.

SAPI and DAPI enable to identify the source and the destination, both of them in a 16

bytes field.

A specific 32 bytes field is provided for operator use.

The TTI is inserted at the source of a trail for transmission.

At the sink of a trail, the received TTI is compared with the expected one. Any mismatch

between the expected value and the received value means that there is an integrity

problem in your transmission process. In this case a TIM (Trail Identifier Mismatch)

alarm is raised.

You can configure the TTIs as follows:

• OTU-TTI applies to TRBC and TRBD boards (10 and 40 Gbps), line side.

• OTS-TTI applies to LOFA boards supporting a line/OTS.

• ODU-TTI applies to 10 Gbps TRBC and TRBD boards, line side.

Transmission Management About TTI (Trail Trace Identifiers) ConfigurationIntroducing Optical TTIs (Trail Trace Identifiers)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



TTI Parameters

Table 11-3 TTI Parameters

TTI Parameters Description

Received This is the area where you see the received TTI with received SAPI and DAPI if

configured.

Expected This is the area where you enter the expected SAPI and DAPI to be received from the

source.

You activate the SAPI and DAPI fields via the associated check boxes.

Sent This is the area where you enter the SAPI and DAPI to be transmitted to the destination.

You can use for internal use the 32 bytes Specific to operator field.

See Also

“Configuring TTIs” (p. 11-12)

Transmission Management About TTI (Trail Trace Identifiers) ConfigurationIntroducing Optical TTIs (Trail Trace Identifiers)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



11-11

Configuring TTIs

Purpose

Use this procedure to configure OTU, OTS or ODU TTIs.

Before you begin

According to the TTI you want to configure, you must comply with the following rules:

• For OTU-TTI: port#101-OTU transmission block of a TRBC or a TRBD board is

selected.

• For OTS-TTI:

– If required: LOFA contradirectionality is configured and transmission update is

performed.

– OSCU board is installed, declared and cabled.

– port#1-OTS transmission block of a reception LOFA board is selected.

• For ODU-TTI:

– If UNI configuration: port#101-ODU2 transmission block of 10 Gbps

TRBC/TRBD board is selected.

You recognize a U�I configuration when port#101-ODU2 transmission block islinked to port#1-OCH transmission blocks on user/client side.

– If NNI configuration: TM(Trail Monitor) of port#101-OTU transmission block of

a TRBD board is selected.

You recognize a ��I configuration when port#1-OTU transmission block ispresent.

How to configure TTIs

To configure TTIs, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Right-click on the relevant transmission block and select:

• For OTS-TTI, OTU-TTI and [ODU-TTI (U�I configuration)]: Trail Trace

Management>On TP

• For ODU-TTI in a ��I configuration: Trail Trace Management>On TM.

Result:The Trail Trace Configuration window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 If required, complete the Expected and/or Sent areas.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click OK.

Transmission Management About TTI (Trail Trace Identifiers) ConfigurationConfiguring TTIs

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

See Also

• “About TTI (Trail Trace Identifiers) Configuration” (p. 11-10)

• Table 11-3, “TTI Parameters” (p. 11-11)

Transmission Management About TTI (Trail Trace Identifiers) ConfigurationConfiguring TTIs

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



11-13

Managing Error Correction

Overview

Purpose

This chapter describes the procedure to perform when you want:

• to enable or disable the FEC (Forward Error Correction),

• to modify the BER (Bit Error Rate).

Contents

Enabling the FEC (Forward Error Correction) 11-15

Disabling the FEC (Forward Error Correction) 11-16

Modifying the BER (Bit Error Rate) Threshold 11-17

Transmission Management Managing Error CorrectionOverview

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Enabling the FEC (Forward Error Correction)

Purpose

Use this procedure to enable the FEC process.

Before you begin

• OCH transmission block of line port is displayed.

• FEC is disabled.

How to enable the FEC

To enable the FEC process, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Transmission>Enable FEC.

Result:The OCH transmission block is updated and displays a F.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Transmission Management Managing Error CorrectionEnabling the FEC (Forward Error Correction)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



11-15

Disabling the FEC (Forward Error Correction)

Purpose

Use this procedure to disable the FEC process.

Before you begin


• FEC is enabled.

How to disable the FEC

To disable the FEC process, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Transmission>Disable FEC.

Result:The OCH transmission block is updated and the F disappears.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Transmission Management Managing Error CorrectionDisabling the FEC (Forward Error Correction)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Modifying the BER (Bit Error Rate) Threshold

Purpose

Use this procedure to modify the BER threshold.

Good to Know

You act on the BER (Bit Error Rate) by configuring the LTCER (Low Threshold

Corrected Error Rate).

Before you begin


• FEC is enabled.

How to modify the BER Threshold

To modify the BER threshold, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Right click the OCH transmission block of line port and select BER Threshold

Configuration....

Result:The LTCER Configuration window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the Low Threshold Set list box, select the LTCER value (from 10-3 to 10-8).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click OK.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Transmission Management Managing Error CorrectionModifying the BER (Bit Error Rate) Threshold

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



11-17

12 12Cross Connection

Management

Overview

Purpose

In the current release, cross connections are used:

• in ETHC and TRBD1191 boards,

• in splitter boards for R-OADM and TR-OADM configuration.

Cross Connections enable:

• to connect ETHC User-Client traffic to lines toward Mux,

• to connect ETHC User-Client traffic to TRBD1191 lines,

• to enable express or add & drop path in R-OADM and TR-OADM configuration.

This chapter describes the procedure to perform when you want to manage cross

connections.

To have detailed information about cross connections used in specific board configuration

context, refer to the following:


• “About TRBD1191 Board” (p. 9-11)

• Chapter 10, “R-OADM and TR-OADM Configuration Management”.

Contents

About Cross Connections 12-2

Cross Connection Types 12-3

Cross Connections Parameters 12-4

Managing Cross Connections 12-7

Displaying Cross Connections for a Subrack 12-8

Displaying Cross Connections for a Board 12-9

Creating Cross Connections 12-10

Modifying Cross Connections 12-11

Deleting Cross Connections 12-12

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



12-1

About Cross Connections

Overview

Purpose

This topic:

• gives a quick overview of the different cross connection types,

• describes the cross connections parameters.

To have detailed information about cross connections used in specific board configuration

context, refer to the following:




Contents

Cross Connection Types 12-3

Cross Connections Parameters 12-4

Cross Connection Management About Cross ConnectionsOverview

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Cross Connection Types

In the current release, you establish bidirectional cross connections to connect:

• ETHC line to ETHC XFP line (mandatory)

• TRBD1191 line to User-Client XFP (mandatory)

• ETHC line to TRBD1191 line (depending on configuration) through the backplane

• R-OADM and TR-OADM express and add & drop paths.

�ote:You cannot modify an existing cross connection.

See Also



• “Cross Connections Parameters” (p. 12-4)

• “Managing Cross Connections” (p. 12-7)


Cross Connection Management About Cross ConnectionsCross Connection Types

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



12-3

Cross Connections Parameters

The following table describes the relevant cross connection parameters.

Table 12-1 Cross Connection Parameters


Prot. State Indicates the protection state.

Only used in protection context.

Normal P

Protection path is active. �o alarms.

Normal I

Main path is active. �o alarms.

Auto P

Protection path is active. Alarms are

raised on the main path.

Auto I

Main path is active. Alarms are

raised on the protection path.

Lockout I

The traffic is locked on the main

path.

The protection is disabled.

Forced P

The traffic is forced on the

protection path. �o alarms.

SNCP For future use. �one.

State Indicates the state of the cross

connection.

A

Active cross connection.

Dir. Indicates the cross connection

direction

Uni

The connection is unidirectional.

Bi

The connection is bidirectional.

Input Indicates the input point of a cross

connection.

Sequence giving the following

information:

• rack#

• subrack#

• slot#

• port#

• Termination Point identifier

Cross Connection Management About Cross ConnectionsCross Connections Parameters

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Table 12-1 Cross Connection Parameters (continued)


Protecting

Input

Indicates the protecting entity of a

protection system.

• �ot used in cross connection

management context.

• Only used for protection

management context.


information:

• rack#

• subrack#

• slot#

• port#


Output Indicates the output point of a cross

connection.


information:

• rack#

• subrack#

• slot#

• port#


Revertive A protection characteristic:

• A revertive protection refers to a

mechanism where the transport

and selection of the normal

traffic signal (service) always

returns to (or remains on) the

working transport entity if the

switch requests are terminated;

i.e., when the working transport

entity has recovered from the

defect or the external request is

cleared.

• A non revertive protection refers

to a mechanism, where the

transport and selection of the

normal traffic signal does not

return to the working transport

entity if the switch requests are

terminated.

Only used for protection.

• Checked

The protection is revertive.

Revertive protection refers to

OS�CP protection for

User-Client signals. Such

protection type is supported by

40 Gbps transponders and

TRBD1191, 10 Gbps

transponder only.

• Unchecked

The protection is not revertive.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



12-5

Table 12-1 Cross Connection Parameters (continued)


WRT Wait to Restore Time.

A period of time that must elapse

before a transport entity that has

recovered from a Signal Fail (SF) or

Signal Degrade (SD) condition can

be used again to transport the normal

traffic signal and/or to select the

normal traffic signal from.


0 to 60,000 seconds

HOT Hold Of Time.

A delay that prevents an autonomous

switch of a protected channel to the

protecting path for the configured

time following identification that an

autonomous protection switch is

required.


0 to 10,000 milliseconds

See Also

• “About Cross Connections ” (p. 12-2)

• “Cross Connection Types” (p. 12-3)

• “Managing Cross Connections” (p. 12-7)


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Managing Cross Connections

Overview

Purpose

This topic describes the procedure to perform when you want to manage cross

connections.

Contents

Displaying Cross Connections for a Subrack 12-8

Displaying Cross Connections for a Board 12-9

Creating Cross Connections 12-10

Modifying Cross Connections 12-11

Deleting Cross Connections 12-12

Cross Connection Management Managing Cross ConnectionsOverview

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



12-7

Displaying Cross Connections for a Subrack

Purpose

Use this procedure to display cross connections at subrack level.

Before you begin


How to display cross connections for a subrack

To display cross connection for a subrack, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Configuration > Cross Connection Management.

Result:The Cross Connection Management window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Click Search.

Result:The list of existing cross connections appears.

See Also

“Cross Connections Parameters” (p. 12-4)

Cross Connection Management Managing Cross ConnectionsDisplaying Cross Connections for a Subrack

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Displaying Cross Connections for a Board

Purpose

Use this procedure to display cross connections at board level.

Before you begin

Transmission View window of the relevant board is displayed.

How to display cross connections for a board

To display cross connections for a board, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the Transmission View window, identify the transmission blocks with a cross.

Result:The cross indicates that a cross connection is effective between the two

blocks.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select the transmission block indicating a cross connection and right-click Cross

Connection>Cross Connection Management.

See Also

“Cross Connections Parameters” (p. 12-4)

Cross Connection Management Managing Cross ConnectionsDisplaying Cross Connections for a Board

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



12-9

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Creating Cross Connections

Purpose

Use this procedure to create cross connections.

Before you begin

• Transmission View of eligible board is displayed.

• You know the type of TP to cross connect.

How to create cross connections

To create cross connections, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select the input TP.

Result:The selected TP is highligthed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Right-click and select Cross Connection>Create Cross Connection.

Result:The Main Cross Connection window is displayed. The input field is prefilled

with the selected TP.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click Choose... to select the output TP.

Result:The Choose a Cross Connectable TP window is displayed and lists the

relevant TP available for cross connection.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Select the relevant output TP and click OK.

Result:The Main Cross Connection window is refreshed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


See Also




Cross Connection Management Managing Cross ConnectionsCreating Cross Connections

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Modifying Cross Connections

Purpose

Use this procedure to modify protection cross connections.

Before you begin

• You can modify cross connections only if they are revertive. Revertive cross

connections refer to OS�CP protection for User-Client signals. Such protection type

is supported by 40 Gbps transponders and TRBD1191, 10 Gbps transponder only.

How to modify cross connections

To modify cross connections, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Configuration>Cross Connection Management.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Click Search

Result:The list of existing cross connections appear.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Identify the cross connections dedicated to protection: Protecting Input column filled.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Select the relevant row.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Click Modify.

Result:The Main Cross Connection window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Modify one of the following:

• Revertive:If you uncheck the box, the protection becomes non revertive.

• WTR:The Wait to Restore Time. You can modify the value of this parameter.

• HOT:The Hold Off Time. You can modify the value of this parameter.

To know more about these parameters, refer to “Cross Connections Parameters” (p. 12-4)

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Cross Connection Management Managing Cross ConnectionsModifying Cross Connections

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



12-11

Deleting Cross Connections

Purpose

Use this procedure to delete cross connections.

Before you begin


How to delete cross connections

To delete cross connections, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Cross Connection>Create Cross Connection.

Result:The Cross Connection Managementwindow is displayed and lists the

existing cross connections.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select the cross connection to delete.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click Delete.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click OK to confirm the deletion.

Result:The cross connection disappears from the list.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


See Also




• Performing R-OADM and TR-OADM Cross Connections

Cross Connection Management Managing Cross ConnectionsDeleting Cross Connections

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

13 13Connector and Cabling

Management

Overview

Purpose

Connectors are the interfaces which enable the cabling:

• among the 1626 LM boards,

• with external transmission devices.

This chapter describes the procedures to perform when you want:

• to set in/out of service connectors,

• to declare the cabling between two connectors.

• to export the cabling configuration to an XML file.

Contents

Setting Connectors In Service 13-2

Setting Connectors Out Of Service 13-3

Configuring the Cabling between 2 Connectors 13-4

Deleting the Cabling between 2 Connectors 13-5

Exporting the Cabling Configuration to an XML File 13-6

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



13-1

Setting Connectors In Service

Purpose

Use this procedure to set connectors in service.

Before you begin


• The connectors are not in service.

How to set connectors in service

To set connectors in service, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Configuration > Connectors/Cabling...

Result:The Connectors Configuration window appears.

The list of racks, subracks, boards and channels are displayed in a tree structure. Foreach of these managed entities, you can expand or collapse the tree via + or - signs.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 If necessary, expand the tree until the relevant board.

Result:The connectors appear.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Select the relevant connectors.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click Set In Service.

Result:The connector status becomes In Service (Red Padlock is displayed).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Connector and Cabling Management Setting Connectors In Service

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Setting Connectors Out Of Service

Purpose

Use this procedure to set connectors out of service.

Before you begin


• The connectors are in service.

How to set connectors out of service

To set connectors out of service, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Configuration > Connectors/Cabling...



...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Select the relevant connectors.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click Set Out Of Service.

Result:The connector status becomes Out Of Service (Red Padlock is not displayed).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Connector and Cabling Management Setting Connectors Out Of Service

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



13-3

Configuring the Cabling between 2 Connectors

Purpose

Use this procedure to configure the cabling between 2 connectors.

Before you begin



• If you run SPLM for line optimization, any action on Rx and Tx Tributary

connections at physical or configuration level, requires SPLM synchronization.

How to configure the cabling between 2 connectors

To configure the cabling between 2 connectors, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Configuration>Connectors/Cabling...



...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 In the Cable row, select the cell corresponding to the connector to connect.

Result:The two cells corresponding to input and output channels are highlighted.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 If necessary, on the left, expand the tree until the relevant board.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 In the Cable row, select a cell corresponding to the connector to connect with.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click on Add Cable.

Result:Two arrows appears, representing the cabling configuration direction.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Connector and Cabling Management Configuring the Cabling between 2 Connectors

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Deleting the Cabling between 2 Connectors

Purpose

Use this procedure to delete the cabling between 2 connectors.

Before you begin



• If you run SPLM for line optimization, any action on Rx and Tx Tributary

connections at physical or configuration level, requires SPLM synchronization.

How to delete the cabling between 2 connectors

To delete the cabling between 2 connectors, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Configuration>Connectors/Cabling...



...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 In the Cable row, select the cell corresponding to the connector to connect.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click on Delete Cable.

Result:Two arrows disappear from the input and output channel cells.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Connector and Cabling Management Deleting the Cabling between 2 Connectors

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



13-5

Exporting the Cabling Configuration to an XML File

Purpose

Use this procedure when you want to export the cabling configuration of a rack to an

XML file.

Before you begin


• Cabling has been configured.

• The required rack view is displayed

How to export the cabling configuration to an XML file

To export the cabling configuration to an XML file, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Equipment > Instantaneous Measurements on > Selected Object.

Result:The Instantaneous Measurements window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Click Export Cabling to XML

Result:A browsing window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Select the location where you want to save the XML file and click OK.

Result:The cabling configuration is saved into an XML file.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Connector and Cabling Management Exporting the Cabling Configuration to an XML File

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



14 14Loopback Tests

Overview

Purpose

This chapter describes the parameters and procedures to follow when you want to

perform loopbacks for test purposes.

Contents

About Loopbacks 14-2

Introducing Loopbacks 14-2

Loopback Parameters in Display Mode 14-3

Loopback Parameters in Creation Mode 14-5

Managing loopbacks 14-6

Displaying Existing Loopbacks 14-7

Creating Loopbacks 14-8

Deleting Loopbacks 14-9

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



14-1

About Loopbacks

Introducing Loopbacks

Loopbacks are performed for troubleshooting purposes to identify faults in the

transmission path with the help of an external test device. The external test device is used

to compare the outgoing and returning signals. The result of the loopback is shown on the

external test device.

In the current release, you can create:

• a «loopback and continue» test on:

– OGPI ports / WDM side of ETHC, 2xGBE_FC or 10 Gbps TRBC/TRBD boards.

– OGPI ports / User-Client side of 40 Gbps TRBC boards and 10 Gbps

TRBC/TRBD boards.

• a «loopback and cut» test on:

– OGPI ports / WDM side of 40 Gbps TRBC/TRBD boards.

– OGPI ports / User-Client side of ETHC and 40Gbps TRBD boards .

Important!You cannot create a loopback on both user and line sides at the same

time.

• Figure 14-1, “Loopback and Continue User/Client Side” (p. 14-2) and Figure 14-2,

“Loopback and Continue Line Side” (p. 14-3) illustrate loopback and continue

concept.

• Figure 14-3, “Loopback and Cut Line Side” (p. 14-3) illustrates loop and cut concept.

Figure 14-1 Loopback and Continue User/Client Side

Loopback Tests About LoopbacksIntroducing Loopbacks

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



See Also

• “Loopback Parameters in Display Mode” (p. 14-3)

• “Loopback Parameters in Creation Mode” (p. 14-5)

• “Displaying Existing Loopbacks” (p. 14-7)

• “Creating Loopbacks” (p. 14-8)

• “Deleting Loopbacks” (p. 14-9)

Loopback Parameters in Display Mode

Figure 14-2 Loopback and Continue Line Side

Figure 14-3 Loopback and Cut Line Side

Loopback Tests About LoopbacksIntroducing Loopbacks

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



14-3

The following table describes loopback parameters in display mode.

Table 14-1 Loopback Parameters in Display Mode


Initial TP Identifies the TP supporting the

loopback.


information:

• rack#

• subrack#

• slot#

• port#


Destination TP In loopback context, this entity is the

same as the initial TP.

�ot used in the current release.


information:

• rack#

• subrack#

• slot#

• port#


LoopType Specific type of loopback.• Loop And Continue

• Loop And Cut

Directionality �ot used in the current release. �one.

See Also





Loopback Tests About LoopbacksLoopback Parameters in Display Mode

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Loopback Parameters in Creation Mode

The following table describes loopback parameters in creation mode.

Table 14-2 Loopback Parameters in Creation Mode


Seleted TP Identifies the TP supporting the

loopback.

This parameter is automatically

filled when you create a loopback

from the Transmission View.


information:

• rack#

• subrack#

• slot#

• port#


Loopback

Actions

�ot used in the current release. �one.

Timed

Loopbacks

�ot used in the current release. �one.

See Also





Loopback Tests About LoopbacksLoopback Parameters in Creation Mode

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



14-5

Managing loopbacks

Overview

Purpose

This topic describes the procedures to perform when you want to manage loopbacks.

Contents

Displaying Existing Loopbacks 14-7

Creating Loopbacks 14-8

Deleting Loopbacks 14-9

Loopback Tests Managing loopbacksOverview

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Displaying Existing Loopbacks

Purpose

Use this procedure to display existing loopbacks.

Before you begin


How to display existing loopbacks

To display existing loopbacks, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Configuration>Loopback Management.

Result:The Signal Loopback Management window is displayed and displays the

current loopbacks list.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


See Also





Loopback Tests Managing loopbacksDisplaying Existing Loopbacks

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



14-7

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Creating Loopbacks

Purpose

Use this procedure to create loopbacks.

Before you begin

Transmission View window of eligible board is displayed

How to create loopbacks

To create loopbacks, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select the relevant OGPI block.

Result:The selected OGPI block is highligthed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Right-click and select Loopback > Port Loopback Configuration.

Result:The Port Loopbacks Configuration window is displayed with the

Termination Point field prefilled.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click OK.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click OK to confirm the loopback creation.

Result:The Transmission View window is updated.

See Also





Loopback Tests Managing loopbacksCreating Loopbacks

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Deleting Loopbacks

Purpose

Use this procedure to delete loopbacks.

Before you begin


How to delete loopbacks

To delete loopbacks, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Configuration>Loopback Management.

Result:The Signal Loopback Management window is displayed and displays the

current loopbacks list.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the list, select the loopback to delete.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click Delete.

Result:The loopback disappears from the list.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


See Also





Loopback Tests Managing loopbacksDeleting Loopbacks

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



14-9

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

15 15Protection Management

Overview

Purpose

The 1626 LM is designed to provide uninterrupted service in all circumstances. The

system's protection function reacts automatically to signal failures or to abnormal

situations which may be due to circumstances outside the 1626 LM.

This chapter describes:

• the 1626 LM protection principles,

• the procedures to perform when you want to manage protection mechanisms.

Contents

About 1626 LM Protection 15-2

Protection Principles 15-3

Recommended Board Location 15-10

The Protection Activation Process 15-11

Managing Protection 15-13

Protection Displayed Information 15-14

Recognizing Cross Connections Dedicated to Protection 15-17

Controlling Protection 15-18

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



15-1

About 1626 LM Protection

Overview

Purpose

This topic describes the principles and the necessary information you must know to be

able to manage 1626 LM protection.

Contents

Protection Principles 15-3

Recommended Board Location 15-10

The Protection Activation Process 15-11

Protection Management About 1626 LM ProtectionOverview

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Protection Principles

OSNCP

Client signal and related transponder protection is driven by OS�CP (Optical

Sub�etwork Connection Protection).

OS�CP completely protects the optical path, including cable, amplifiers, mux/demux and

transponders. A high level of reliability is obtained by complete duplication of the

transmission hardware:

• On the transmitting side, an optical splitter (in an OCPU board) duplicates the client

signal for the working and protection lines before the connection to the transponders.

• On the Receiving side, both transponders are connected to a coupler in the same

OCPU board. The received signal to be sent to client equipment is selected by

switching on the laser (transmitting toward the client) on one transponder, while the

laser of the other transponder is switched off.

In the current release, OS�CP protection is implemented as illustrated in Figure 15-1,

“OSC�P Principles” (p. 15-3)

Figure 15-1 OSCNP Principles

Protection Management About 1626 LM ProtectionProtection Principles

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



15-3

OSNCP Mechanism

In normal operation, when protection is activated, only the "receive" laser on the main

transponder is switched on while the corresponding laser on the spare transponder is

switched off. The signal from the main transponder is sent to the client via the OCPU

board.

In case of failure detected by the main transponder, the receiving main transponder laser

is switched off. The spare transponder laser is switched on via the backplane link which

enables communication between main and spare transponders. The signal from the spare

transponder is sent to the client via the OCPU board as illustrated in Figure 15-2,

“OS�CPActivation” (p. 15-4)

Attention: OSNCP switching within 50 ms from the original fault is not possible

in the following circumstances:

• UE alarm is raised.

50 ms switching is not possible because the UE counter is examined every second.In this particular situation, OS�CP switching triggers between 50 ms and morethan 1 s.

• Loss of user/client signal at the far-end NE.

In this case, the far-end transponder inserts an AIS, which triggers a protectionswitch on the near-end �E. Although the protection mechanism reacts in less than50 ms in the near-end �E, the total interruption of service can be slightly higherthan 50 ms because it includes the detection time of the original fault on thefar-end, and the propagation time of the AIS signal from the far-end �E to thenear-end �E.

�ote: OS�CP revertive protection is implemented for the following boards only:

• 40 Gbps transponders,

• TRBD1191 (10 Gbps transponder).

Figure 15-2 OSNCP Activation


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Revertive Protection

Revertive protection refers to a mechanism where the transport and selection of the

normal traffic signal (service) always returns to (or remains on) the working transport

entity if the switch requests are terminated; i.e., when the working transport entity has

recovered from the defect or the external request is cleared.

Non Revertive Protection

�on revertive protection refers to a mechanism, where the transport and selection of the

normal traffic signal does not return to the working transport entity if the switch requests

are terminated.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



15-5

OMSP

WDM lines and related amplifier protection is driven by OMSP (Optical Multiplex

Section Protection).

OMSP completely protects the transmission line with the exception of transponders and

mux/demux. This type of protection is suitable to prevent traffic interruption in case of

damage to the transmission fiber cable . As transponders and mux/demux are not

duplicated, OMSP is an alternative to OS�CP at a lower cost, but does not protect against

equipment failures.

OMSP requires the following equipment:

• an OCPU 2100 board which implements a split and a switch function,

• a PSCU board which acts as a secondary protection controller and manages the OCPU

boards.

• an OSCU 1010 board which acts as a PSCU controller. The OSCU 1010 must have

the required functional variant to comply with OMSP.

In the current release, 1+1 non revertive protection is implemented as illustrated in figure

Figure 15-3, “Example of OMSP Implementation” (p. 15-6)

Figure 15-3 Example of OMSP Implementation


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



OMSP Mechanisms

In normal operation, when protection is activated, both receiving laser amplifiers are

working. Only the main amplifier is connected to the demultiplexer via the receiving

OCPU switch.

The OMSP switching event is triggered by:

• LOS detected on the site where the OMSP switching takes place if the affected span is

adjacent to the node itself.

• OMS-FDI forwarding on the OSC to signal a line failure on a remote span.

The following figure illustrates the two OMSP switching cases.

On detection of such failures, the receiving OSCU board communicates with PSCU board

via the backplane to request the receiving OCPU board to switch to the spare amplifier.

Figure 15-4 OMSP Switching cases


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



15-7

Transponder and Amplifier Boards

Depending on the type of protection, transponder and amplifier boards must follow

specific engineering rules.

OSNCP context

In OS�CP context, transponder and amplifier boards work by pairs. According to the slot

it is plugged in, a receiving board is either:

• a main or protected board, if it is plugged in an odd numbered slot, or

• a spare or protecting board, if it is plugged in an even numbered slot.

OMSP context

In OMSP context:

• Amplifier boards can be placed anywhere in the shelf where the OSCU board is

present. Via a configuration register, OSCU board is informed of the positions of

amplifier boards that communicate with it.

• PSCU board must be placed in slot 39.

Protection Control

As an operator, you can:

• force the traffic onto the spare board.

The traffic is handled by the spare/protecting board.

• lock the traffic onto the main board.

The traffic is exclusively handled by the main board. In this case the system behaves

as if there was no protection.

• cancel the force action.

• cancel the lock action.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Protection Implementation

In the 1626 LM, 1+1 protection is viewed as a set of cross connections that are

automatically created after board cabling. Cross connections are created among the

following entities:

• Input

This entity corresponds to the main or protected channel.

– In OS�CP context: it is given by the TP and the physical OCPU port connected

to the main transponder board.

– In OMSP context: it is given by the TP and the physical port location of the main

amplifier board.

• Protecting input

This entity corresponds to the spare or protected channel.

– In OS�CP context: it is given by the TP and the physical OCPU port connected

to the spare transponder board.

– In OMSP context: it is given by the TP and the physical port location of the spare

amplifier board.

• Output

Depending on the type of protection, this entity may represent either one of the

following:

– In OS�CP context: represents the OCPU board which routes the signal to the

User-Client network. It is given by the TP and the physical port location of this

OCPU board.

– In OMSP context: points to the line input port of the “client” board. In fixed

configurations it is a mux/demux board. In flexible configurations, it is a coupler

board.

As an operator, you can manage protection cross-connections only for OS�CP protection

if you need to change parameters related to revertive mode.

See Also

• “Recommended Board Location” (p. 15-10)

• “The Protection Activation Process” (p. 15-11)

• “Protection Displayed Information” (p. 15-14)

• “Recognizing Cross Connections Dedicated to Protection” (p. 15-17)

• “Controlling Protection” (p. 15-18)


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



15-9

Recommended Board Location

OS�CP and OMSP protection commissioning consists in a hardware installation and a

cabling declaration.

Client lines will be protected by OS�CP only if the boards are placed in specific slots.

At the same time, OCPU board location determines which transponders and amplifiers to

supervise.

To enable the protection mechanisms, you must comply with:

• the recommended OCPU, TRBx, PSCU3x locations noted in the installation guide,

and

• the recommended cabling plan.

See Also

• “Protection Principles” (p. 15-3)





Protection Management About 1626 LM ProtectionRecommended Board Location

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



The Protection Activation Process

To activate the protection functions, you must follow the following sequence of actions:

1. You must have the recommended installation engineering rules and cabling plan of

your configuration.

2. Install the required boards into the recommended slots.

OSNCP Case Plug TRBD/C and OCPU boards following

the recommended engineering rules.

Do not forget: TRBD/C work by pairs.

According to the slot it is plugged in, a

TRBD/C board is either:

• a main or protected board, if it is

plugged in an odd numbered slot, or

• a spare or protecting board, if it is

plugged in an even numbered slot.

OMSP Case Plug LOFA, OCPU, OSCU and PSU boards

following the recommended engineering

rules.

Do not forget:

• Amplifier boards can be placed

anywhere in the shelf where the

OSCU board is present. Via a

configuration register, OSCU board

is informed of the positions of

amplifier boards that communicate

with it.

• PSCU board must be placed in slot

39.

3. Declare and configure the required boards.

ATTENTION: In case of TRBD1191 transponders in an OS�CP configuration, you

must imperatively perform TRBD1191 internal cross connections before declaring the

cabling between TRBD1191 and OCPU boards.

4. Perform the physical cabling.

OSNCP Case Perform boards cabling following the

cabling plan:

a. OCPU and main TRBD/C Client

ports.

b. OCPU and spare TRBD/C Client

ports.

Protection Management About 1626 LM ProtectionThe Protection Activation Process

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



15-11

OMSP Case Perform boards cabling following the

cabling plan:

a. OSCU and amplifiers.

b. Amplifiers and OCPU.

c. OCPU and Mux/Demux or relevant

coupler.

Do not forget:

• Main LOFA OSC EXTRACTION port

must be cabled to OSCU OSC

Channel 1 INPUT port.

• Main LOFA OSC INSERTION port


Channel 1 OUTPUT port.

• Spare LOFA OSC EXTRACTION port


Channel 2 INPUT port.

• Spare LOFA OSC INSERTION port


Channel 2 OUTPUT port.

5. Set connectors in service.

6. Declare cabling configuration in compliance with the recommended engineering rules.

7. Update the transmission view.

8. End.

See Also






Protection Management About 1626 LM ProtectionThe Protection Activation Process

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Managing Protection

Overview

Purpose

This topic describes the displayed information and procedures to perform when you want

to manage 1626 LM protection.

Contents

Protection Displayed Information 15-14

Recognizing Cross Connections Dedicated to Protection 15-17

Controlling Protection 15-18

Protection Management Managing ProtectionOverview

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



15-13

Protection Displayed Information

Table 15-1, “Protection Parameters” (p. 15-14) describes the information displayed for

protection.

Table 15-1 Protection Parameters


Prot. State Indicates the protection state. Normal P

Protection path is active. �o alarms.

Normal I

Main path is active. �o alarms.

Auto P

Protection path is active. Alarms are

raised on the main path.

Auto I

Main path is active. Alarms are raised

on the protection path.

Lockout I

The traffic is locked onto the main

path.

The protection is disabled.

Forced P

The traffic is forced onto the protection

path. �o alarms.

SNCP For future use. �one.

State Indicates the state of the cross

connection.

A

Active cross connection.

Dir. Indicates the cross connection

direction

Uni

The connection is unidirectional.

Bi

The connection is bidirectional.

Input This entity corresponds to the main

or protected channel.

• In OS�CP context: it is given

by the TP and the physical

OCPU port connected to the

main board.

• In OMSP context: it is given

by the TP and the physical port

location of the main board.


information:

• rack#

• subrack#

• slot#

• port#


Protection Management Managing ProtectionProtection Displayed Information

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Table 15-1 Protection Parameters (continued)


Protecting

Input

This entity corresponds to the spare

or protected channel.

• In OS�CP context: it is given

by the TP and the physical

OCPU port connected to the

spare transponder board.

• In OMSP context: it is given

by the TP and the physical port

location of the spare amplifier

board.


information:

• rack#

• subrack#

• slot#

• port#


Output Depending on the type of

protection, this entity may

represents one of the following:

• In OS�CP context: represents

the OCPU board which routes

the signal to the User-Client

network. It is given by the TP

and the physical port location

of the related OCPU board.

• In OMSP context: points to a

port of the “client” board (the

line input port).


information:

• rack#

• subrack#

• slot#

• port#


Revertive A protection characteristic:

• Revertive protection refers to a

mechanism where the transport

and selection of the normal

traffic signal (service) always

returns to (or remains on) the

working transport entity if the

switch requests are terminated;

i.e., when the working

transport entity has recovered

from the defect or the external

request is cleared.

• �on revertive protection refers

to a mechanism, where the

transport and selection of the

normal traffic signal does not

return to the working transport

entity if the switch requests are

terminated.

• Checked

The protection is revertive.

Revertive protection refers to

OS�CP protection for User-Client

signals. Such protection type is

supported by 40 Gbps transponders

and TRBD1191, 10 Gbps

transponder only.

• Unchecked

The protection is not revertive.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



15-15

Table 15-1 Protection Parameters (continued)


WRT Wait to Restore Time.

A period of time that must elapse

before a transport entity that has

recovered from a Signal Fail (SF)

or Signal Degrade (SD) condition

can be used again to transport the

normal traffic signal and/or to

select the normal traffic signal

from.

0 to 60,000 seconds

HOT Hold Off Time.

A delay that prevents an

autonomous switch of a protected

channel to the protecting path for

the configured time following

identification that an autonomous

protection switch is required.

0 to 10,000 milliseconds

See Also







...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Recognizing Cross Connections Dedicated to Protection

Purpose

Use this procedure to identify cross connections dedicated to protection purposes.

Before you begin


How to recognize cross connections dedicated to protection

To recognize cross connection dedicated to protection, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Click Search to display cross connections.

Result:The existing cross connections are displayed in the display area.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Identify the cross connections dedicated to protection with the Protecting Input column.

Any filled cell is related to a protection mechanism.

See Also






Protection Management Managing ProtectionRecognizing Cross Connections Dedicated to Protection

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



15-17

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Controlling Protection

Purpose

Use this procedure to control 1626 LM protection.

Before you begin

Protection is implemented on the 1626 LM.

How to control protection

To control protection, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Click Search to display cross connections.

Result:The existing cross connections are displayed in the display area.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Select a relevant row and click Protect...

Result:The Protection Actions window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4

• To force the traffic onto the protecting board, go to Step 5.

• To lock the traffic onto the main transponder board, go to Step 6.

• To cancel a force action, go to Step 7.

• To cancel a lock action, go to Step 8.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 To force the traffic on the protecting board:

1. Click Protecting related to Force To: item.

2. Click OK to finish.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 To lock the traffic on the main board:

1. Click Invoke related to Lock Out: item.


Protection Management Managing ProtectionControlling Protection

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 To cancel a lock action:

1. Click Release related to Force To: item.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 To cancel a force action:

1. Click Release related to Lock Out: item.


See Also






Protection Management Managing ProtectionControlling Protection

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



15-19

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

16 16Monitoring Procedures

Overview

Purpose

This chapter describes the procedure to perform when you want to display:

• Instantaneous measurements,

• Abnormal condition list,

• Event logs,

• Channel margin states,

• Power level per channel frequency.

Contents

Displaying Instantaneous Measurements 16-2

Displaying the Abnormal Condition List 16-6

Displaying Event Logs 16-7

Displaying the Channel margin 16-8

Displaying Power Level per Channel Frequency 16-10

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



16-1

Displaying Instantaneous Measurements

Purpose

Use this procedure to display instantaneous measurements.

Good to know

The following table list the main instantaneous measurements by boards.

Board Measurement Measured for...

ESCT Temperature whole board

BMDX

CMDX

Temperature whole board

Reception Power• Each Mux Inputs

• Demux Input

• Mux Output

OMDX Temperature whole board

Reception Power• WDM Line Input

• Extra Input

• Each Mux Inputs

• Expansion Input

(OMDX8100_L1_x only)

Transmission Power WDM Line Output

ALCT Temperature whole board


OSCU Temperature whole board

LOFA Theoretical Flatness Constant whole board

Temperature whole board

Reception Power External Pump Input Port

(when applicable)

VOAAttenuation whole board

Transmission Power 1rst and 2nd Stage Output

Reception Power 1rst and 2nd Stage Input

EMPM Temperature whole board

• Pump bias current

• Laser temperature

Laser Module

Pump Power EMPM Output

Monitoring Procedures Displaying Instantaneous Measurements

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




BOFA Temperature whole board

Reception Power Gain Block Input

Transmission Power Gain Block Output

ETHC Temperature whole board

Reception Power• SFP Input

• XFP Input

Transmission Power• SFP Output

• XFP Output

Current• SFP Output

• XFP Output

TRBD 10 Gbps Temperature whole board

Reception Power• Client and WDM Line

Input

• XFP Input (when

applicable)

Transmission Power• WDM Line Output

• XFP Output (when

applicable)

Current XFP Output (when

applicable)

TRBC 10 Gbps Temperature whole board

Reception Power WDM Line Input


TRBD 40 Gbps Temperature whole board

Chromatic Dispersion WDM Line Input

Reception Power Client and WDM Line Input


Current �ot applicable


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



16-3


TRBC 40 Gbps Temperature whole board

Chromatic Dispersion WDM Line Input

Reception Power• Client and WDM Line

Input

• XFP Input (when

applicable)

Transmission Power• WDM Line Output

• XFP Output (when

applicable)

Current XFP Output (when

applicable)

OADC Temperature whole board

Reception Power• Each Input ports

• Splitter Input

(OADC1230 and

OADC1300 only)

Transmission Power Coupler Output (OADC0104

only)

OCNC Temperature whole board

Reception Power Splitter Input

TDMX Temperature whole board

Reception Power WDM Line Input

Transmission Power Each channel output

WMAN Temperature whole board

Reception Power When applicable:

• WDM Line Input

• Each Wavelength

Manager Input

Transmission Power When applicable:

• WDM Line Output

• Wavelength Blocker

Output

• Each Wavelength

Selective Switch input

• Wavelength Manager

Input


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Before you begin

• Equipment view window is displayed.

• Rack view window is displayed, or

• Board view window is displayed, or

How to display instantaneous measurements

To display instantaneous measurements, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Depending on the current view, select one of the following:

• Equipment > Instantaneous Measurements on > Selected Object.

• Board > Current Instantaneous Measurements

Result:The Instantaneous Measurements window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


Note

If the window has been opened for a certain time, click Refresh to update the

measurement values.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



16-5

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Displaying the Abnormal Condition List

Purpose

Use this procedure to display the abnormal condition list.

Good to know

The abnormal condition list provides the list of all abnormal situations.

The following lists examples of abnormal situations which are reported into the abnormal

situation list:

• An equipment which is plugged but not configured,

• A loopback on a port,

• APSD forced on or forced off on an amplifier,

• etc....

Before you begin

The 1626 LM GUI is displayed.

How to display the abnormal condition list

To display the abnormal condition list, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Diagnosis > Abnormal Condition List

Result:The Abnormal Condition List window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select an abnormal condition and click OK.

Result:Detailed information is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Monitoring Procedures Displaying the Abnormal Condition List

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Displaying Event Logs

Purpose

Use this procedure to display event logs.

Good to know

The 1626 LM is keeping track of all operations or events.

You can retrieve:

• command operations which have been performed in the system,

• alarms which have been raised,

• events which have been tracked.

Before you begin


How to display the event logs

To display event logs, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select one of the following:

• Diagnosis>Command Log,

• Diagnosis>Alarm Log,

• Diagnosis>Event Log,

Result:According to your choice, a text file list all the related items.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Monitoring Procedures Displaying Event Logs

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



16-7

Displaying the Channel margin

Purpose

Use this procedure to display the channel margin.

Good to know

• The channel margin formulates the available margin that a channel has before the

FEC mechanism cannot correct errors.

The channel margin is measured in dB and you can decide whether you want to

display it on a 5 or 30 seconds basis.

To quickly identify and anticipate transmission problems, each channel is displayed

with a specific color which corresponds to a specific state as explained in the

following table.

• For R-OADM and TR-OADM configurations, cross-connections must be performed.

See Also

“Performing R-OADM and TR-OADM Cross Connections” (p. 10-17)

Channel Margin States

Table 16-1 Channel Margin States

Channel Margin States Description

The channel has transmission errors which are corrected by the

FEC mechanism. Error rate is within acceptable range.

The channel has transmission errors which are corrected by the

FEC mechanism. Error rate is very low.

The channel has transmission errors which are not corrected by

the FEC mechanism. The FEC correction limit has been reached

or exceeded. Service is affected.

Current and previous BER values differ by more than a decade.

This indicates the channel has unstable transmission conditions.

The service may be affected.

Channel margin not correct:

• The data collection period is different from 5 or 30 sec. Ask

for a new channel margin calculation to confirm a

transmission problem.

• The number of transmission errors is too high.

The FEC correction limit has been reached or exceeded and

cannot correct errors anymore. The service is affected.

Monitoring Procedures Displaying the Channel margin

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Before you begin


• FEC mechanism is enabled on TRBx boards.

• For T-OADM configurations, cross-connections must be performed.

• Your configuration has at least one LOFA board.

How to display the channel margin

To display the channel margin, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Diagnosis > Counters

Result:The Digital Counters window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the Choose OTS and Counters area, select an OTS port.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click one of the following radio buttons:

• Near End 30s Channel Margin

• Near End 5s Channel Margin

Result:Click Apply.

Channel identifiers and associated channel margins are displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Monitoring Procedures Displaying the Channel margin

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



16-9

Displaying Power Level per Channel Frequency

Purpose

Use this procedure when you want to monitor and to display the channel power per port.

Spectrum Acquisition

To display measured power level (dBm) per channel frequency, you must use the

Spectrum Acquisition option that Board option provides.

You can only display power level per channel frequency for WMA� boards.

Power levels are displayed as bar charts.

Power Measure

OnWMA�1100 boards, power measure is performed on:

• Input port and

• Output port.

On WMA�3x, power measure is performed on:

• 3 input ports and

• 1 output port.

Displaying tabs, colored bullets and colored bars

Power measures by channel are displayed in tabs. One tab per port displays the measured

power spectrum. If the bullet associated to a tab is:

• Red: there is at least one channel which measured power is less than the minimum

configured value.

• Green: there is no control to perform. All the measures are compliant with the

configuration.

The same applies for graphical bars which represent graphically the power measure for

each channel.

Before you begin

Remind that this procedure applies only on WMA� boards.

How to display measured power level per channel frequency

To display measured power level (dBm) per channel frequency, perform the following

steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 From the Subrack Viewwindow, double click a WMA� board.

Monitoring Procedures Displaying Power Level per Channel Frequency

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Result:The WMAN Board View window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From Boardmenu, select Spectrum Acquisition.

Result:The Spectrum Acquisition window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click on the required tab to display power level per channel frequency associated to one

port.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Click on Refresh to launch a new power level acquisition.

�ote: To display up to date power levels, you must click Refresh when you navigate

from one tab to another.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Place the cursor on a bar to display the measured values.

At the limit of the bar, you can display the following:

• OVER MAX: when the measured value exceeds the maximum configured value.

• BELOW MIN: when the measured value is less than the configured value.

• INVALID: when a problem has occurred.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Monitoring Procedures Displaying Power Level per Channel Frequency

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



16-11

17 17Performance Monitoring

Overview

Purpose

Quality of service delivered by the 1626 LM is directly related to your capacity to

respond to performance issues of your system.

In addition to equipment and transmission alarms, you have at your disposal specific

alarms to warn you on performance degradation of your transmission process.

This chapter describes the performance monitoring means and procedures to perform

when you want to monitor your system.

Contents

About Performance Management 17-3

Performance Counters 17-4

Performance Monitoring Mechanism 17-7

Counter Thresholds 17-8

Possible Counter Threshold Values 17-9

Managing Counter Threshold Tables 17-11

Displaying Counter Threshold Tables 17-12

Modifying Counter Threshold Tables 17-13

Managing Performance Monitoring 17-14

Starting Performance Monitoring (PM) 17-15

Resetting Counter Values 17-17

Refreshing Counter Values 17-18

Stopping Performance Monitoring 17-19

Creating a Trail Monitor (TM) 17-20

Deleting a Trail Monitor (TM) 17-21

Consulting Performance Data 17-22

Performance Current Data Displayed Information 17-23

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



17-1

Performance History Data Displayed Information 17-24

Consulting Performance Current Data 17-25

Consulting Performance History Data 17-26

Refreshing Current Counter Values 17-27

Refreshing History Counter Values 17-28

Managing Performance Monitoring From a Unique Entry Point 17-29

Understanding the PM Overview Window 17-30

Managing Performance Monitoring from the PM Overview Window 17-31

Performance Monitoring Overview

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



About Performance Management

Overview

Purpose

Performance monitoring increments performance counters for the following protocols and

correction methods:

• SDH/ RS - Layer 1,

• Ethernet 1 Gbps - Layer 1 and Layer 2 (MAC),

• Ethernet 10 Gbps - Layer 1 and Layer 2 (MAC),

• FEC/OCH,

• ODU2.

Contents

Performance Counters 17-4

Performance Monitoring Mechanism 17-7

Counter Thresholds 17-8

Possible Counter Threshold Values 17-9

Performance Monitoring About Performance ManagementOverview

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



17-3

Performance Counters

There are two types of performance counters:

• Time counters

Time counters count how many seconds an error is present in the system for a given

period,

• Error counters

Error counters count the number of errors reported for a given period.

• Frame counters (Ethernet Layer 2 specific)

Frame counters count the number of received, emitted, lost, errored frames:

– since ETHC board provisioning,

– for a given period of time.

The following table describes the counters for each monitored layer.

Table 17-1 Performance Counters

Monitored

Protocols / Error

Correction

Method

Counters Description

SDH/RS ES Erroneous Seconds

ES counts the number of seconds of presence in the system of:

• B1 code violation, or

• SDH/RS defects.

SES Severely Erroneous Seconds

SES counts the number of seconds of presence in the system of:

• more than 2400 B1 code violations per second, or

• SDH/RS defects.

In the meantime, ES is still incremented.

BBE Background Block Errors

BBE counts the number of B1 code violations excluding those taken into

account by SES counter.

UAS UnAvailable Seconds

UAS counts the number of seconds of UnAvailable Time (UAT) during a

monitoring period. UAT period starts when 10 consecutive SES are reported.

Performance Monitoring About Performance ManagementPerformance Counters

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Table 17-1 Performance Counters (continued)

Monitored

Protocols / Error

Correction

Method


Ethernet - Layer 1

(1 and 10 Gbps)

ES Erroneous Seconds

ES counts the number of seconds of presence in the system of:

• ICG (Invalid Code Group) for Ethernet 1 Gbps,

• HCV (Header Code Violation) for Ethernet 10 Gbps,

• Ethernet defects.

SES Severely Erroneous Seconds

SES counts the number of seconds of presence in the system of:

• more than 10,000 ICG per second for Ethernet 1 Gbps

• more than 255 HCV per second for Ethernet 10 Gbps,

• at least one Ethernet defect.

In the meantime, ES is still incremented.


BBE counts the number of:

• ICG excluding those counted by SES counter for Ethernet 1 Gbps,

• HCV excluding those counted by SES counter for Ethernet 10 Gbps.




Ethernet - Layer 2

(1 Gbps)

TRCF Total Received Correct Frames

TRCF counts the number of valid frames received by each Ethernet port.

TRCF sums the number of received unicast, multicast and broadcast frames.

TRCO Total Received Correct Octets

TRCO counts the number of valid bytes received by each Ethernet port.

TRSEF Total Received Service Errored Frames

TRSEF counts the number of errored frames received by each Ethernet port.

TTF Total Transmitted Frames

TTF counts the number of frames transmitted by each Ethernet port.

TTF sums the number of transmitted unicast, multicast and broadcast

frames.

TTO Total Transmitted Octets

TTO counts the number of bytes transmitted by each Ethernet port.

TDF Total Dropped Frames

TDF counts the number of frames dropped by each Ethernet port.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



17-5

Table 17-1 Performance Counters (continued)

Monitored

Protocols / Error

Correction

Method


FEC/OCH SCS Severely Corrected Seconds

SCS counts the number of seconds spent to correct errors just before the

FEC correction limit.

SCS integrates also the immediate period after the FEC correction limit

where the errors are not corrected.

SUS Severely Uncorrected Seconds

SUS counts the number of seconds of presence of FEC/OCH layer defects in

the system.

BEC Background Errors Corrected

BEC counts the number of corrected errors excluding those taken into

account by SCS counter.



monitoring period. UAT period starts when 10 consecutive SUS are reported.

BBU Background Block Uncorrected

BBU counts the number of uncorrected blocks, excluding those taken into

account by SUS counter.

ODU2 SES Severely Erroneous Seconds

SES counts the number of seconds of presence in the system of more than

12,303 errored ODU frames (15% of ODU frames).

NEUAS Near End UnAvailable Seconds

�EUAS counts the number of seconds of UnAvailable Time (UAT) during a


This counter is similar to the UAS counter refering to other layers.


BBE counts the number of Bip-8 code violations excluding those taken into

account by SES counter.

See Also

• “Performance Monitoring Mechanism” (p. 17-7)

• “Counter Thresholds” (p. 17-8)

• “Managing Counter Threshold Tables” (p. 17-11)


• “Managing Performance Monitoring” (p. 17-14)


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



• “Performance Current Data Displayed Information” (p. 17-23)

• “Performance History Data Displayed Information” (p. 17-24)

Performance Monitoring Mechanism

Performance monitoring is based on counter value collection which triggers every 15

minutes from 00:00 UTC for a 24 hours period.

To be able to use counter data, you must start the performance monitoring mechanism on

the required termination point.

During the start operation, you specify:

• If you want to save the counter values every 15 minutes and/or every 24 hours. At the

end of the defined period, counter values are logged into a history file. Counter values

are then reset to 0, to increment again for a new period.

• If you want to use thresholds to raise a TCA (Threshold Crossing Alarm) and its

related PM-AS (Performance Monitoring - Alarm Synthesis).

If not, performance monitoring will work and counters will increment on the selected

period basis, but no alarm will be raised.

You can modify your initial settings during performance monitoring execution.

See Also




• “Possible Counter Threshold Values” (p. 17-9)





...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



17-7

Counter Thresholds

For each of the monitored layers, you manage counter threshold values via 2 tables:

• threshold table related to 15 minutes period,

• threshold table related to 24 hours period.

For the threshold table related to 15 minutes period, each counter has:

• an alarm triggering threshold value, and

• an alarm clearing threshold value.

In the 1626 LM context:

• the alarm triggering threshold value is called Value Up,

• the alarm clearing threshold value is called Value Down.

When Value Up is reached or exceeded, a TCA (Threshold Crossing Alarm) is raised and

triggers a PM-AS (Performance Monitoring - Alarm Synthesis) with a severity level. You

can configure the severity of the raised alarms.

The alarms are cleared as soon as the Value Down is reached.

Figure 17-1, “CA/PM-AS Raise and Clear Logic” (p. 17-8) illustrates TCA/PM-AS raise

and clear logic.

See Also




Figure 17-1 CA/PM-AS Raise and Clear Logic

Performance Monitoring About Performance ManagementCounter Thresholds

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................







Possible Counter Threshold Values

The following table describes counter threshold table value for 15 minutes period.

Table 17-2 15 minutes Counter Thresholds

Threshold Table Counters Default Threshold Values Threshold Value Range

3 - RS_15m BBE Value Up: 2400

Value Down: 200

1 to 2,159,100

ES Value Up: 50

Value Down: 5

1 to 900

SES Value Up: 10

Value Down: 0

1 to 900

5 - 8B_10B_15m BBE Value Up: 11250

Value Down: 90

1 to 2,159,100

ES Value Up: 50

Value Down: 5

1 to 900

SES Value Up: 10

Value Down: 0

1 to 900

7 - 64B_66B_15m BBE Value Up: 426

Value Down: 3

1 to 2,159,100

ES Value Up: 50

Value Down: 5

1 to 900

SES Value Up: 10

Value Down: 0

1 to 900

9 - OCH_15m BBU Value Up: 1

Value Down: 0

1 to (231 - 1)

BEC Value Up: 213

Value Down: 8

1 to 235,814,400

SUS Value Up: 10

Value Down: 0

1 to 900

SCS Value Up: 10

Value Down: 0

1 to 900

Performance Monitoring About Performance ManagementCounter Thresholds

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



17-9

Table 17-2 15 minutes Counter Thresholds (continued)


11 - ODU_15m BBE Value Up: 738

Value Down: 6

1 to 44,481,600

SES Value Up: 900

Value Down: 0

1 to 900

The following table describes counter threshold table value for 24 hours period.

Table 17-3 24 hours Counter Thresholds


2 - RS_24h BBE 36000 1 to 207,273,600

ES 150 1 to 86,400

SES 15 1 to 86,400

4 - 8B_10B_24h BBE 1,080,000 1 to 207,273,600

ES 150 1 to 86,400

SES 15 1 to 86,400

6 - 64B_66B_24h BBE 40,909 1 to 207,273,600

ES 150 1 to 86,400

SES 15 1 to 86,400

8 - OCH_24h BBU 1 1 to (231 - 1)

BEC 218 1 to (231 - 1)

SUS 300 1 to 86,400

SCS 300 1 to 86,400

11 - ODU_24h BBE 70870 1 to (231 - 1)

SES 1 1 to 86,400

See Also








Performance Monitoring About Performance ManagementPossible Counter Threshold Values

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Managing Counter Threshold Tables

Overview

Purpose

This topic describes the procedures to perform when you want to manage counter

threshold tables.

Contents

Displaying Counter Threshold Tables 17-12

Modifying Counter Threshold Tables 17-13

Performance Monitoring Managing Counter Threshold TablesOverview

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



17-11

Displaying Counter Threshold Tables

Purpose

Use this procedure to display counter threshold tables.

Before you begin

The 162- LM GUI is started.

How to display counter threshold tables

To display counter threshold tables, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Configuration>Performance>Threshold Tables.

Result:The PM Threshold Table Select window is displayed and displays the list of

threshold tables.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the list, select a table and click Display...

Result:The PM Threshold Table Display windows appears and displays the threshold

values and associated alarm severity.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


See Also








Performance Monitoring Managing Counter Threshold TablesDisplaying Counter Threshold Tables

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Modifying Counter Threshold Tables

Purpose

Use this procedure to modify counter threshold tables.

Before you begin

�ote: The following is not applicable for the current release:

• Monitored Entity Types area of PM Threshold Table Modify window.

• Create..., Attach and Delete buttons of PM Threshold Table Select window.

How to modify counter threshold tables

To modify counter threshold tables, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Configuration>Performance>Threshold Tables menu.

Result:The PM Threshold Table Select window is displayed and displays the list of

threshold tables.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the list, select a table and click Modify...

Result:The PM Threshold Table Modify windows appears and displays the threshold

values and associated alarm severity.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Modify the relevant field for the required counter and click Apply.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


See Also








Performance Monitoring Managing Counter Threshold TablesModifying Counter Threshold Tables

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



17-13

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Managing Performance Monitoring

Overview

Purpose

This topic describes the procedures to perform when you want to manage performance

monitoring.

Contents

Starting Performance Monitoring (PM) 17-15

Resetting Counter Values 17-17

Refreshing Counter Values 17-18

Stopping Performance Monitoring 17-19

Creating a Trail Monitor (TM) 17-20

Deleting a Trail Monitor (TM) 17-21

Performance Monitoring Managing Performance MonitoringOverview

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Starting Performance Monitoring (PM)

Purpose

Use this procedure to start performance monitoring.

Before you begin

You must comply if you comply with the following:

To start PM onlayers ...

Select board type ... And check that ...

SDH/RS TRBx TM (Trail Monitor) on ODU1 or ODU2

block is created.

ETHC RSTTP block is available.

Ethernet 1 Gbps 2*GE_FC TM on OCHgdc block is created.

ETHC OCHgdc block is available.

Ethernet 10

Gbps

TRBD1191 TM on ODU2 block is created.

FEC/OCH TRBx OCH block is available.

• The Transmission View window of the required board is displayed.

• The relevant transmission block is selected.

How to start performance monitoring

To start performance monitoring, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Right-click on the selected transmission block and select Performance > Configure

Performance Monitoring.

Result:The PM Configuration window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select NE15m or NE24h tab.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Tick Create Current Data check box.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 If you want to start performance monitoring without performance alarms, perform the

following, else go to step Step 5.

1. From the Threshold table list, select No table and click Apply.

2. Go to step Step 6.

Performance Monitoring Managing Performance MonitoringStarting Performance Monitoring (PM)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



17-15

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 If you want to start performance monitoring with performance alarms, perform the

following:

1. From the Threshold table list, select Default table and click Attach.

2. Go to step Step 6.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 If necessary, select the other tab and perform the procedure from step Step 3.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


See Also

• “About Performance Management” (p. 17-3)





Performance Monitoring Managing Performance MonitoringStarting Performance Monitoring (PM)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Resetting Counter Values

Purpose

Use this procedure to reset counter values.

Good to know

• UAS counter reset is not applicable.

• Layer 2 counter reset is not applicable.

Before you begin


• The monitored transmission block (P) is selected.

How to reset counter values

To reset counter values, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Right-click on the selected transmission block and select Performance>Display Current

Data....

Result:The PM Current Data window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Click Reset.

Result:The counter values are reset. They increment again until the end of the current

period.

See Also







Performance Monitoring Managing Performance MonitoringResetting Counter Values

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



17-17

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Refreshing Counter Values

Purpose

Use this procedure to refresh counter values.

Before you begin



How to refresh counter values

To refresh counter values, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


Data....


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Click Refresh.

Result:The counter values are refreshed.

Wait at least 20 seconds between 2 refresh actions.

See Also







Performance Monitoring Managing Performance MonitoringRefreshing Counter Values

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Stopping Performance Monitoring

Purpose

Use this procedure to stop performance monitoring.

Before you begin



How to stop performance monitoring

To stop performance monitoring, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Right-click on the selected transmission block and select Performance>Configure

Performance Monitoring.

Result:The PM Configuration window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Select NE15m or NE24h tab.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Untick Create Current Data check box.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 From the Threshold table list, select No table and click Apply.

See Also





• “Consulting Performance Current Data” (p. 17-25)

• “Consulting Performance History Data” (p. 17-26)

Performance Monitoring Managing Performance MonitoringStopping Performance Monitoring

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



17-19

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Creating a Trail Monitor (TM)

Purpose

Use this procedure to create a trail monitor.

Reminder

You can create a TM on transmission blocks ...to start PM on layers...

ODU1 and ODU2 (TRBx) SDH/RS

ODU2 (TRBD1191) Ethernet 10 Gbps

OCHgdc (2*GE_FC) Ethernet 1 Gbps

OCH (TRBx) FEC/OCH

Before you begin


• The relevant transmission block is selected.

How to create a TM

To create a TM, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Right-click on the selected transmission block and select Trail Monitor > Create.

Result:The Transmission View window is updated and the TM representation is

displayed.

See Also





• “Consulting Performance Current Data” (p. 17-25)

• “Consulting Performance History Data” (p. 17-26)

Performance Monitoring Managing Performance MonitoringCreating a Trail Monitor (TM)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Deleting a Trail Monitor (TM)

Purpose

Use this procedure to delete a trail monitor

Before you begin



How to delete a TM

To delete a TM, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Right-click on the selected transmission block and select Trail Monitor > Delete.

Result:The Transmission View window is updated and the TM representation

disappears.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Performance Monitoring Managing Performance MonitoringDeleting a Trail Monitor (TM)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



17-21

Consulting Performance Data

Overview

Purpose

This topic describes the procedures to perform when you want to consult performance

data.

Contents

Performance Current Data Displayed Information 17-23

Performance History Data Displayed Information 17-24

Consulting Performance Current Data 17-25

Consulting Performance History Data 17-26

Refreshing Current Counter Values 17-27

Refreshing History Counter Values 17-28

Performance Monitoring Consulting Performance DataOverview

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Performance Current Data Displayed Information

Each counter values saving period has a specific tab which title is:

• Pm15minUnidirect: for 15 minutes counter values saving period,

• Pm24hUnidirect: for 24 hours counter values saving period.

�ote: For ETHC layer 2 counters, the counter value is saved since the ETHC board

provisioning and not for a 15 minutes or a 24 hours period.

The following table describes the displayed current data parameters.

Table 17-4 Current Data Parameters


Administrative

State

Displays the administrative state of the PM

process.

Unlocked

The PM process is running normally.

Measurement points are collecting data.

Locked

The PM process is stopped.

Data collection is suspended

Operational State Displays the operational state of the PM

process.

Enabled

PM process started. Measurement points

are initialized for data collection.

Disabled

PM process not started. Measurement

points are not initialized.

Suspect Data Informs if the displayed counter values are

significant or not for a given period.

Yes

The counter value collection has been

stopped. The counter values are not

significant for the given period.

No

The counter value collection has ended

correctly for the given period. The counter

values are significant.

Threshold Table Displays the name of the threshold table. The name of the threshold table.

Current Problem

List

Lists the counters which threshold has

been reached or exceeded.

List of counters.

Elapsed Time Displays the elapsed time from the

beginning of a given period of from a

reset.

HH:MM:SS.

Counter Values Shows the counter values at the time of

display.

Counter values.

Performance Monitoring Consulting Performance DataPerformance Current Data Displayed Information

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



17-23

See Also

“Consulting Performance Current Data” (p. 17-25)

Performance History Data Displayed Information

Each counter values saving period has a specific tab which title is:

• Pm15minUnidirect: for 15 minutes counter values saving period,

• Pm24hUnidirect: for 24 hours counter values saving period.

�ote: For ETHC layer 2 counters, the counter value is saved for a 15 minutes period

only.

The following table describes the displayed history data parameters.

Table 17-5 History Data Parameters


Interval End Time Displays the end time of a given period. DD.MM.YYYYHH:MM:SS

Counter values Shows the counter values at the time of

display.

Counter values.

Elapsed Time Displays the elapsed time from the

beginning of a given period of from a

reset.

HH:M�:SEC.

Suspect Data Informs if the displayed counter values are

significant or not for a given period.

Yes

The counter value collection has been

stopped. The counter values are not

significant for the given period.

No

The counter value collection has ended

correctly for the given period. The counter

values are significant.

See Also

“Refreshing Current Counter Values” (p. 17-27)

Performance Monitoring Consulting Performance DataPerformance Current Data Displayed Information

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Consulting Performance Current Data

Purpose

Use this procedure to consult performance current data

Before you begin



How to consult current performance data

To consult performance current data, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


Data....


See Also

“Performance Current Data Displayed Information” (p. 17-23)

Performance Monitoring Consulting Performance DataConsulting Performance Current Data

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



17-25

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Consulting Performance History Data

Purpose

use this procedure to consult performance history data.

Before you begin



How to consult performance history data

To consult performance history data, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Right-click on the selected transmission block and select Performance>Display History

Data....

Result:The PM History Data window is displayed.

See Also

“Performance History Data Displayed Information” (p. 17-24)

Performance Monitoring Consulting Performance DataConsulting Performance History Data

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Refreshing Current Counter Values

Purpose

Use this procedure to refresh current counter values.

Before you begin



How to refresh current counter values

To refresh current counter values, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


Data....


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Click Refresh.



See Also

“Performance Current Data Displayed Information” (p. 17-23)

Performance Monitoring Consulting Performance DataRefreshing Current Counter Values

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



17-27

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Refreshing History Counter Values

Purpose

Use this procedure to refresh history counter values.

Before you begin



How to refresh history counter values

To refresh history counter values, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


Data....


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Click Refresh.



See Also

“Performance History Data Displayed Information” (p. 17-24)

Performance Monitoring Consulting Performance DataRefreshing History Counter Values

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Managing Performance Monitoring From a UniqueEntry Point

Overview

Purpose

This section describes how you can manage Performance Monitoring from a unique entry

point thanks to the PM Overview window.

Contents

Understanding the PM Overview Window 17-30

Managing Performance Monitoring from the PM Overview Window 17-31

Performance Monitoring Managing Performance Monitoring From a Unique EntryPoint

Overview...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



17-29

Understanding the PM Overview Window

The PM Overview Window

The PM Overview window enables you to collect and display the required TP

(Termination Points) on which you want to perform one of the following:

• To configure Performance Monitoring.

• To display current or history data.

• To cancel TP display.

• To access to a selected TP transmission view.

Benefit of PM Overview window

From the PM Overview window, you can basically perform all the Performance

Monitoring procedures without having to access one by one, the transmission views of all

the related monitored entities.

�ote: For information, the unitary Performance Monitoring procedures are accessible

at the following place:

• “Starting Performance Monitoring (PM)” (p. 17-15)

• “Consulting Performance Data” (p. 17-22)

PM Overview Searching Criteria

The following table describes the searching criteria you can use.

To be completed. Description of search criteria.

PM Overview Possible Tasks

To be completed. Description of each buttons.

See Also

• “Managing Performance Monitoring from the PM Overview Window” (p. 17-31)


Understanding the PM Overview Window...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Managing Performance Monitoring from the PM OverviewWindow

Purpose

Use this procedure when you want to manage Performance Monitoring from a unique

entry point rather that having to access one by one, the transmission views of all the

related monitored entities.

Before you begin

To be able to start PMon layers ...

Check that ...

SDH/RS TM (Trail Monitor) on ODU1 or ODU2 block is created.

RSTTP block is available.

Ethernet 1 Gbps TM on OCHgdc block is created.

OCHgdc block is available.

Ethernet 10 Gbps TM on ODU2 block is created.

FEC/OCH OCH block is available.

To know how to create a Trail Monitor, refer to “Creating a Trail Monitor (TM)”

(p. 17-20)

How to manage performance Monitoring from the PM Overview window

To manage performance monitoring from the PM Overview window, perform the

following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Configuration>Performance>PM Overview...

Result:The PM Overview window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 If necessary, complete the search criteria.

To know details about search criteria, refer to “PM Overview Searching Criteria”

(p. 17-30)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 From the main displaying area, select the node an click Add TP...

Result:The TP Search for PM Overview window is displayed.

For any details about TP Search window, refer to “Describing and Using the Searchfor Termination Point Input Windows” (p. 3-31)



...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



17-31

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 From Equipment area, select the relevant entry.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 If necessary, from TP Search Criteria area, set the relevant search criteria.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click Search.

Result:The system retrieves and displays the TP in Termination Points area.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Select one, several or all TP and click OK.

Result:

• The TP Search for PM Overview disappears.

• The PM Overview window is displayed and displays the selected TPs.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Select one TP and apply one of the following tasks:

• Config PM... to configure and start Performance Monitoring on the select TP.

• Current Data to display current performance data.

• History Data to display performance history data.

• Delete to delete the displayed TP from the main displaying area.

• Delete all to delete all the displayed TP from the main displaying area.

• Port View... to display the transmission view of the selected TP.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 If necessary repeat action Step 8 as many times you need to configure/reconfigure or to

display Performance Monitoring on selected TPs.

See Also

• “The PM Overview Window” (p. 17-30)

• “Starting Performance Monitoring (PM)” (p. 17-15)

• “Consulting Performance Data” (p. 17-22)



...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

18 18System Information

Collection and

Exportation

Overview

Purpose

This chapter describes the procedures to follow when you want to collect or export

system information.

Contents

Remote Inventory Displayed Information 18-2

Uploading the System Remote Inventory 18-3

Capturing the System Components Remote Inventory Information 18-4

Exporting System Configuration to an XML File 18-6

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



18-1

Remote Inventory Displayed Information

The following table describes the remote inventory displayed information.

Table 18-1 Remote Inventory Displayed Information

Parameters Description

Company Displays the manufacturer of the unit

Unit Type Displays the unit acronym

Unit Part Number Displays the manufacturer product part number. This number is printed on

labels or on unit front coverplate.

Software part Number Displays the related software identifier

CLEI Code Displays the Common Language Equipment Identification code according to

Bellcore specification (TRS-ISD-325).

Manufacturing Plant Displays the manufacturing site

Serial Number Displays the product serial number. Compliant with �R 130 standard.

Date Identifier Displays a sequence of 2 digits identifiers which indicate a specific date in the

manufacturing and order flow process. It is associated with a date.

00:Manufacturing at the final testing date

01: Production order date

02:Manufacturing date at the unit lot

03: Shipment date to customer

04: Customer order date

Date (YYMMDD) Displays the date related to the Date identifier.

System Information Collection and Exportation Remote Inventory Displayed Information

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Uploading the System Remote Inventory

Purpose

use this procedure to upload the system remote inventory.

Before you begin


How to upload the system remote inventory

To upload the system remote inventory, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Supervision>Upload Remote Inventory.

Result:The Question dialog box appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Click OK.

Result:The upload starts.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Wait until the Remote inventory upload Completed message is displayed and

click OK.

Note

The system remote inventory data are stored on the Craft Terminal PC.

System Information Collection and Exportation Uploading the System Remote Inventory

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



18-3

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Capturing the System Components Remote InventoryInformation

Purpose

Use this procedure to capture the system components remote inventory information.

Before you begin

The Equipment view window is displayed.

How to capture the system components remote inventory information

To capture system components remote inventory information, perform the following

steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Equipment>Remote Inventory.

• To capture rack or subrack level remote inventory information, go to Step 2.

• To capture board level remote inventory information, go to Step 3.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 To capture rack and subrack level remote inventory information, perform the following

sequence:

1. Click on the required rack.

2. Select Equipment>Remote Inventory.

3. Click Rack Level or subrack Level.

The Confirmation dialog box appears.

4. Click OK to validate your choice.

The upload starts.

5. From the display window, you can print or save the rack or subrack remote inventory

data.

There is no error message to indicate that there is no printer connected to the Craft

terminal PC.

6. End of rack or subrack remote inventory information capture. Go to End.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 To capture board level remote inventory information, perform the following sequence:

1. Click on a board.

2. Select Equipment>Remote Inventory.

3. Select Board Level.

The Confirmation dialog box appears.

4. Click OK to validate your choice.

The upload starts.

The board remote inventory data are displayed.

System Information Collection and Exportation Capturing the System Components Remote InventoryInformation

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

System Information Collection and Exportation Capturing the System Components Remote InventoryInformation

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



18-5

Exporting System Configuration to an XML File

Purpose

Use this procedure when you want to export system configuration information to an xml

file.

Before you begin

The configuration of the node is complete.

How to export the system configuration to an xml file

To export the system configuration to an xml file, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Configuration>Export Configuration menu.

Result:The Export Configuration window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From theExport Configuration window, you can check one or several check boxes

corresponding to the type of information you want to export.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click Browse to select the location where you want to save the xml file.

Result:The Export to XML file window appears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Select a drive and enter a file name into Choise.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Click Apply.

Result:Export starts. When finished, Information box is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click OK.

Result:The Information box disappears.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

System Information Collection and Exportation Exporting System Configuration to an XML File

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



19 19Alarm Management

Overview

Purpose

This chapter:

• gives an overview on the 1626 LM alarm organization,

• describes the parameters and procedures to follow to manage the alarm severity

profiles,

• describes the parameters and procedures to follow to manage the alarm threshold

tables.

Contents

About Alarms 19-3

Alarm Types 19-4



Configuring Alarm Severity Assignment Profiles 19-8

Managing ASAP (Alarm Severity Assignment Profiles) 19-10

Displaying ASAP Detailed Information 19-11

Creating an ASAP 19-12

Modifying an ASAP 19-14

Assigning an ASAP to a Managed Entity 19-16

Assigning ASAP to Multiple Managed Entities 19-18

De-assigning an ASAP from Managed Entities 19-20

Deleting ASAPs 19-22

Managing Alarm Threshold Tables 19-23

Alarm Threshold Parameters 19-24

Displaying Board Alarm Threshold 19-27

Creating Alarm Threshold Tables 19-28

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



19-1

Assigning an Alarm Threshold to a Board 19-30

Modifying Alarm Threshold Tables 19-31

Deleting Alarm Threshold Tables 19-33

Managing Auto Discovery Alarm 19-34

Enabling/Disabling Auto Discovery Alarm 19-35

Alarm Management Overview

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



About Alarms

Overview

Purpose

This topic describes the 1626 LM alarm system.

Contents

Alarm Types 19-4



Configuring Alarm Severity Assignment Profiles 19-8

Alarm Management About AlarmsOverview

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



19-3

Alarm Types

The 1626 LM supports the following alarm types:

• Equipment alarms

• Transmission alarms

• Housekeeping alarm

• Processing alarm

• Auto Discovery alarm

Equipment Alarms

These alarms report faults that are raised by a specific 1626 LM hardware component.

Equipment alarms warn of:

• 1626 LM internal fiber cable connection problem

• 1626 LM internal fiber break

• 1626 LM board failure

Transmission Alarms

These alarms report communication faults between a 1626 LM and remote network

equipment.

Transmission alarms warn of:

• Fiber cable break

• Line problems within the network

• Bad transmission quality

• Problems on remote network equipment

Housekeeping Alarm

There is one alarm only, which relates to the environmental issues. This alarm is raised

after external output points configuration.

Processing Alarm

This alarm relates to configuration data corruption. This alarm is raised when the database

integrity test reports a failure.

Auto Discovery Alarm

This alarm relates to the ability of the 1626 LM to report to the network manager that:

• a new 1626 LM has been introduced in the network, or

• existing 1626 LM communication addresses have been modified.

Alarm Management About AlarmsAlarm Types

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Alarm Severity Indicators

The 1626 LM tracks and reports faults. If a fault occurs, an alarm is generated.

You can identify very quickly if alarms have been reported with the alarm severity

indicators located at the top left of the GUI.

According to the severity level, Alarm indicators display different shapes and colors:

When there are no raised alarms, indicators are just rectangles, without any numbers as

illustrated the following figure.

When there are raised alarms, indicators display a circle with a figure for the number of

alarms corresponding to the severity level. The following figure gives an example of

alarm indicators displaying raised alarms.

Alarm severity levels are defined as mentioned in the following table.

Table 19-1 Alarm Severity Levels

Severity

Levels

Colors Description

CRITICAL (CRI) Red A service-affecting condition has occurred and immediate

corrective action is required.

MAJOR (MAJ) Orange A service-affecting condition has developed and urgent corrective

action is required.

MINOR (MIN) Yellow A non-service-affecting fault condition has occurred, and you need

to take corrective action to prevent a more serious fault (for

example, one affecting the service).

WARNING (WNG) Cyan Detection of a potential or impending service-affecting fault,

before any significant effects have been felt.

INDETERMINATE

(IND)

White The severity level cannot be determined.

Figure 19-1 Alarm Severity Indicators / No Raised Alarms

Figure 19-2 Alarm Severity Indicators / Raised Alarms

Alarm Management About AlarmsAlarm Severity Indicators

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



19-5

�ote: The five alarm severity indicators are greyed-out when the alarm notification

has been inhibited. The indicators keep the information they had just before the inhibit

action.

Alarm Management About AlarmsAlarm Severity Indicators

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Operation Domain Alarm Indicators

To spot very quickly the operation domains which are impacted by alarms, you can use

the operation domain alarm indicators located at the top right of the GUI. With these

indicators, you know if alarms are related to:

• External Points

• Equipments

• Transmissions

According to the severity level, alarms domain indicators display different shapes and

colors:

• When there are no raised alarms, indicators are just rectangles, without any numbers.

• When there are raised alarms, indicators display a circle with a figure for the number

of alarms corresponding to the operation domain. The following figure gives an

example of operation domain alarm indicators displaying raised and no raised alarms.

The severity level conventions are the same as for alarm severity indicators.

Figure 19-3 Operation Domain Alarm Indicators

Alarm Management About AlarmsOperation Domain Alarm Indicators

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



19-7

Configuring Alarm Severity Assignment Profiles

Each managed entity is assigned with a default alarm severity level via a profile which is

called ASAP (Alarm Severity Assignment Profile).

An ASAP maps an alarm to a severity level for:

• service-affecting context (SA)

• non-service-affecting context (NSA).

The system determines automatically SA or NSA context depending on the implication of

the managed entity in the transmission process. If the managed entity participates in the

transmission process, it will be considered as part of a service-affecting context (SA).

By default the 1626 LM is delivered with 4 system ASAP which can not be updated.

The 4 system ASAP are described in the following table.

Table 19-2 System ASAP

ASAP Description

PRIMARY_ALARMS The ASAP which defines the SA and �SA severity levels for:

• transmission alarms (excepted for AIS and SSF alarms),

• equipment alarms.

This is the ASAP which is basically assigned to almost all

managed entities.

ALL_ALARMS The ASAP which defines the SA and �SA severity levels for:

• all transmission alarms,

• all equipment alarms

PATH_ALARMS The ASAP which defines the SA and �SA severity levels for:

• transmission alarms (excepted for AIS alarm),

• equipment alarms.

When the Remote Manager takes control of 1626 LM, all

managed entities are assigned with ALL_ALARMSASP.

NO_ALARMS The ASAP which inhibits all alarms.

This ASAP is very useful at 1626 LM installation.

Alarm Management About AlarmsConfiguring Alarm Severity Assignment Profiles

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



System ASAP

To be able to create a specific ASAP and to assign it to a managed entity, you must:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select one of the default ASAP.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 Clone the selected ASAP and save it with a specific name.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Assign the relevant SA and �SA severity levels for each required alarms.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 Assign the ASAP to the adequate managed entities.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 End.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alarm Management About AlarmsConfiguring Alarm Severity Assignment Profiles

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



19-9

Managing ASAP (Alarm Severity AssignmentProfiles)

Overview

Purpose

This topic describes the parameters and procedure to perform when you want to manage

alarm severity assignment profiles.

Contents

Displaying ASAP Detailed Information 19-11

Creating an ASAP 19-12

Modifying an ASAP 19-14

Assigning an ASAP to a Managed Entity 19-16

Assigning ASAP to Multiple Managed Entities 19-18

De-assigning an ASAP from Managed Entities 19-20

Deleting ASAPs 19-22

Alarm Management Managing ASAP (Alarm Severity Assignment Profiles)Overview

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Displaying ASAP Detailed Information

Purpose

Use this procedure to display ASAP detailed information.

Before you begin


How to display ASAP detailed information

To display ASAP detailed information, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Configuration>Alarm Severities

Result:The ASAPs management window is displayed and lists the existing ASAP.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the list, select one ASAP and click Detail.

Result:The ASAP Edition window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 From the Probable Causes Families area, check one or several alarm families.

Result:Alarms are displayed in the Probable Cause Names list.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 From the list, select an alarm.

Result: Severity levels of Service Affecting alarms and �on Service Affecting alarms

are displayed. Service Independent value must be Not Used.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 If necessary, repeat step Step 4 to display other alarm severity levels.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click Cancel.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alarm Management Managing ASAP (Alarm Severity Assignment Profiles)Displaying ASAP Detailed Information

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



19-11

Creating an ASAP

Purpose

Use this procedure to create an ASAP.

Before you begin

The 1626 LM GUI is displayed.

How to create an ASP

...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the list, select a default ASAP and click Clone.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 In ASAP Identifier field, enter a name for the new ASAP.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 From the Probable Causes Families area, check one or several alarm families to include

in the newASAP.

Result:Alarms are displayed in the Probable Cause �ames list.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


Result:Current severity levels of Service Affecting alarms and �on Service Affecting

alarms are displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 In Service Affecting list, click on the required severity level.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 In Non Service Affecting list, click on the required severity level.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Repeat from Step 5 until all alarm severity levels are assigned.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Click OK.

Alarm Management Managing ASAP (Alarm Severity Assignment Profiles)Creating an ASAP

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Result:The new ASAP is displayed in ASAPs management window.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 Click Close.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alarm Management Managing ASAP (Alarm Severity Assignment Profiles)Creating an ASAP

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



19-13

Modifying an ASAP

Purpose

Use this procedure to modify an ASAP

Before you begin


• The ASAP to modify is not a default ASAP.

How to modify an ASAP

To modify an ASAP, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the list, select an ASAP and click Modify.


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 From the Probable Causes Families area, check one or several alarm families.

Result:Alarms are displayed in the Probable Cause �ames list.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


Result:Current severity levels of Service Affecting alarms and �on Service Affecting

alarms are displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 In Service Affecting list, click on the required severity level.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 In Non Service Affecting list, click on the required severity level.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Repeat from step Step 5 until all alarm severity levels are modified.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Click OK.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 The modified ASAP is displayed in ASAPs management window.

Alarm Management Managing ASAP (Alarm Severity Assignment Profiles)Modifying an ASAP

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

10 Click Close.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alarm Management Managing ASAP (Alarm Severity Assignment Profiles)Modifying an ASAP

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



19-15

Assigning an ASAP to a Managed Entity

Purpose

Use this procedure to assign an ASAP to a managed entity.

Before you begin


• Amanaged entity is selected.

How to assign an ASAP to a managed entity

To assign an ASAP to a managed entity, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Configuration > Set Alarms Severities...

Result:The Set ASAP window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the List of ASAPs area, select the required ASAP. Otherwise go to step Step 4.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 To assign the selected ASAP to a selected managed entity, perform the following.

Otherwise go to step Step 4.

1. In the Apply To area, check that Selected object only radio button is selected.

2. Click OK to finish. Go to End.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 To assign the selected ASAP to a selected managed entity and its subordinates, perform

the following. Otherwise go to step Step 6.

1. In the Apply To area, check that Selected object and subordinates radio button is

selected.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Click OK to finish. Go to step End.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 To assign the selected ASAP to all managed entities of the 1626 LM, perform the

following. Otherwise go to step Step 7.

1. Select Network element radio button.

2. Select All classes radio button.

3. Click OK to finish. Go to End.

Alarm Management Managing ASAP (Alarm Severity Assignment Profiles)Assigning an ASAP to a Managed Entity

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 To assign the selected ASAP to specific types of managed entities, perform the following.

1. Select Network element radio button.

2. Select Specific classes radio button.

3. In the activated list, select one of several classes with Up or Down arrow keys


See Also

“Assigning ASAP to Multiple Managed Entities” (p. 19-18)

Alarm Management Managing ASAP (Alarm Severity Assignment Profiles)Assigning an ASAP to a Managed Entity

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



19-17

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Assigning ASAP to Multiple Managed Entities

Purpose

“Assigning an ASAP to a Managed Entity” (p. 19-16) explains how to assign an ASAP

once a specific TP or equipment has been previously selected. In this context, it means

that you must access and select each TP or equipment prior to execute the referenced

procedure. This can be very painful when your configuration involves a lot of boards.

The way to assign an ASAP to multiple managed entities is described in the following

procedure.

�ote: To make the procedure easier to read, only TP selection will be described.

Before you begin


How to assign an ASAP to multiple managed entities

To assign an ASAP to multiple managed entities, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Configuration>Set Alarm>Severities...


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From List of ASAPs area, select the ASAP to assign.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click TP List...

Result:The Clipboard - Set ASAP window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 From Add Object area, click Add TP...

Result:The TP Search / Clipboard - Set ASAP window is displayed.

For any details about TP Search / Clipboard - Set ASAP window window, refer to“Describing and Using the Search for Termination Point Input Windows” (p. 3-31)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 From the Equipment area, select the relevant entity to search for TPs.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 Click Search.

Result:The related TPs are displayed in Termination Points area.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Select one, several or all TPs and click OK.

Alarm Management Managing ASAP (Alarm Severity Assignment Profiles)Assigning ASAP to Multiple Managed Entities

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Result:

• Once the selected TPs have been taken into account, the TP Search / Clipboard -

Set ASAP window disapears.

• The selected TPs are displayed in Clipboard - Set ASAP window.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Click Start.

Result:The selected TPs are progressively flagged Pending, then OK. The selected

ASAP is then assigned to the selected TPs.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alarm Management Managing ASAP (Alarm Severity Assignment Profiles)Assigning ASAP to Multiple Managed Entities

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



19-19

De-assigning an ASAP from Managed Entities

Purpose

Use this procedure when you want to de-assign an ASAP from a set of managed entities.

De-assigning an ASAP comes to replace the current ASAP by another one. Once the

ASAP is de-assigned, it is considered as not being in use, and can be deleted.

Before you begin


How to de-assign an ASAP from managed entities

To de-assign an ASAP from managed entities, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Configuration>Set Alarm>Severities...


...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From List of ASAPs area, select a new ASAP to assign in place of the current one.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click TP List...

Result:The Clipboard - Set ASAP window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 From Add Object area, click Add TP...

Result:The TP Search / Clipboard - Set ASAP window is displayed.

For any details about TP Search / Clipboard - Set ASAP window window, refer to“Describing and Using the Search for Termination Point Input Windows” (p. 3-31)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 From the Equipment area, select the relevant entity to search for TPs.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 From the ASAP Search area, select the ASAP value that is currently assigned.

This filter will retrieve the TPs which are assigned with the current ASAP.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 Click Search.

Result:The related TPs are displayed in Termination Points area.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Select the TPs, and click OK.

Alarm Management Managing ASAP (Alarm Severity Assignment Profiles)De-assigning an ASAP from Managed Entities

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Result:

• Once the selected TPs have been taken into account, the TP Search / Clipboard -

Set ASAP window disapears.

• The selected TPs are displayed in Clipboard - Set ASAP window.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 Click Start.

Result:The selected TPs are progressively flagged Pending, then OK. The new

selected ASAP is then assigned to the selected TPs and replaces the current one.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


See Also

“Deleting ASAPs” (p. 19-22)

Alarm Management Managing ASAP (Alarm Severity Assignment Profiles)De-assigning an ASAP from Managed Entities

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



19-21

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Deleting ASAPs

Purpose

Use this procedure to delete ASAPs

Before you begin


• The ASAP to delete is not a default ASAP.

• The ASAP to delete is not in use.

Refer to “De-assigning an ASAP from Managed Entities” (p. 19-20)

How to delete ASAPs

To delete ASAPs, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................



...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the list, select one ASAP and click Delete.

Result:The ASAP disappears from the list.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alarm Management Managing ASAP (Alarm Severity Assignment Profiles)Deleting ASAPs

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Managing Alarm Threshold Tables

Overview

Purpose

An alarm threshold defines the triggering point of the following alarms:

• IPL (Input Power Loss)

• LOMS (Loss Of Multiplex Section)

• OPL (Output Power Loss)

• UE (Uncorrected Error)

Alarm threshold configuration apply for the following boards:

• BMDX

• CMDX

• OMDX

• LOFA

• WMA�

• TDMX

• TRBD and TRBC

Each of theses boards are assigned with a default threshold table which holds the alarm

threshold values.

To be able to create a specific threshold table and to assign it to a board, you must:

1. Select one of the default threshold table.

2. Clone the selected table and save it with a specific name.

3. Assign the threshold table to the required board.

4. End.

You can create until 14 alarm threshold tables for the 1626 LM node.

This topic describes the parameters and procedures to follow when you want to manage

alarm threshold tables.

Contents

Alarm Threshold Parameters 19-24

Displaying Board Alarm Threshold 19-27

Creating Alarm Threshold Tables 19-28

Assigning an Alarm Threshold to a Board 19-30

Modifying Alarm Threshold Tables 19-31

Deleting Alarm Threshold Tables 19-33

Alarm Management Managing Alarm Threshold TablesOverview

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



19-23

Alarm Threshold Parameters

The following tables give the alarm threshold values for the following boards:

• BMDX

• CMDX

• OMDX

• LOFA

• WMA�3174

• WMA�1100

• TDMX

• TRBD and TRBC

Table 19-3 BMDX Alarm Thresholds

BMDX

Alarm Threshold - Port

Default Value Range Step

IPL/LOMS at Demux input port -2 dBm -2 dBm to +24

dBm

1 dB

IPL at Mux input ports (1 -> 12) -32 dBm -32 dBm to +19

dBm

1 dB

Table 19-4 CMDX Alarm Thresholds

CMDX



IPL/LOMS at Demux input port -20 dBm -35 dBm to +15

dBm

1 dB

IPL at Mux input ports (1 -> 8) -30 dBm -30 dBm to +15

dBm

1 dB

Table 19-5 OMDX Alarm Thresholds

OMDX



• IPL/LOMS at ODX line input port

• IPL at Mux input ports (1 -> 8)

• IPL at OMX extra port

• IPL at OMX expansion port (for L1X

model only)

• OPL at OMX line output port

-38 dBm -40 dBm to +23

dBm

1 dB

Alarm Management Managing Alarm Threshold TablesAlarm Threshold Parameters

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Table 19-6 LOFA Alarm Thresholds

LOFA



IPL/LOMS at first stage input (for

LOFA11x0)

-35 dBm -40 dBm to +5

dBm

1 dB

IPL/LOMS at first stage input (for

LOFA11x1)

-38 dBm -38 dBm to +5

dBm

1 dB

Table 19-7 WMAN3174 Alarm Thresholds

WMAN3174



IPL at wavelength manager input (Add &

Drop and Express)

-30 dBm -30 dBm to +14

dBm

1 dB

IPL at wavelength selective switch input -30 dBm -30 dBm to +14

dBm

1 dB

OPL at line output -30 dBm -30 dBm to +14

dBm

1 dB

Table 19-8 WMAN1100 Alarm Thresholds

WMAN1100



IPL at line input -6 dBm -10 dBm to +20

dBm

1 dB

OPL at wavelength blocker output -12 dBm -24 dBm to +9

dBm

1 dB

OPL at line output -14 dBm -25 dBm to +7

dBm

1 dB

Table 19-9 TDMX Alarm Thresholds

TDMX



IPL at line input -24 dBm -30 dBm to +14

dBm

1 dB

OPL at channel output -24 dBm -30 dBm to +14

dBm

1 dB


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



19-25

Table 19-10 TRBD and TRBC Alarm Threshold

TRBD and TRBC

Alarm Threshold


FEC Module Uncorrected Errors (High

Threshold) (In Blocks)

10,499,451 1 to 10,499,451


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Displaying Board Alarm Threshold

Purpose

Use this procedure to display board alarm thresholds.

Before you begin

The required board view is displayed.

How to display board alarm threshold

To display board alarm thresholds, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Board>Alarm Threshold Configuration

Result:The Alarm Threshold Configuration window is displayed and lists the

existing alarm threshold tables for the selected board.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the Threshold table list, select an entry and click View.

Result:The Alarm Threshold view window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click Cancel to close the window.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


See Also

“Alarm Threshold Parameters” (p. 19-24)

Alarm Management Managing Alarm Threshold TablesDisplaying Board Alarm Threshold

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



19-27

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Creating Alarm Threshold Tables

Purpose

Use this procedure to create alarm threshold tables.

Before you begin


How to create alarm threshold tables

To create alarm threshold tables, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................



existing alarm threshold tables.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the Threshold table list, select an entry and click Clone.

Result:The Alarm threshold table cloning window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 In Table name field, enter a name for the new alarm threshold table.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 For each of the thresholds, select the required value.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Click Clone.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 The new alarm threshold table appears in the Threshold Table list.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 From the list, select the new table.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

8 Click Apply.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

9 The new table is assigned to the selected board.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


Alarm Management Managing Alarm Threshold TablesCreating Alarm Threshold Tables

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

See Also


Alarm Management Managing Alarm Threshold TablesCreating Alarm Threshold Tables

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



19-29

Assigning an Alarm Threshold to a Board

Purpose

Use this procedure to assign an alarm threshold to a board.

Before you begin


How to assign an alarm threshold to a board

To assign an alarm threshold to a board, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................




...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the Threshold table list, select an entry and click Apply.

Result:The selected table is assigned to the selected board.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alarm Management Managing Alarm Threshold TablesAssigning an Alarm Threshold to a Board

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Modifying Alarm Threshold Tables

Purpose

Use this procedure to modify alarm threshold tables,

Before you begin


How to modify alarm threshold tables

To modify alarm threshold tables, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................




...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the Threshold table list, select an entry and click Modify.

Result:The Alarm threshold table modification window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 If necessary, in Table name field, enter a new for the threshold table.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 For the required thresholds, select a new value.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 Click Apply.

Result:The new alarm threshold table appears in the Threshold Table list.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

6 From the list, select the new table.

Result:Click Apply.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 The modified table is assigned to the selected board.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


Alarm Management Managing Alarm Threshold TablesModifying Alarm Threshold Tables

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



19-31

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

See Also


Alarm Management Managing Alarm Threshold TablesModifying Alarm Threshold Tables

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Deleting Alarm Threshold Tables

Purpose

Use this procedure to delete alarm threshold tables.

Before you begin

• The required board view is displayed.

• The alarm threshold table to delete is not a default one.

• The alarm threshold table to delete is not the current assigned table.

How to delete alarm threshold tables

To delete alarm threshold tables, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................




...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2 From the Threshold table list, select an entry and click Delete.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

3 Click Delete to confirm.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................


E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alarm Management Managing Alarm Threshold TablesDeleting Alarm Threshold Tables

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



19-33

Managing Auto Discovery Alarm

Overview

Purpose

This section describes how to manage the ability to report to the network manager that:



Contents

Enabling/Disabling Auto Discovery Alarm 19-35

Alarm Management Managing Auto Discovery AlarmOverview

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Enabling/Disabling Auto Discovery Alarm

Purpose

Use this procedure when you want to enable/disable the 1626 LM to report to the network

manager that:



Before you begin

1626 LM GUI is started.

How to enable/disable Auto Discovery alarm

To enable/disable Auto Discovery alarm, perform the following steps:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

1 Select Configuration>Management>Auto Discovery.

Result: Network Element - Auto Discovery window is displayed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

2

From the drop-down list, select one of the following:

• Enable: to enable the network manager to be warned of 1626 LM introduction or

network addresses modifications.

• Disable: to disable the auto discovery alarm to be reported to the network manager.

E N D O F S T E P S...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Alarm Management Managing Auto Discovery AlarmEnabling/Disabling Auto Discovery Alarm

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



19-35

20 20Equipment Alarms

Overview

Purpose

This topic gives a description of the alarms raised from the hardware components and the

required actions to perform to clear the raised alarms.

Contents

AUP (Auxiliary Unit Problem) 20-3

COCE (Configuration Or Customization Error) 20-4

EQPT (Equipment Malfunction) 20-5

HT (High Temperature) 20-6

HVCSP (Heating or ventilation or Cooling System Problem) 20-7

IPD (Input Power Degraded) 20-8

IPL (Input Power Loss) 20-9

LA� (LA�Alarm) 20-10

OCCO (Optical Connector Cover Open) 20-11

OPD (Output Power Degraded) 20-12

OPL (Output Power Loss) 20-13

PD (Performance Degraded) 20-14

PP (Power Problem) 20-15

RUM (Replaceable Unit Missing) 20-16

RUP (Replaceable Unit Problem) 20-17

RUTM (Replaceable Unit Type Mismatch) 20-18

RUU (Replaceable Unit Unknown) 20-19

SCP (Serial Communication Problem) 20-20

TD (Transmitter Degraded) 20-21

TF (Transmitter Failure) 20-22

TOOR (Temperature Out Of Range) 20-23

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



20-1

UEP (Unconfigured Equipment Present) 20-24

UDCL (User Data Channel Loss) 20-25

VM (Version Mismatch) 20-26

WD (Wavelength Deviation) 20-27

Equipment Alarms Overview

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



AUP (Auxiliary Unit Problem)

AUP (Auxiliary Unit Problem)

Description The WMA� optical channel monitor does not work

properly.

Probable Cause The channel supervision is not accurate at board level.

Related Alarms �one.

Corrective Actions

On-Site Intervention Required Yes, when appropriate regarding operations.

Actions Replace the board after route reconfiguration.

Equipment Alarms AUP (Auxiliary Unit Problem)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



20-3

COCE (Configuration Or Customization Error)

COCE (Configuration Or Customization Error)

Description• ALCT or LOFA cases

Indicates that ALCT or LOFA boards are working

out of acceptable range of value regarding laser

output power and optical attenuation.

• TR-OADM configuration case

Indicates that transponder laser state is not

compatible with channel state.

COCE is an indication to inform that these devices are

currently not used as they have been designed for typical

use.

COCE does not necessarily imply any malfunction or

failure.

Probable Cause COCE alarm may be raised:

• following particular tuning due to specific

configuration,

• in a TR-OADM configuration, when a transponder

laser is on and the channel state is Express.


Corrective Actions

On-Site Intervention Required Yes

Actions 1. Escalate the problem to your performance

optimization support team to determine if a

corrective action must be done.

2. To clear the alarm, increase or decrease the values of

output power and optical attenuation accordingly.

3. If the problem persists, contact Alcatel-Lucent

Support Team.

4. End.

Equipment Alarms COCE (Configuration Or Customization Error)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



EQPT (Equipment Malfunction)

EQPT (Equipment Malfunction)

Description WMA� failure for a specific channel.

Probable Cause Hardware failure of one component of the WMA�

board.

Related Alarms URU (Underlying Resource Unavailable)

Corrective Actions


Actions Replace the board after route reconfiguration.

Equipment Alarms EQPT (Equipment Malfunction)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



20-5

HT (High Temperature)

HT (High Temperature)

Description Board temperature is greater than 50°C.

Probable Cause• Room air conditioning system does not work

properly.

• At least one of the 3 related fans has failed.


Corrective Actions


Actions 1. Verify if the room air conditioning system works

properly.

2. If necessary and according to your procedures, clean

or replace the dust filter.

3. If necessary, replace the faulty fans.

4. If necessary, replace the board.

5. End.

Equipment Alarms HT (High Temperature)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



HVCSP (Heating or ventilation or Cooling System Problem)

HVCSP (Heating or ventilation or Cooling System Problem)

Description A temperature problem has occurred on a LOFA or a fan

board.

Probable Cause• The gain block of a LOFA board recently plugged

has not reached the correct temperature.

• The fan dust filters are dirty.


Corrective Actions


Actions For LOFA board:

1. If the board has been plugged recently, wait until the

gain block is fully operational.

2. If the board has been plugged for a certain time,

verify:

• if the room air conditioning system works

properly.

• if the dust filters are clean.

3. If necessary, replace the LOFA board.

4. End.

For fan board:

1. Verify:

2. if the room air conditioning system works properly.

• if the dust filters are clean.

• If necessary, replace the fan board.

3. End.

Equipment Alarms HVCSP (Heating or ventilation or Cooling System Problem)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



20-7

IPD (Input Power Degraded)

IPD (Input Power Degraded)

Description Depending on the board which has raised the alarm.

• A transponder has detected a degraded incoming

signal from a client transmitter.

• ALOFA has detected a degraded incoming signal at

stage input.

Probable Cause• A problem occurred on the client transmitter or

along the fiber path between the client node and the

1626 LM.

• The input power at LOFA stage input is lower than

the minimum acceptable value for the given

configuration.


Corrective Actions

On-Site Intervention Required Depending on the fault location.

Actions For transponders:

1. Contact the relevant operation team to check the

client transmitter.

2. Check the client fiber connection at the transponder.

3. Check the fiber path between the client node and the

1626 LM.

4. End.

For LOFA:

1. Check the mechanical aspect of the fiber

(Connection at stage input and fiber aspect)

2. If the alarm persists, tune the amplification level.

This operation may require Alcatel-Lucent Technical

Support intervention.

Equipment Alarms IPD (Input Power Degraded)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



IPL (Input Power Loss)

IPL (Input Power Loss)

Description Optical power loss at input port.

For TRBx boards: can be raised at VOA input, excepted

for TRBD1191 MLSE.

For WMAN boards: can be raised for a single express

channel.

Probable Cause• The fiber may be unplugged

• The fiber between the impacted board and the

previous transmission device may be broken.

• The transmitter of the previous transmission device

may be in failure.

• The VOA does not detect any input signal.

• One express channel is not in service in the network.

Related Alarms LOS (Loss Of Signal)

Corrective Actions

On-Site Intervention Required Yes.

Actions 1. Check the fiber connection.

2. Check the fiber path from the previous transmission

device.

3. Check the transmitter of the previous transmission

device.

4. If applicable, verify the connection between:

• the TRBx output and the VOA input

• the BOFA output and the VOA input

5. End.

Equipment Alarms IPL (Input Power Loss)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



20-9

LAN (LAN Alarm)

LAN (Local Area Network Alarm)

Description The LA� link between the 1626 LM and its network

manager is lost.

Probable Cause The relevant cable is disconnected or broken.


Corrective Actions


Actions 1. In the master subrack, on the ESCT-EC board, check

the cable which supports the management traffic.

2. End.

Equipment Alarms LAN (LAN Alarm)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



OCCO (Optical Connector Cover Open)

OCCO (Optical Connector Cover Open)

Description The front cover has been removed.

For safety reason, the laser of the following boards is

automatically shutdown:

• for EMPM boards, the laser is shutdown

immediately.

• For LOFA boards:

– the laser is shutdown immediately if the cover

disable status is Cover_Enable.

– the laser is shutdown after a 5 minutes timer if

the cover disable status is Cover_Disable.

Probable Cause The front panel safety cover has been removed.

Related Alarms URU (Underlying Resource Unavailable) at LOFA

shutdown.

Corrective Actions


Actions 1. Replace the front panel safety cover to restart the

LOFA board.

2. End.

Equipment Alarms OCCO (Optical Connector Cover Open)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



20-11

OPD (Output Power Degraded)

OPD (Output Power Degraded)

Description The output power of TRBD, WMA� or ALCT boards is

not the configured one.

Probable Cause The requested power or attenuation settings cannot

apply because out of acceptable range.

Related Alarms Related equipment alarm(s) may be raised if hardware

problem.

Corrective Actions

On-Site Intervention Required Depending on the context.

Actions Perform one of the following actions:

• Check board configuration to determine if the

power or attenuation setting is compliant with board

acceptable range.

• Check if other equipment alarms have raised to

determine if the problem is related to an hardware

failure. In this case, replace the equipment.

Equipment Alarms OPD (Output Power Degraded)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



OPL (Output Power Loss)

OPL (Output Power Loss)

Description Optical power at output port is less than the minimum

value.

Probable Cause If the board is a/an

...

Then ...

OMDX-MUX,

CMDX 1052,

WMA�, TDMX,

OADC, OC�C

• The optical output power is

less than the configured

threshold value.

• The equipment may have an

hardware failure.

LOFA• The first or second stage

optical output power is less

than the configured

threshold value.

• The equipment may have an

hardware failure.

OSCU The laser may be out of service.

Related Alarms Related equipment alarm(s) may be raised if hardware

problem.

Corrective Actions

On-Site Intervention Required Depending on board type.

Actions If the board is a/an

...

Then ...

OMDX-MUX,

CMDX 1052,

WMA�, TDMX,

OADC, OC�C

1. Adjust the threshold values

2. If the alarm persists, check

the complete upstream path.

3. If related equipment alarms,

replace the equipment.

4. End.

LOFA 1. Depending on the amplifier

stage, check first or second

stage APSD status.

2. End.

OSCU 1. Replace the board.

2. End.

Equipment Alarms OPL (Output Power Loss)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



20-13

PD (Performance Degraded)

PD (Performance Degraded)

Description• General case

Board initialization is in progress. During this phase,

the board is not fully operational.

• WMA� and TDMX case

WMA� and TDMX boards cannot work properly

with the correct required output power value.

Probable Cause• General case

Board initialization.


probable cause may be one of the following:

– Incompatibility between channel power at board

input and required output set point value.

– Wrong setup of board.


Corrective Actions

On-Site Intervention Required �o.

Actions• General case

Wait until the end of initialization and check that the

alarm is cleared


– Check input power if applicable.

– Check if specific configuration parameters are

compliant with commissioning rules.

Equipment Alarms PD (Performance Degraded)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



PP (Power Problem)

PP (Power Problem)

Description Power supply unit is not provided with the right voltage.

Probable Cause• The public power supply network has a problem.

• The connection is faulty.


Corrective Actions


Actions 1. Contact the public power supplier to check if there is

any problem in delivering the voltage.

2. Check the connection between the power supply unit

and the power supplier.

3. End.

Equipment Alarms PP (Power Problem)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



20-15

RUM (Replaceable Unit Missing)

RUM (Replaceable Unit Missing)

Description A declared equipment other than ESCT is missing in a

slot.

Probable Cause See Description.


Corrective Actions


Actions 1. Plug the relevant board in the empty slot.

2. End.

Equipment Alarms RUM (Replaceable Unit Missing)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



RUP (Replaceable Unit Problem)

RUP (Replaceable Unit Problem)

Description An hardware component has failed. This may be impact

the traffic.

Does not apply to SFP/XFP modules, nor to ESCT

boards.

Probable Cause Hardware failure.


Corrective Actions


Actions 1. Replace the board.

2. End.

Equipment Alarms RUP (Replaceable Unit Problem)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



20-17

RUTM (Replaceable Unit Type Mismatch)

RUTM (Replaceable Unit Type Mismatch)

Description An equipment which is plugged into the slot has a type

which is different from the declaration.

Probable Cause Mismatch between board declaration and board

plugging.


Corrective Actions


Actions 1. If the declaration corresponds to your configuration,

change the equipment.

2. If the equipment type corresponds to your

configuration, modify the declaration.

3. End.

Equipment Alarms RUTM (Replaceable Unit Type Mismatch)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



RUU (Replaceable Unit Unknown)

RUU (Replaceable Unit Unknown)

Description Warning which indicates that the equipment which is

plugged into a slot is not an Alcatel part.



Corrective Actions


Actions 1. Plug the Alcatel-Lucent equipment which is

validated for this purpose. Use of any other

equipment is not certified.

2. End.

Equipment Alarms RUU (Replaceable Unit Unknown)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



20-19

SCP (Serial Communication Problem)

SCP (Serial Communication Problem)

Description The master shelf, managed by the ESCT-SC, cannot

communicate with secondary shelf, managed by

ESCT-EC.

Probable Cause• The ESCT-SC cannot manage the related subrack.

• The ESCT-SC cannot report management

information to ESCT-EC.


Corrective Actions


Actions 1. Check the connection between master shelf and

secondary shelf.

2. Unplug the ESCT-SC and plug it again to restart the

board.

3. Check that SC LED of ESCT-SC is green.


Support team.

5. End.

Equipment Alarms SCP (Serial Communication Problem)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



TD (Transmitter Degraded)

TD (Transmitter Degraded)

Description The transmitter module is degraded.

Probable Cause• In case of board plugging

The board initialization is not complete. The alarm

should disappear once the initialization is finished.

• In case of normal operation

The transmitter module of the board is degraded.


Corrective Actions


Actions In case of board plugging context:

1. Wait until the end of board initialization.

2. Unplug and replug the board to re-initialize it.

3. If necessary replace the board.

4. End.

In case of normal operation:

1. Replace the board.

2. End.

Equipment Alarms TD (Transmitter Degraded)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



20-21

TF (Transmitter Failure)

TF (Transmitter Failure)

Description For transponders, SFP/XFP modules or ALCT boards:

the transmitter module has failed.

For amplifiers: The pump module is degraded.



Corrective Actions


Actions 1. Replace the board.

2. End.

Equipment Alarms TF (Transmitter Failure)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



TOOR (Temperature Out Of Range)

TOOR (Temperature Out Of Range)

Description Indicates that WMA� initialization is on-going and

warm-up is on progress. In normal circumstances,

TOOR alarm is cleared automatically, and you just have

to wait. However, if TOOR alarm persists, WMA�

board may be faulty and RUP alarm is raised.

Probable Cause WMA�3x board initialization requires a certain amount

of time to be at the right operational temperature.

Related Alarms RUP (Replaceable Unit problem) if TOOR alarm is

raised for more than 40'.

Corrective Actions

On-Site Intervention Required Yes, if RUP alarm is raised.

Actions Refer to “RUP (Replaceable Unit Problem)” (p. 20-17)

Equipment Alarms TOOR (Temperature Out Of Range)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



20-23

UEP (Unconfigured Equipment Present)

UEP (Unconfigured Equipment Present)

Description An equipment is plugged into a slot without any

declaration.



Corrective Actions


Actions Perform the relevant declaration.

Equipment Alarms UEP (Unconfigured Equipment Present)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



UDCL (User Data Channel Loss)

UDCL (User Data Channel Loss)

Description A transponder has detected a loss of signal from UDC

port.

Probable Cause There is no equipment connected to UDC port.


Corrective Actions

On-Site Intervention Required Yes, if UDC port is used

Actions If UDC port is not used:

1. Filter the alarm to clear it automatically.

2. End.

If UDC port is used:

1. Check the equipment connection to the port.

2. End.

Equipment Alarms UDCL (User Data Channel Loss)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



20-25

VM (Version Mismatch)

VM (Version Mismatch)

Description Awrong software version has been downloaded to the

ESCT-SC board.



Corrective Actions


Actions 1. Unplug the ESCT-SC and plug it again to

re-initialize the board.

2. End.

Equipment Alarms VM (Version Mismatch)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



WD (Wavelength Deviation)

WD (Wavelength Deviation)

Description The wavelength is out of range.

Probable Cause• In case of board plugging:

The board initialization is not complete. The alarm

should disappear when initialization is complete.

• In case of normal operations:

The optical module is failed and cannot align the

wavelength with the configured value.

Related Alarms URU (underlying Resource Unavailable)

Corrective Actions


Actions 1. Check the board.

2. If necessary, replace the board.

3. End.

Equipment Alarms WD (Wavelength Deviation)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



20-27

21 21Transmission Alarms

Overview

Purpose

This topic gives a description of the alarms raised during the transmission process and the

required actions to perform to clear the raised alarms.

Contents

AIS (Alarm Indication Signal) 21-2

CSF (Communication Subsystem Failure) 21-3

LBER (Low Bit Error Rate) 21-4

LOF (Loss Of Frame) 21-5

LOMF (Loss Of Multi-Frame) 21-6

LOMS (Loss Of Multiplex Section) 21-7

LOS (Loss Of Signal) 21-8

LOSC (Loss Of Supervisory Channel) 21-9

LOSCF (Loss Of Supervisory Channel Frame) 21-10

LOW (Loss Of Wavelength) 21-11

LTCER (Low Threshold Corrected Error) 21-12

otnTIM (Optical Transport �etwork Trace Identifier Mismatch) 21-13

SSF (Server Signal Failure) 21-14

SSF- i (Server Signal Failure - ingress) 21-16

SSF- e (Server Signal Failure - egress) 21-17

TCA (Threshold Crossing Alarm) 21-18

TIM (Trace Identifier Mismatch) 21-19

UAT (UnAvailable Time) 21-20

UE (Uncorrected Error) 21-21

URU (Underlying Resource Unavailable) 21-22

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



21-1

AIS (Alarm Indication Signal)

AIS (Alarm Indication Signal)

Description A remote network equipment delivers a fault indication

which is raised as an AIS.

The AIS may be raised by:

• Rs-TM, ODU and OTU blocks of TRBC or TRBD

boards or

• RSgdc block of ETHC and 2xGBE_FC boards.

Probable Cause If AIS is raised by:

• Rs-TM block: the problem is related to the SDH

network.

• ODU and OTU blocks: the problem is related to the

WDM network.

• RSgdc block: the problem is related to the Ethernet

network.

Related Alarms SSF (Server Signal Failure) generated on higher

impacted layers.

Corrective Actions

On-Site Intervention Required Yes, on the equipment which has inserted the AIS.

Actions 1. Check the cabling and the path of the equipment

which has inserted the AIS.

2. Check the alarms of the equipment which has

inserted the AIS.

3. Repair or replace the faulty components.

4. End.

Transmission Alarms AIS (Alarm Indication Signal)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



CSF (Communication Subsystem Failure)

CSF (Communication Subsystem Failure)

Description LAPD transport problem through supervision frame.

Depending on the configuration, the supervision may be

not possible via the fiber.

CSF alarm is raised by OTS blocks.

Probable Cause• LAPD configuration problem.

• The corresponding end-point equipment may have

failed

• Fiber problem.


Corrective Actions


Actions 1. Check LAPD configuration consistency on both

point-to-point network equipments.

If network equipments are not reachable, you may

have to go on-site to perform the maintenance

actions.

2. Check the corresponding end-point equipment.

3. Check the fiber between the 2 end-point

equipments.

4. End.

Transmission Alarms CSF (Communication Subsystem Failure)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



21-3

LBER (Low Bit Error Rate)

LBER (Low Bit Error Rate)

Description The SDH or Ethernet signal is degraded.

10-6 LBER threshold is reached or exceeded.

LBER alarm may be raised by:

• Rs-TM block of TRBC or TRBD boards or

• RsTTP block from ETHC and 2xGBE_FC boards.

Probable Cause A transmission device or a fiber of the SDH or Ethernet

path transmits a bad quality signal. The source of the

problem may be remote.

Related Alarms May be correlated with LTCER (Low Threshold

Corrected Error rate) alarm.

Corrective Actions


Actions 1. Check the previous transmission devices (client or

WDM) until you find the source of the alarm.

2. Check the fiber connection.

3. Check the transmitter of the transmission device

which is the source of the alarm.

4. End.

Transmission Alarms LBER (Low Bit Error Rate)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



LOF (Loss Of Frame)

LOF (Loss Of Frame)

Description The optical signal is received with a non conform

contents. The frame cannot be decoded.

LOF alarm may be raised by:

• OCHA, and ODU blocks of TRBC or TRBD boards

or

• OCH block of ETHC or 2xGE_FC boards.

Probable Cause• The line may have failed on a remote network

equipment.

• A remote network equipment may be faulty.


impacted layers.

Corrective Actions

On-Site Intervention Required Depending on the fault location.

Actions 1. Check the optical line and verify if there is not any

fiber break.

2. Check if the current 1626 LM and the remote

network equipment are configured for the same type

of communication.

3. End.

Transmission Alarms LOF (Loss Of Frame)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



21-5

LOMF (Loss Of Multi-Frame)

LOMF (Loss Of Multi-Frame)

Description The optical signal is received with a non conform

contents. The OTU multi-frame cannot be decoded.

LOMF alarm is raised by OCHA block of TRBC or

TRBD boards.

Probable Cause A remote network equipment may be faulty.


impacted layers.

Corrective Actions


Actions 1. Verify if the current 1626 LM and the remote

network equipment are configured for the same type

of communication.

2. End.

Transmission Alarms LOMF (Loss Of Multi-Frame)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



LOMS (Loss Of Multiplex Section)

LOMS (Loss Of Multiplex Section)

Description Indicates that the payload signal is lost whereas the

supervision signal is received.

LOMS alarm is raised by:

• OTS block of LOFA boards for incoming WDM

signal,

• OTS block from CMDX or BMDX boards for

incoming band signal.

Probable Cause Transmitter of previous transmission device may be in

failure.


impacted layers.

Corrective Actions


Actions 1. Check if the transmitter of the previous transmission

device has failed.

2. End.

Transmission Alarms LOMS (Loss Of Multiplex Section)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



21-7

LOS (Loss Of Signal)

LOS (Loss Of Signal)

Description For transponders, Mux/Demux, Ethernet boards: the

incoming signal is absent or misinterpreted.

For amplifiers: both payload and supervision signals are

lost.

LOS alarm may be raised by:

• OGPI block of TRBC, TRBD, CMDX, ETHC or

2xGBE_FC boards.

• OGPI block from OCPU board.

• OTS block of a LOFA board.

Probable Cause• The fiber may be unplugged,

• The fiber between the impacted board and the

previous transmission device may be broken,

• The transmitter of the previous transmission device

may be in failure.

Related Alarms• SSF (Server Signal Failure) generated on higher

impacted layers.

• IPL (Input Power Loss).

Corrective Actions



2. Check the fiber between the impacted board and the

previous transmission device.

3. Check the transmitter of the previous transmission

device.

4. End.

Transmission Alarms LOS (Loss Of Signal)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



LOSC (Loss Of Supervisory Channel)

LOSC (Loss Of Supervisory Channel)

Description Indicates that the OSCU board does not receive any

supervision signal.

LOSC alarm is raised by OTS block related to the

LOFA board associated with the OSCU board.

Probable Cause A problem occurred between the impacted board and the

previous amplifier.


Corrective Actions


Actions 1. Check the OSCU of the related network equipment

to determine if a HW failure occurred or if a cable is

disconnected or broken.

2. Verify if the LOSC alarm disappears.

3. End.

Transmission Alarms LOSC (Loss Of Supervisory Channel)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



21-9

LOSCF (Loss Of Supervisory Channel Frame)

LOSCF (Loss Of Supervisory Channel Frame)

Description OSCU board receives a supervision signal but cannot

decode it.

LOSCF alarm is raised by OTS block related to the

LOFA board associated with the of OSCU board.

Probable Cause Remote WDM equipment does not send the compliant

supervision frame.


Corrective Actions


Actions 1. Check the configuration of the 2 OSCU boards to

determine if the clock configuration is OK.

2. If the alarm persists, change the relevant OSCU

board.

3. End.

Transmission Alarms LOSCF (Loss Of Supervisory Channel Frame)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



LOW (Loss Of Wavelength)

LOW (Loss Of Wavelength)

Description Loss of a single wavelength related to express channel

at WMA� input.

LOW alarm is raised by the OCH CTP block.

Probable Cause• Transmitter of previous transmission device is in

failure, or

• One express channel is not in service in the

network.

• Configuration of express channel threshold is too

high.

Related Alarms• IPL (Input Power Loss)

• SSF (Server Signal Failure) generated on higher

impacted layers

Corrective Actions


Actions Perform one of the following:

1. Check previous WDM transmission devices until

you find the source of the alarm.

2. Verify the consistency between the board

configuration and the network.

3. Check if the input channel threshold is compliant.

4. End.

Transmission Alarms LOW (Loss Of Wavelength)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



21-11

LTCER (Low Threshold Corrected Error)

LTCER (Low Threshold Corrected Error)

Description Indicates a degradation of the transmission via high

correction rate (FEC).

Probable Cause• The transmitter of the previous transmission device

is degraded.

• Tuning discrepancy between transponders and

amplifiers following a modification of the number

of WDM channels.

• The fiber path between the 1626 LM and the

previous transmission device may be degraded.


impacted layers

Corrective Actions

On-Site Intervention Required �one.


2. Check the fiber between the 1626 LM and the


3. Measure the channel margin.

4. If necessary, tune the line to recover the channel

margin.

5. End.

Transmission Alarms LTCER (Low Threshold Corrected Error)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



otnTIM (Optical Transport Network Trace Identifier Mismatch)

otnTIM (Optical Transport Network Trace Identifier Mismatch)

Description Indicates that the received TTI is not the expected one

from a remote equipment.

otnTIM alarm is raised by:

• OTU/ODU blocks of TRBC or TRBD boards.

• OTS block of LOFA boards, if supervision is

configured (OSCU board implemented and cabled

to LOFA boards)

Probable Cause• Wrong TTI configuration.

• The fiber plugged into TRBC, TRBD or LOFA

boards handles a signal which is not expected by the

related board.


impacted layers

Corrective Actions


Actions 1. Verify if the local cabling is compliant with the

cabling plan.

2. Verify if the local ODU-TTI, OTU-TTI or OTS-TTI

configuration is compliant with the configuration

plan.

3. Check ODU-TTI, OTU-TTI or OTS-TTI on the

remote WDM equipment.

4. End.

Transmission Alarms otnTIM (Optical Transport Network Trace IdentifierMismatch)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



21-13

SSF (Server Signal Failure)


Description Transmission problems have occurred.

SSF alarm is relevant in the context of remote network

management. In such context, SSF alarm indicates the

operator that a primary transmission alarm has been

raised.

SSF alarm can be raised by:

In case of simultaneous lower layer alarms:

• OMS, ODU, RS blocks.

In case of absence of lower layer alarms:

• OCHgdc block of ETHC and 2xGBE_FC boards,

• RsTTP, RSgdc blocks of ETHC and 2xGBE_FC

boards.

Probable Cause In case of simultaneous lower layer alarms:

The service related to the lower layer alarm is lost.


• The SDH frame is not correct or does not contain

GFP framing or

• The VLA� service which is terminated by the board

is faulty.

Related Alarms In case of simultaneous lower layer alarms:

• LOS, or

• AIS, or

• LOF, or

• URU, or

• LOMS, or

• LOW, or

• LOMF, or

• TIM.

Corrective Actions

On-Site Intervention Required In case of simultaneous lower layer alarms:

Refer to the lower layer alarms troubleshooting

description


Depends on the diagnostic.

Transmission Alarms SSF (Server Signal Failure)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................




Actions In case of simultaneous lower layer alarms:

Perform the necessary actions associated to the related

alarms.


Based on the probable cause described above, analyze

the SSF alarm context from the network manager.

Transmission Alarms SSF (Server Signal Failure)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



21-15

SSF- i (Server Signal Failure - ingress)

SSF- i (Server Signal Failure - ingress)

Description Raised in the context of OS�CP protection, to report

that transmission problems have occurred on the client

network side.

SSF-i alarm is raised by OCPU board only.

Probable Cause 2 simultaneous SSF alarms have raised on both main

and spare boards.

Related Alarms SSF (Server Signal Failure)

Corrective Actions


Actions Contact the relevant operation team to solve the

problem.

Transmission Alarms SSF- i (Server Signal Failure - ingress)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



SSF- e (Server Signal Failure - egress)

SSF - e (Server Signal Failure-egress)

Description Raised in the context of OS�CP protection, to report

that transmission problems have occurred at the output

of WDM network.

SSF - e alarm is raised by OCPU board only.

Probable Cause Transmission problems have occurred at the interface of

WDM network.

Related Alarms• SSF (at least on active transponder)

• Transmission alarm(s) specific to the problem.

Corrective Actions


Actions 1. Check the transmission alarm(s).

2. Depending on the transmission alarm, refer to

related corrective actions.

3. End.

Transmission Alarms SSF- e (Server Signal Failure - egress)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



21-17

TCA (Threshold Crossing Alarm)

TCA (Threshold Crossing Alarm)

Description An alarm threshold has been reached or exceeded. As a

consequence, the PM-AS (Performance Monitoring -

Alarm Surveillance) icon color is changed

PM-AS alarm is raised by:

• Rs-TM or OCHA blocks of TRBC or TRBD boards

or

• RsTTP block from ETHC or 2xGE_FC boards.



Corrective Actions


Actions 1. Analyze the relevant current and historical counters.

2. Check the previous transmission devices (client or

WDM) until you find the source of the alarm.

3. Perform the necessary actions to clear the alarm.

4. End.

Transmission Alarms TCA (Threshold Crossing Alarm)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



TIM (Trace Identifier Mismatch)

TIM (Trace Identifier Mismatch)

Description The received RS-TTI is not the expected one.

TIM alarm may be raised by:

• Rs-TM block of TRBC or TRBD boards or

• RsTTP block of Ethernet boards.

Probable Cause Wrong configuration of RS section.


Corrective Actions


Actions For transponders:

1. Check if the current cabling is compliant with the

cabling plan.

2. Check the received RS-TTI of all previous boards or

nodes.

3. End.

For Ethernet boards:

1. Check the RS-TTI configured on the previous

remote Ethernet boards.

2. End.

Transmission Alarms TIM (Trace Identifier Mismatch)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



21-19

UAT (UnAvailable Time)

UAT (UnAvailable Time)

Description Indicates an important error rate during 10 consecutive

seconds.


is degraded.

• Tuning discrepancy between transponders and


of WDM channels.




Corrective Actions


Actions 1. Analyze the signal degradation alarms of the

previous transmission devices.

2. End.

Transmission Alarms UAT (UnAvailable Time)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



UE (Uncorrected Error)

UE (Uncorrected Error)

Description Indicates that the FEC does not correct all the

transmission errors.


is degraded.

• Tuning discrepancy between transponders an


of WDM channels.




Corrective Actions

On-Site Intervention Required �one.


2. Check the fiber between the 1626 LM and the


3. Measure the channel margin.

4. If necessary, tune the line to recover the channel

margin.

5. End.

Transmission Alarms UE (Uncorrected Error)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



21-21

URU (Underlying Resource Unavailable)

URU (Underlying Resource Unavailable)

Description Indicates that an �E internal failure has occurred. Can

be an hardware failure or an internal cabling failure.


Related Alarms• SSF (Server Signal failure)

• All Equipment alarms may potentially be raised.

Corrective Actions


Actions 1. Check the related alarm(s).

2. Depending on the alarm, refer to related corrective

actions.

3. End.

Transmission Alarms URU (Underlying Resource Unavailable)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



22 22Processing Alarms

Overview

Purpose

This topic gives a description of the alarm raised when data are corrupted and the

required actions to perform to clear this alarm.

Contents

DB (Database Corrupted) 22-2

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



22-1

DB (Database Corrupted)

DB (Database Corrupted)

Description• The MIB (Master Information Base) is corrupted.

• The DB icon of the main window turns to color

orange.

• Traffic is not affected but �E alarms are not raised

anymore.

Probable Cause May be the result of several factors, including:

• power outages,

• interruptions or crashes during the writing of data

• etc.


Corrective Actions


Actions 1. Restore a clean MIB (refer to “Restoring the MIB”

(p. 7-5).

2. From the main window, check if the DB icon has

been reset to non sever level.

3. If the problem persists, erase the MIB and the local

configuration (refer to Maintenance and Trouble

Clearing Guide, Database and Local Configuration

Maintenance chapter).

4. From the main window, check if the DB icon has

been reset to non severe level.


Support Team.

6. End.

Processing Alarms DB (Database Corrupted)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

A AFI

Authority and Format Identifier

ALCT

Automatic Level ConTrol

ANTP

Alcatel �etwork Time Protocol

APE

Automatic Power Equalization

APSD

Automatic Power Shutdown

APT

Amplifier Power Tuning

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

B BER

Bit Error Rate

BMDX

Band Multiplexer DemultipleXer

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

C CMDX

Channel Multiplexer DemultipleXer

CT

Craft Terminal

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

D DAPI

Destination Address Point Identifier

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



GL-1

DCC

Data Country Code

DSP

Domain Specific Part

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

E EOL

End Of Life

ESCT

Equipment and Shelf ConTroller

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

F FEC

Forward Error Correction

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

G GE_FC

Gigabit EThernet Fiber Channel

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

I IDI

Initial Domain Identifier

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

L LAPD

Link Acces Protocol - channel D

LM

Light Manager

LOFA

Line Optical Fiber Amplifier

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

M MIB

Management Information Base

MSP

Multiplex Section Protection

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

N NSAP

�etwork Service Access Point

NTP

�etwork Time Protocol

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

GL-2 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction


...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

O OCH

Optical Channel

OMDX

Optical Multiplexer DemultipleXer

OMSP

Optical Multiplex Section Protection

OND

Optical �etwork Design Platform

OSC

Optical Supervisory Channel

OSI

Open System Interconnection

OSNCP

Optical Sub�etwork Connection Protection

OTS

Optical Transmission Section

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

P PM

Performance Monitoring

PSUP

Power SUPply

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

R R-OADM

Reconfigurable Optical Add & Drop Multiplexer

Rx

Emission

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

S SAPI

Source Address Point Identifier

SFP

Smal Form Factor Pluggable

SNCP

Sub�etwork Connection Protection

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



GL-3

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

T TDMX

Tunable Demultiplexer

TMN

Telecommunication Management �etwork

TR-OADM

Tunable and Reconfigurable Optical Add & Drop Multiplexer

TRB

Tributary

Tx

Transmission

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

V VOA

Variable Optical Attenuation

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

W WDM

Wavelength Division Multiplexing

WMAN

Wavelength Manager

WSS

Wavelength Selective Switch

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

X XFP

eXtended Form Factor Pluggable

Glossary

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

GL-4 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction


Index

A Access State, 4-5

Access State icons, 4-7

Addresses

Local area address parameters,

6-4

AIS, 21-2

Alarm Thresholds

Alarm Threshold Parameters,

19-24

Alarms

Alarm Management, 19-1

Alarm Thresholds, 19-23

Alarm Types, 19-4

Equipment Alarms, 20-1

Operation domain alarm

indicators, 3-28, 19-7

Processing Alarms, 22-1

Severity indicators, 3-26, 3-26,

19-5

Severity Profiles, 19-8

Transmission Alarms, 21-1

ASAP, 19-8

ASAPManagement, 19-10

AUP, 20-3

.............................................................

B Board View, 3-7

.............................................................

C Cabling

Exporting to XML File, 13-6

Procedures, 13-4, 13-5, 13-6

Channel Margin

Procedure, 16-8

COCE, 20-4

Configuration

Exportation, 18-2

Exporting System

Configuration to XML File,

18-6

Connectors, 13-1

Procedures, 13-2, 13-3

Counters

Thresholds, 17-8

Craft Terminal, 2-2

Starting the Craft Terminal, 4-3

Cross Connection, 12-1

Parameters, 12-8

Type of cross connections,

12-3

CSF, 21-3

CT, 2-2

.............................................................

D DB, 22-2

Domain alarm indicators, 3-28,

3-28, 19-7, 19-7

.............................................................

E EQPT, 20-5

Equipment View, 3-2

Ethernet

Configuring Ethernet interface,

6-18

Ethernet interface parameters,

6-7, 6-7

Event Logs, 16-7

Exportation

Configuration, 18-2

Exporting

Cabling Configuration, 13-6

System Configuration (to XML

file), 18-6

.............................................................

G Graphical User Interface, 3-1

GUI, 3-1

Starting the 1626 L GUI, 4-4

.............................................................

H HT, 20-6

HVCSP, 20-7

.............................................................

I Icons

Access State icons, 4-7

Indicators

Management status indicators,

3-29

IPD, 20-8

IPL, 20-9

.............................................................

L LA�, 20-10

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................



IN-1

LBER, 21-4

LOF, 21-5

LOMF, 21-6

LOMS, 21-7

Loopback, 14-1

LOS, 21-8

LOSC, 21-9

LOSCF, 21-10

LOW, 21-11

LTCER, 21-12

.............................................................

M Management

Craft Terminal, 2-2

Monitoring

Procedures, 16-2

.............................................................

N �TP

Disabling �TP, 6-16

Identifying a �TP server, 6-15

�TP server network address

parameters, 6-6

.............................................................

O OCCO, 20-11

ontTIM, 21-13

OPD, 20-12

OPL, 20-13

.............................................................

P PD, 20-14

Performance Counters, 17-4

Performance Monitoring, 17-1

Mechanism, 17-7

PP, 20-15

Protection

Protection Parameters, 15-14

Protection Principles, 15-3

Recommended board locations,

15-10

.............................................................

R R-OADM, 10-1

�etwork Procedures /

WMA�3x74, 10-9

Unitary Procedures /

WMA1100, 10-25


WMA�3x74, 10-15

Remote Inventory, 18-2

Procedures, 18-3

RUM, 20-16

RUP, 20-17

RUTM, 20-18

RUU, 20-19

.............................................................

S SCP, 20-20

Severity indicators, 3-26, 19-5

Severity Profiles, 19-8

SSF, 21-14

SSF-e, 21-17

SSF-I, 21-16

Status indicators, 3-29

Supervision

Starting the 1626 LM

supervision, 4-4

.............................................................

T TCA, 21-18

TD, 20-21

TF, 20-22

TIM, 21-13, 21-19

TOOR, 20-23

TR-OADM, 10-1

�etwork Procedures /

WMA�3x74, 10-9


WMA1100, 10-25


WMA�3x74, 10-15

Transmission View, 3-15

.............................................................

U UAT, 21-20

UDCL, 20-25

UE, 21-21

UEP, 20-24

URU, 21-22

.............................................................

V View

Board View, 3-7

Equipment View, 3-2

VM, 20-26

.............................................................

W WD, 20-27

Index

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

IN-2 Alcatel-Lucent – ConfidentialSolely for authorized persons having a need to knowProprietary – Use pursuant to Company instruction


Documents

1626LM 5.0B User Provisioning Guide Ed02